diff --git a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
index 0a9d07254f..dcd8014f06 100644
--- a/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_41-MAT.tsv
@@ -1138,7 +1138,7 @@ MAT 16 11 i7x6 figs-metaphor τῆς ζύμης τῶν Φαρισαίων κα
MAT 16 12 f73l writing-pronouns συνῆκαν 1 they understood The pronoun **they** refers to the disciples. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
MAT 16 13 e5cm writing-newevent δὲ 1 Connecting Statement: Jesus is using the word translated **now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
MAT 16 13 e1jh figs-123person τὸν Υἱὸν τοῦ Ἀνθρώπου 1 the Son of Man Jesus is speaking about himself in the third person. If this would not be natural in your language, you could use the first person form, as in the UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God ddddddd**Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
+MAT 16 16 n5wi guidelines-sonofgodprinciples ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 the Son of the living God **Son** is an important title that describes the relationship between Jesus and God. Be sure to retain this title in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
MAT 16 16 r1h7 figs-explicit τοῦ Θεοῦ τοῦ ζῶντος 1 of the living God Here, Peter uses the phrase **living God** to speaking about God as if he is alive. This is to contrast God as the only true God with the other gods who are not real. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “of the only true God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
MAT 16 17 yh0s grammar-connect-logic-result μακάριος εἶ, Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ, ὅτι σὰρξ καὶ αἷμα οὐκ ἀπεκάλυψέν σοι, ἀλλ’ ὁ Πατήρ μου, ὁ ἐν τοῖς οὐρανοῖς 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “Since flesh and blood did not reveal this to you, but my Father who is in heaven, you are blessed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
MAT 16 17 le6a translate-names Σίμων Βαριωνᾶ 1 Simon Bar Jonah The word **Bar** here is another way of saying “son of”. If it would be helpful in your language, could state that explicitly. Alternate translation: “son of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
diff --git a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv
index bd44b55a9f..8721fcdc47 100644
--- a/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_45-ACT.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of Acts
1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)
Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.
### What is the book of Acts about?
The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”
### Who wrote the book of Acts?
The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.
Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the church?
The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.
### The kingdom of God
The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Figurative usages in the book of Acts
“arise/arising”
Luke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.“brothers”
Luke often uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts
“to the same”
The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.
“in/to/into the temple”
Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.
### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?
The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.
First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets [ ]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:
- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”
Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:
- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”
- Acts 10:19, “three men. Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”
- Acts 10:30, ““Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”
- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ACT front intro mw28 0 # Introduction to Acts
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the book of Acts
1. The apostles spread the good news about Jesus in Jerusalem (1:1–6:7)
2. The church expands into Judea and Samaria (6:8–9:31)
3. The church expands to include Gentiles (9:32–12:24)
4. Paul goes to Asia Minor as an apostle to the Gentiles (12:25–16:5)
5. The church expands into the middle Mediterranean area (16:6–19:20)
6. Paul reaches Rome, but as a prisoner and after several trials (19:21–28:31)
Luke makes transitional statements at 6:7, 9:31, 12:24, 16:5, and 19:20 to mark the movement from each major part of the book to the next part.
### What is the book of Acts about?
The book of Acts tells the story of the early church. It relates how more and more people, from different backgrounds and in different parts of the Roman Empire, became believers in Jesus. It shows the power of the Holy Spirit helping the early Christians. The events in this book begin with the return of Jesus to heaven and they end about 30 years later.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by its traditional title, “The Acts of the Apostles.” Or translators may choose a different title, for example, “The Acts of the Holy Spirit through the Apostles.”
### Who wrote the book of Acts?
The author of this book does not give his own name. However, the book is dedicated to Theophilus, the same person to whom Luke dedicated his story of the life of Jesus, the Gospel of Luke. Also, in parts of this book, the author uses the word “we.” This indicates that the author traveled with Paul. Most scholars think that Luke was this person who traveled with Paul. Therefore, since early Christian times, most Christians have thought that Luke was the author of the book of Acts as well as the Gospel of Luke.
Luke was a medical doctor. His way of writing shows that he was an educated man. He was probably a Gentile. He personally witnessed many of the events that he describes in the book of Acts.
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### What is the church?
The church is the community of people who believe in Jesus as their Lord and Savior. The church includes both Jewish and Gentile believers. The book of Acts shows God helping the church. It shows God doing signs and wonders to confirm the church’s testimony to Jesus, leading many people to have faith in Jesus, guiding the church about where and how to share the good news, and enabling believers to resolve conflicts and endure persecution.
### The kingdom of God
The “kingdom of God” is a major concept in the book of Acts, as it is in the Gospel of Luke. This concept is very rich in meaning. It includes the idea of eternal life in the presence of God, but it also includes the idea of what the earth will be like in the future when God rules everything, and the idea of life on earth right now, when and where God’s wishes are carried out fully. The unifying concept behind all of these ideas is that of God ruling and of people embracing God’s rule over their lives. Wherever the expression “the kingdom of God” occurs, translation notes will suggest communicating the idea behind the abstract noun “kingdom” with some phrase that uses the verb “rule.” UST models this approach consistently. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Figurative usages in the book of Acts
“arise/arising”
Luke often says “arise” or “arising” to mean taking action to get an enterprise under way, rather than to mean getting up from a sitting or lying position. Notes will indicate where this figurative usage occurs.
“brothers”
Luke often uses the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Although this term is masculine, Luke uses the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If you decide to retain this figurative usage in your translation, you could say “brothers and sisters” to indicate that the word has this generic sense. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])### Possible translation difficulties in the book of Acts
“to the same”
The phrase “to the same” occurs five times in this book (1:15, 2:1, 2:44, 2:47, 4:26). It is not entirely clear what this phrase means. In the first three instances it could mean “in the same place,” but it could also mean “in one accord,” that is, “in full agreement.” In 2:47 it seems to mean “to their group.” Paul uses the same phrase in 1 Corinthians 11:20 and 14:23, where it could mean “in the same place” or it could have the sense of full agreement and mean something like “in Christian fellowship.” That sense would fit Acts 2:47, where the phrase could be translated “to their Christian fellowship.” In 4:26 it could mean “to the same place,” but it could also mean “by agreement.” Notes will discuss the different possibilities in each case where the phrase could mean more than one thing.
“in/to/into the temple”
Luke uses this phrase many times in this book, but it does not refer to the temple building itself. Only priests were allowed to enter that building, so the phrase refers to the courtyard or area around the temple. The phrase “in the porch that is called Solomon’s” in 3:11 makes it clear that Peter and John and the crowd that gathered on the occasion that chapter describes were not inside the temple building. Notes will address this phrase to explain its meaning each time it occurs in the book.
### What are the major issues in the text of the book of Acts?
The following are the most significant textual issues in Acts. Notes will address them where they occur in the book.
First, there are some verses that are found in traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. Some modern versions put these verses in square brackets \[ \]. The ULT and UST also put them in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including these verses if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that these verses may not be original. You could put them in brackets, for example, or in footnotes. These verses are:
- Acts 8:37, “Philip said, ‘If you believe with all your heart, you may be baptized.’ The Ethiopian answered, ‘I believe that Jesus Christ is the Son of God.’”
- Acts 15:34, “But it seemed good to Silas to remain there.”
- Acts 24:6-8, “And we wanted to judge him according to our law. But Lysias, the officer, came and forcibly took him out of our hands, sending him to you.”
- Acts 28:29, “When he had said these things, the Jews departed, having a great dispute among themselves.”
Second, in some verses, it is uncertain what the original text said. The ULT uses the first readings listed below, but it includes the second readings in footnotes. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider following the same reading that it does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you follow the same reading that ULT does. These verses are:
- Acts 3:22, “the Lord our God.” Some versions read “the Lord your God,” and other versions read “the Lord God.”
- Acts 7:46, “a dwelling for the house of Jacob.” Some versions read “for the God of Jacob.”
- Acts 10:19, “three men.” Some versions read “two men” or “some men.”
- Acts 10:30, “Four days ago, at this hour, I was praying at the ninth {hour} in my house.” Some versions read, “From the fourth day until this hour, I was fasting, and at the ninth hour I was praying in my house.”
- Acts 12:25, “They returned from Jerusalem.” Some versions read, “They returned to Jerusalem” (or “to there”).
- Acts 13:18, “he put up with them.” Some versions read, “he cared for them.”
- Acts 15:17-18, “This is what the Lord says, who has done these things that have been known from ancient times.” Some older versions read, “This is what the Lord says, to whom are known all his deeds from ancient times.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
ACT 1 intro vyg9 0 # Acts 1 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
The UST has set the words “Dear Theophilus” apart from the other words. This is because English speakers often start letters this way. You may want to start this book in the way that people start letters in your culture.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the two quotations from the book of Psalms in 1:20.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### The Ascension
This chapter records an event that is commonly known as the “Ascension.” That word describes how Jesus returned to heaven after he became alive again. In the future he will come back to earth again, and his return to earth is known as his “Second Coming.” (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/resurrection]])
### Baptism
Luke uses the word “baptize” with two different meanings in [1:5](../01/05.md). In the first instance, it refers literally to the water baptism of John. In the second instance, it refers to people being filled with the Holy Spirit. Luke uses the term “filled” to mean this same thing in [2:4](../02/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/baptize]])
### “He spoke things concerning the kingdom of God”
Some scholars believe that when Jesus spoke “things concerning the kingdom of God,” as Luke describes in [1:3](../01/03.md), he explained to the disciples why the kingdom of God had not come while he was on earth the first time. Other scholars believe that the kingdom of God did begin while Jesus was on earth and that Jesus explained that it had come in a form different from the one the disciples had expected. Since Christians hold different views about the kingdom of God coming, translators should be careful to avoid letting how they understand that issue affect how they translate this verse.
## Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter
### Long sentence
As was common in compositions of this time, for stylistic purposes Luke begins this book with a very long sentence. It goes from the beginning of [1:1](../01/01.md) to the end of [1:3](../01/03.md). ULT represents all of this as a single sentence. It may be helpful to your readers to divide it into several sentences, as UST does.
### The details of the death of Judas
There are some differences in detail between the way Luke describes the death of Judas in the book of Acts and the way Matthew describes it in his gospel. Luke says that Judas used the money he got for betraying Jesus to buy a field; Matthew says that Judas returned the money to the Jewish leaders and that they bought the field with it. Luke says that Judas killed himself by falling onto the field from a height; Matthew says that Judas hanged himself. Luke says that the field was named the “Field of Blood” because Judas died a bloody death there; Matthew says the field was given that name because it was purchased with “blood money,” that is, money paid to ensure someone’s death.
It is possible to reconcile many of these details. For example, the body of Judas may have fallen and split open on the field if he fell when he tried to hang himself. Luke may say that Judas bought the field because the Jewish leaders would not take back the money that they had paid him, and so in a sense it was still his money when the field was purchased with it.
But it would probably be best to avoid trying to reconcile these details within your translation. For example, when Luke says in [1:18](../01/18.md) that Judas fell onto the field, instead of saying that he fell when he was trying to hang himself, you can let Luke and Matthew each tell the story the way they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
### The 12 disciples
There is one small difference between the list of the 12 disciples that Matthew and Mark provide in their gospels and the list that Luke provides in his gospel and in the book of Acts.
All three writers list Simon Peter and his brother Andrew; James and John, the two sons of Zebedee; Philip, Bartholomew, Thomas, Matthew, James the son of Alphaeus, Simon the Zealot, and Judas Iscariot. But Matthew and Mark say that the twelfth disciple was Thaddeus, while Luke says he was Judas the son of James. However, it is quite likely that Thaddeus was another name by which this other Judas was known.
Once again it is not necessary to try to reconcile these details within your translation. Specifically, in [1:13](../01/13.md) instead of saying, “Judas the son of James, who was also known as Thaddeus,” you can let each of the biblical writers tell the story in the way that they do. Then you can leave it up to preachers and teachers of the Bible to explain how their accounts are compatible.
ACT 1 1 q9ep figs-explicit τὸν μὲν πρῶτον λόγον ἐποιησάμην 1 I made the first account Luke assumes that Theophilus will know that by **the first account** he means the book that has become known as the Gospel of Luke. Since that book was not known by that title at this time, it would not be accurate to put the title in your translation as a name that Luke would have used to describe the book to Theophilus. However, you could explain this in a footnote and use another expression here. Alternate translation: “I wrote in my first volume” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 1 1 a000 ὦ Θεόφιλε 1 O Theophilus Here Luke is identifying and addressing the man for whom he complied this account of the early church. Since this is like the salutation of a letter, in your translation you may wish to follow your culture’s way of identifying and greeting the addressee of a letter. UST models this by saying “Dear Theophilus” and putting the phrase at the beginning of the sentence.
@@ -114,7 +114,7 @@ ACT 1 20 chq4 figs-metaphor γενηθήτω ἡ ἔπαυλις αὐτοῦ
ACT 1 20 a059 τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 Let another take his overseership The word **overseership** refers to a position of leadership and supervision. It is the same term that Paul uses for a spiritual leader in [1 Timothy 3:1](../1ti/03/01.md). Alternate translation: “Let someone else take his leadership position”
ACT 1 20 uctm figs-imperative3p τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “May another take his overseership” or “Another should take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
ACT 1 20 jdsg figs-imperative τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. The psalmist is continuing God to judge and punish the wicked. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please let another take his overseership” or “Please may another take his overseership” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
-ACT 1 20 elz8 figs-123person τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
+ACT 1 20 elz8 figs-123person τὴν ἐπισκοπὴν αὐτοῦ, λαβέτω ἕτερος 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative. Alternate translation: “God, make another take his overseership” or “God, please give his overseership to another” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
ACT 1 21 t916 translate-versebridge 0 To help your readers understand Peter’s main point in this verse and the next one, you could combine both verses into a verse bridge. You could put his main point in a first sentence and his further explanation in a second sentence. Alternate translation: “Therefore it is necessary for someone else to become a witness with us of Jesus’ resurrection. It should be one of the men who accompanied us during all the time that the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us, beginning from the baptism of John until the day that he was taken up from us.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
ACT 1 21 xz69 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν…ἡμᾶς 1 us … us In the first instance of **us**, Peter means himself and his fellow apostles, not everyone to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of the word if your language marks that distinction. However, in the second instance of **us**, Peter could well mean himself and his entire audience, so use the inclusive form in that instance. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 1 21 zuf7 figs-idiom εἰσῆλθεν καὶ ἐξῆλθεν ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ὁ Κύριος Ἰησοῦς 1 the Lord Jesus came in and went out among us Peter is speaking in an idiomatic way. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus lived among us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -342,7 +342,7 @@ ACT 2 34 kvn8 figs-explicit ἐκ δεξιῶν μου 1 at my right In this cul
ACT 2 35 nf1x figs-metaphor ἕως ἂν θῶ τοὺς ἐχθρούς σου ὑποπόδιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 until I make your enemies a stool for your feet The psalm says that God would make the Messiah’s **enemies** a **stool** for his **feet** to mean that God would conquer those enemies and make them submit to the Messiah. Alternate translation: “until I conquer your enemies for you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 2 35 a176 figs-quotemarks τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 for your feet This is the end of David’s quotation of the Lord and of Peter’s quotation of David. If you chose to mark these in your translation as a third-level and a second-level quotation, indicate that ending here with the appropriate closing quotation marks or the comparable punctuation or convention in your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
ACT 2 36 a177 grammar-connect-logic-result οὖν 1 Therefore Peter is using the word **Therefore** to introduce the result of what he has just said. Alternate translation: “Since David was not talking about himself, but about the Messiah” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT 2 36 msqt figs-imperative γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+ACT 2 36 msqt figs-imperative3p γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may all the house of Israel know” or “all the house of Israel should know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
ACT 2 36 tgbf figs-123person γινωσκέτω πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 It may be more natural in your language to use the second person for this imperative, since to this point in his speech Peter has been addressing his audience in the second person. Alternate translation: “all you in the house of Israel, know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
ACT 2 36 pnp5 figs-metaphor πᾶς οἶκος Ἰσραὴλ 1 all the house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So **the house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the entire nation of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 2 37 s85q figs-activepassive ἀκούσαντες…κατενύγησαν τὴν καρδίαν 1 hearing this, they were pierced in the heart If it would be helpful in your language, you could say this with an active form. Alternate translation: “what they heard Peter say pierced their heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -786,7 +786,7 @@ ACT 5 24 baw2 writing-pronouns περὶ αὐτῶν 1 concerning them The pron
ACT 5 24 p78m figs-idiom τί ἂν γένοιτο τοῦτο 1 as to what this might become The expression **what this might become** refers to a possible result. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “wondering what would happen as a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 5 25 a384 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, οἱ ἄνδρες 1 Behold, the men This person says **Behold** to get the council members to focus their attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. Alternate translation: “Right now the men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 5 25 a8dz figs-you ἔθεσθε 1 you put Here the word **you** refers to the captain of the temple and the chief priests and so it is plural. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-ACT 5 25 c1am figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες 1 standing in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 5 25 c1am figs-explicit ἐν τῷ ἱερῷ, ἑστῶτες 1 standing in the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when the messenger says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “standing in the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 5 26 e24h writing-pronouns τότε ἀπελθὼν, ὁ στρατηγὸς σὺν τοῖς ὑπηρέταις ἦγεν αὐτούς, οὐ μετὰ βίας, ἐφοβοῦντο γὰρ τὸν λαόν, μὴ λιθασθῶσιν 1 Then the captain, going with the officers, brought them back, not with violence, for they feared the people, lest they stone them The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the apostles, but the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the captain and the officers. The captain and officers were not afraid that the people would stone the apostles. They were afraid that they would be stoned themselves if they used violence against the apostles. You could reword this to make the referents clear. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “Then the captain went with the officers and brought the apostles back. But the captain and officers did not use any violence, because they were afraid that the people would stone them if they did” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 5 27 iq7w writing-pronouns ἀγαγόντες δὲ αὐτοὺς 1 And having brought them The pronoun **them** refers to the apostles in all three instances in this verse. It may be helpful to specify this here in the first instance. Alternate translation: “Once they had brought the apostles back” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 5 28 a385 παραγγελίᾳ παρηγγείλαμεν ὑμῖν 1 We commanded you with a command For emphasis, the high priest is using a construction in which a verb and its object come from the same root. If your language uses the same construction for emphasis, it would be appropriate to use it here in your translation. Other languages may have other ways of conveying this emphasis. Alternate translation: “we commanded you very strictly”
@@ -972,7 +972,7 @@ ACT 7 10 pb4p figs-metonymy ὅλον τὸν οἶκον αὐτοῦ 1 over al
ACT 7 11 p42j figs-personification ἦλθεν…λιμὸς ἐφ’ ὅλην τὴν Αἴγυπτον καὶ Χανάαν, καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 came a famine Here, Stephen speaks of **famine** and **tribulation** as if they **came** to Egypt and Canaan on their own. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could express this meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “there was a famine over all Egypt and Canaan, and there was great tribulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
ACT 7 11 ncnr translate-names Χανάαν 1 **Canaan** is the name of a place, the land where the Israelites eventually settled. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 7 11 frd4 figs-abstractnouns καὶ θλῖψις μεγάλη 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **tribulation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “and people suffered greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 7 11 p37v figs-explicit οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” He means specifically Jacob and his sons (Joseph’s older brothers), as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 12 pia8 figs-explicit ὄντα σιτία εἰς Αἴγυπτον 1 grain Stephen assumes that his readers will know that with Joseph as his administrator, Pharaoh had stored up grain during prosperous years and was now selling it. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this explicitly. Alternate translation: “that people could buy stored grain from Pharaoh in Egypt” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 12 cvhm figs-explicit ἐξαπέστειλεν τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν πρῶτον 1 By **first**, Stephen does not mean that Jacob sent Joseph’s older brothers to Egypt before he sent anyone else, or before he did anything else. He means that Jacob sent them for a first time and would later send them for a second time, as Stephen’s listeners would have understood. Alternate translation: “he sent our fathers on a first trip there to buy food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 12 mbg8 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Stephen is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Here he means specifically Joseph’s older brothers, as UST indicates. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1043,7 +1043,7 @@ ACT 7 29 l149 figs-explicit ἔφυγεν…Μωϋσῆς ἐν τῷ λόγῳ
ACT 7 29 rbhm figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 Stephen is using the term **word** to mean what the man said by using words. Alternate translation: “at this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 7 29 pit4 translate-names Μαδιάμ 1 **Midian** is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 7 29 q8qv figs-explicit οὗ ἐγέννησεν υἱοὺς δύο 1 at this statement Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that Moses married a Midianite woman when he fled from Egypt. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “where he married a Midianite woman and fathered two sons” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-explicit πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 7 30 zx1c figs-idiom πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 And when 40 years were past This is an idiomatic way of speaking about time. Alternate translation: “after 40 years had gone by” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 7 30 qci0 figs-activepassive πληρωθέντων ἐτῶν τεσσεράκοντα 1 Since this is an idiom, it would probably not be meaningful in most languages to retain the verb “fill” and use an active verbal form instead of the passive form. However, if your language does speak of someone or something “filling” days or times so that they arrive, and if your language does not use passive verbal forms, you could use an active form of “fill” here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 7 30 veft figs-idiom ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος 1 The word **appeared** does not mean that Moses simply saw this angel in a vision. Rather, this expression indicates that the angel was actually present with Moses. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel was there with Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 7 30 f7yu figs-explicit ὤφθη αὐτῷ…ἄγγελος 1 an angel appeared Stephen assumes that his listeners know that God came to speak with Moses through the **angel**. The UST makes this explicit. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1099,25 +1099,25 @@ ACT 7 42 f314 figs-explicit βίβλῳ τῶν προφητῶν 1 the book of
ACT 7 42 w38i figs-quotemarks μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ 1 This is the beginning of a quotation from the prophet Amos, which continues through the end of verse 43. Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present this quotation from Amos as a direct quotation if possible, since God is addressing the Israelites directly in it. You may be able to indicate its beginning with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language uses to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
ACT 7 42 o5ly figs-doublenegatives μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 The first word of this sentence in Greek is a negative word that can be used to turn a negative statement into a question that expects a negative answer. ULT shows this by adding **did you?** Your language may have other ways of asking a question that expects a negative answer, for example, by changing the word order of a positive statement. Translate this in the way that would be clearest in your language. Alternate translation: “Did you offer slain beasts and offerings to me for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
ACT 7 42 gd1b figs-rquestion μὴ σφάγια καὶ θυσίας προσηνέγκατέ μοι, ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, οἶκος Ἰσραήλ? 1 You did not offer to me slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, did you, O house of Israel? Speaking through the prophet Amos, God used the question form to emphasize to the people of **Israel** that they did not really worship Him **in the wilderness** with their sacrifices. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate these words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “You did not honor me when you offered slain beasts and sacrifices for 40 years in the wilderness, O house of Israel!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 7 43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
ACT 7 42 q9rr figs-yousingular μὴ…προσηνέγκατέ 1 **You** is plural in these instances, even though the addressee (**house**) is singular, because God is actually speaking to all of the Israelites. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in such a case, you can use singular **you** in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
ACT 7 42 tck0 figs-merism σφάγια καὶ θυσίας 1 In a figure of speech, God is using the two main categories of sacrifices, those that involve shedding blood (**slain beasts**) and those that are bloodless (**offerings**), to mean sacrifices of all kinds. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “all kinds of sacrifices” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
ACT 7 42 j4q8 figs-metaphor οἶκος Ἰσραήλ 1 O house of Israel Here, **house** means all the people descended from a particular person. It envisions them as if they were one household living together. So the **house of Israel** means all the people descended from the patriarch Jacob, who was also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “nation of Israel” or “people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 7 43 h20h grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 **And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../01/32.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
+ACT 7 43 zek5 καὶ ἀνελάβετε τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ, καὶ τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν, τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε προσκυνεῖν αὐτοῖς. καὶ μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος. 1 The quotation from the prophet Amos continues here.
+ACT 7 43 h20h grammar-connect-logic-contrast καὶ 1 **And** at the beginning of this verse introduces God’s own answer to the question he asked in the previous verse, [7:42](../07/42.md): “You did not offer slain beasts and offerings to me …, did you?” The answer is in contrast to what the question asks. Use a natural way in your language for introducing a contrast. Alternate translation, followed by a sentence break: “No!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
ACT 7 43 q85n figs-irony ἀνελάβετε…μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς 1 The term **took up** indicates that the Israelites carried the idols this verse describes around with them as they traveled in the wilderness. The term **remove** in this context means that God will send them into exile as a punishment, with the sense of carrying them away from their homeland. So the punishment is ironic; if possible, use similar terms in your language that will bring out this irony. Alternate translation: “you carried around … I will carry you away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-irony]])
ACT 7 43 gxh2 figs-yousingular ἀνελάβετε…ὑμῶν…ἐποιήσατε…ὑμᾶς 1 As in [7:42](../07/42.md), **you** is plural here, even though the addressee (“house”) is singular, since God is speaking to all of the Israelites. In this verse **your** is also plural. If it would not be natural in your language to use the plural in these cases, you can use the singular in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
ACT 7 43 im7e figs-explicit τὴν σκηνὴν τοῦ Μολὸχ 1 the tabernacle of Molech The **tabernacle of Molech** was a tent or shrine that housed an idol of the false god Molech. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say this explicitly, as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 43 cq47 figs-explicit τὸ ἄστρον τοῦ θεοῦ ὑμῶν Ῥαιφάν 1 the star of your god Rephan The Israelites were not carrying around an actual **star**, but an image designed to look like a star. This image was used in the worship of the false god Rephan. (This may have been the planet Saturn.) Alternate translation: “the star-shaped image of your god Rephan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 43 gm4g figs-explicit τοὺς τύπους οὓς ἐποιήσατε 1 and the images that you made The word **images** refers to the idol of Molech and the star-shaped image of Rephan. It may be helpful to make this a separate sentence. Alternate translation: “You made that idol of Molech and that star-shaped image of Rephan so that you could worship those false gods.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 43 zgq6 grammar-connect-logic-result καὶ 3 I will carry you away beyond Babylon Speaking through Amos, God uses the word translated **and** to introduce what he will do as a result of the Israelites’ unfaithfulness and disobedience. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “As a result” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
-ACT 7 44 fs4q 0 Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md).
ACT 7 43 rrn8 figs-quotemarks μετοικιῶ ὑμᾶς ἐπέκεινα Βαβυλῶνος 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Amos that began in verse 42. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ACT 7 44 fs4q 0 Connecting Statement: Stephen continues his response to the high priest and the council which he began in [Acts 7:2](../07/02.md).
ACT 7 44 hfmx figs-ellipsis ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου ἦν τοῖς πατράσιν ἡμῶν ἐν τῇ ἐρήμῳ, καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen is not saying that the **tabernacle** was **with** the Israelites just as God had commanded. He means that the tabernacle was built **according to the pattern** that Moses saw on Mount Sinai. To make this clear, it may be helpful to supply some of the words that Stephen is leaving out. It may also be helpful to introduce a sentence break. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle of the testimony was with our fathers in the wilderness. It was built just as the one speaking to Moses had commanded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 7 44 m9gw figs-metonymy ἡ σκηνὴ τοῦ μαρτυρίου 1 The tabernacle of the testimony Stephen calls this tent the **tabernacle of the testimony** by association with the way it housed the ark of the covenant, which was also known as the ark of the testimony. The “testimony” of the ark, as UST indicates, was to the covenant between God and the Israelites and to his presence with them wherever they went in the wilderness. Alternate translation: “the tent that housed the ark of the covenant” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 7 44 fk06 figs-infostructure καθὼς διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ, ποιῆσαι αὐτὴν κατὰ τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 It may be more natural to put the information about the command to Moses before the information about how Moses fulfilled the command. It may also be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The one speaking to Moses had commanded him to make the tabernacle according to the pattern that he had seen, and he made it just that way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ACT 7 44 masq figs-explicit διετάξατο ὁ λαλῶν τῷ Μωϋσῇ 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the way God spoke to Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “God commanded Moses when he spoke to him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 44 avqh figs-explicit τὸν τύπον ὃν ἑωράκει 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the **pattern** for the tabernacle that God showed Moses on Mount Sinai. Alternate translation: “the pattern that he showed him on Mount Sinai” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 7 45 uqca writing-pronouns ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in”
+ACT 7 45 uqca figs-pronouns ἣν καὶ εἰσήγαγον, διαδεξάμενοι οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 The pronoun **which** refers to the tabernacle. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Our ancestors received the tabernacle from their ancestors, and they brought it in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
ACT 7 45 qjov διαδεξάμενοι 1 The phrase **having received … in turn** translates a Greek verb that refers to receiving something in succession, in this case from one’s ancestors. Alternate translation: “having received it from their ancestors”
ACT 7 45 n2sc εἰσήγαγον…μετὰ Ἰησοῦ 1 Our fathers, under Joshua, received it and brought it with them When Stephen says that the Israelites brought in the tabernacle **with Joshua**, he does not mean that they brought in both the tabernacle and Joshua. He means that the Israelites did the things he describes in obedience to Joshua’s directions. Alternate translation: “brought in as Joshua directed them”
ACT 7 45 e3gu figs-explicit εἰσήγαγον 1 Stephen assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to the Israelites entering the land of Canaan. Alternate translation: “brought in to the land of Canaan” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1126,9 +1126,9 @@ ACT 7 45 eww5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῇ κατασχέσει τῶν ἐθνῶ
ACT 7 45 spm5 figs-metaphor ἀπὸ προσώπου τῶν πατέρων ἡμῶν 1 when they took possession of the nations who God drove out from the face of our fathers Stephen is using the word **face** to mean “presence.” Alternate translation: “from the presence of our ancestors” or “so that our ancestors alone would live there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 7 45 zjlj figs-ellipsis ἕως τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is leaving out some of the words that a sentence would need in many languages in order to be complete. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The tabernacle remained there until the days of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 7 45 wot8 figs-idiom τῶν ἡμερῶν Δαυείδ 1 Stephen is using the term **days** to refer to a specific time. Alternate translation: “the time of David” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 7 46 k9vh figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 7 45 bux7 translate-names Δαυείδ 1 **David** is the name of a man. See how you translated it in [1:16](../01/16.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 7 46 x4kl writing-pronouns ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God”
+ACT 7 46 k9vh figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 7 46 x4kl figs-pronouns ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The pronoun **who** refers to David. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “David found favor before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
ACT 7 46 ykio figs-metonymy ὃς εὗρεν χάριν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the phrase **before God** refers to God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “God regarded David with favor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 7 46 yl80 figs-idiom εὑρεῖν 1 Stephen is speaking. David did not ask God if he could go look for this **dwelling**. David asked God if he could build it. Alternate translation: “to build” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 7 46 w3cu figs-metaphor σκήνωμα 1 a dwelling place for the house of Jacob The word **dwelling** refers to a permanent habitation, that is, a house. Stephen is using the word to mean a temple. He is speaking of this temple as if it was a house in which God lived, since God’s presence was there. Alternate translation: “a house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1152,7 +1152,7 @@ ACT 7 49 vjaq figs-abstractnouns τόπος τῆς καταπαύσεώς μο
ACT 7 50 hqjr figs-quotemarks οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 This is the end of the quotation from the prophet Isaiah that began in verse 49. See how you marked the beginning of the quotation there. It would be appropriate to mark its ending here with a closing second-level quotation mark or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. If you used special formatting to set off the quotation, you can return to regular formatting after this verse. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
ACT 7 50 rfk1 figs-rquestion οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 Did my hand not make all these things? God is using the question form for emphasis. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “My hand made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ACT 7 50 jlg1 figs-synecdoche οὐχὶ ἡ χείρ μου ἐποίησεν ταῦτα πάντα? 1 God is using one part of himself, his **hand**, to represent all of himself in the act of creating. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “Did I not make all these things?” or, if you choose to represent the rhetorical question as an exclamation, “I made all these things!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 7 50 gzw0 figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation”
+ACT 7 50 gzw0 figs-explicit ταῦτα πάντα 1 The phrase **all these things** refers back to “Heaven” and “earth” in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “everything in creation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 51 umq6 figs-exclamations σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ ἀπερίτμητοι καρδίαις καὶ τοῖς ὠσίν 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is using the exclamatory word **O** to make a transition in his speech. Up to this point, he has been identifying with the Sanhedrin members, saying “our fathers” as he describes what earlier generations of Israelites did. Now, as he shifts to rebuking them, he addresses them with the vocative **O**. Use an exclamation that is natural in your language for this same purpose. Alternate translation: “You stiff-necked people who are uncircumcised in your heart and ears” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
ACT 7 51 yxe3 figs-nominaladj σκληροτράχηλοι καὶ 1 Stephen is using the adjective **stiff-necked** as a noun, to describe a kind of person. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “O people who are stiff-necked and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 7 51 vn7h figs-metaphor σκληροτράχηλοι 1 O stiff-necked Stephen is speaking of the Sanhedrin members as if they were horses or mules that stiffened their necks in order not to be turned in one direction or another. He means that they are being stubborn. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture, or you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternate translation: “O stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -1172,7 +1172,7 @@ ACT 7 53 euw5 figs-explicit εἰς διαταγὰς ἀγγέλων 1 the law
ACT 7 54 ef2g figs-activepassive ἀκούοντες…ταῦτα διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 Now hearing these things If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “these things cut them to their hearts when they heard them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 7 54 u4l7 figs-idiom διεπρίοντο ταῖς καρδίαις αὐτῶν 1 they were cut to their hearts Here, the expression **they were cut to their hearts** is an idiom that means the Sanhedrin members became very angry. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “they became furious at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 7 54 ae9s translate-symaction ἔβρυχον τοὺς ὀδόντας ἐπ’ αὐτόν 1 they ground their teeth at him This action expressed their strong anger at Stephen. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “they became so angry at Stephen that they ground their teeth together” or “they moved their teeth back and forth as they looked angrily at Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT 7 55 dlux figs-explicit πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 7 55 dlux figs-metaphor πλήρης Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of Stephen as if he were a container that the Holy Spirit could fill. Alternate translation: “inspired by the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 7 55 ntp4 figs-explicit ἀτενίσας εἰς τὸν οὐρανὸν, εἶδεν 1 and looking intently into heaven The implication is that only Stephen saw this vision, not anyone else who was present. Alternate translation: “staring up into heaven, he saw in a vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 55 bl2j figs-explicit δόξαν Θεοῦ 1 he saw the glory of God The implication is that Stephen saw a bright light that expressed the magnificent presence of God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “a bright light that expressed the glorious presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 7 55 zpry figs-nominaladj Ἰησοῦν ἑστῶτα ἐκ δεξιῶν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the adjective **right** as a noun in order to indicate the right side. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you could translate this with a noun phrase. Alternate translation: “Jesus standing at the right side of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -1202,7 +1202,7 @@ ACT 7 60 dfjs figs-imperative μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τ
ACT 7 60 tvf8 figs-doublenegatives μὴ στήσῃς αὐτοῖς ταύτην τὴν ἁμαρτίαν 1 do not hold this sin against them If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold … against**. Alternate translation: “forgive them for this sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
ACT 7 60 r9vi figs-euphemism ἐκοιμήθη 1 he fell asleep Luke is describing the death of Stephen when he says **he fell asleep**. This is a polite way of referring to something unpleasant. If this would be misunderstood in your language, use a different polite way of referring to this or use plain language. Alternate translation: “he passed away” or, as in UST, “he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-euphemism]])
ACT 8 intro q9d9 0 # Acts 8 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
The story here shifts from Stephen to Saul.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 8:32-33.
The first sentence of verse 1 ends the description of the events in Chapter 7. Luke begins a new part of his history with the words “And on that day.”
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### Receiving the Holy Spirit
In this chapter Luke speaks for the first time of people receiving the Holy Spirit ([Acts 8:15-19](../08/15.md)). The Holy Spirit had already enabled the believers to speak in tongues, to heal the sick, and to live as a community, and he had filled Stephen. But when the Jews started putting believers in prison, those believers who could leave Jerusalem did leave, and as they went, they told people about Jesus. When the people who heard about Jesus received the Holy Spirit, the church leaders knew that those people had truly become believers.
### Proclaimed
This chapter, more than any other in the book of Acts, speaks of the believers proclaiming the word, proclaiming the good news, and proclaiming that Jesus is the Christ. The word “proclaim” translates a Greek word that means to tell good news about something.
-ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-time-background]])
+ACT 8 1 ez88 writing-background Σαῦλος δὲ ἦν συνευδοκῶν τῇ ἀναιρέσει αὐτοῦ 1 there began on that day a great persecution against the church that was in Jerusalem, and they all were scattered throughout the regions of Judea and Samaria, except the apostles Luke is providing this background information to help readers understand why Saul was persecuting the church, as he relates in [8:3](../08/03.md) and in Chapter 9. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now Saul approved of the Sanhedrin executing Stephen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 8 1 i1tc writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ, διωγμὸς μέγας ἐπὶ τὴν ἐκκλησίαν 1 Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story, the scattering of the church and its witness beyond Jerusalem. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new event. Alternate translation: “And so began that day a great persecution against the church” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 8 1 vc8x figs-explicit ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 that day Here, **day** is not a figurative word for “time.” Luke is referring to a specific day, the day on which Stephen was killed. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “on the day Stephen was killed,” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 8 1 xp25 figs-activepassive πάντες…διεσπάρησαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they all fled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1237,7 +1237,7 @@ ACT 8 8 z5z3 figs-metonymy ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ
ACT 8 8 r0nz figs-abstractnouns ἐγένετο…πολλὴ χαρὰ ἐν τῇ πόλει ἐκείνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **joy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the people of that city rejoiced greatly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 8 9 jm7n writing-background ἀνὴρ δέ τις ὀνόματι Σίμων, προϋπῆρχεν ἐν τῇ πόλει μαγεύων 1 Luke is providing background information to help readers understand who Simon was and why he said and did the things Luke describes in the rest of this chapter. Use a natural way in your language for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “Now there was a man named Simon who had been practicing sorcery in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 8 9 bed1 writing-participants ἀνὴρ…τις ὀνόματι Σίμων 1 But … a certain man named Simon Luke uses this phrase to introduce Simon as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT 8 9 cx7a translate-names Σίμων 1 the city **Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md).
+ACT 8 9 cx7a translate-names Σίμων 1 the city **Simon** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name, for a different man, in [1:13](../01/13.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 8 10 mvcm writing-pronouns ᾧ προσεῖχον πάντες ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 The phrase **to whom** refers to Simon. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “All of them, from little to great, were paying attention to Simon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 8 10 evt7 figs-hyperbole πάντες 1 they all … were paying attention Luke is using the word **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 8 10 h51l figs-nominaladj ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 Luke is using the adjectives **little** and **great** as nouns in order to indicate groups of people. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “from the least important people to the most important ones” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -1245,7 +1245,7 @@ ACT 8 10 ibl1 figs-merism ἀπὸ μικροῦ ἕως μεγάλου 1 from l
ACT 8 10 h5ya writing-pronouns οὗτός 1 The demonstrative pronoun **This** stands for Simon. Alternate translation: “This man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 8 10 j3d8 translate-names ἡ Δύναμις τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἡ καλουμένη Μεγάλη 1 This man is the power of God which is called Great The Samaritans believed that Simon must be the embodiment of some great power, and thinking that this power was God, the highest of powers, they called it Great. Alternate translation: “an embodiment of the Great God” or “an embodiment of the supreme God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 8 10 yw5v figs-activepassive ἡ καλουμένη 1 the power of God which is called Great If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that people call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
+ACT 8 11 pxj8 writing-background προσεῖχον δὲ αὐτῷ 1 General Information: This verse gives additional background information about Simon and what he was doing among the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “Now they were paying attention to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 8 12 h1hg writing-pronouns ἐπίστευσαν 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “the Samaritans believed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 8 12 zwoj figs-abstractnouns εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 8 12 zjh5 figs-metonymy εὐαγγελιζομένῳ περὶ τῆς Βασιλείας τοῦ Θεοῦ καὶ τοῦ ὀνόματος Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 Here the **name** of Jesus represents his authority, specifically as the Messiah, as the title **Christ** indicates. Alternate translation: “proclaiming the good news that God had begun to rule and that Jesus the Messiah had come” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -1274,14 +1274,14 @@ ACT 8 16 rn3c figs-metonymy μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχ
ACT 8 16 m1nw figs-activepassive μόνον…βεβαπτισμένοι ὑπῆρχον 1 they had only been baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. If you must state who did the action, the context suggests it was Philip. Alternate translation: “Philip had only baptized them” or “Philip had only baptized the Samaritan believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 8 17 bsll writing-pronouns ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς, καὶ ἐλάμβανον 1 The first instance of the pronoun **they** stands for Peter and John, and the pronoun **them** and the second instance of **they** stand for the Samaritans. Alternate translation: “When Peter and John were laying their hands on the Samaritans, and the Samaritans were receiving” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 8 17 bldf figs-youdual ἐπετίθεσαν 1 Since this instance of the pronoun **they** stands for two men, it should be in the dual if your language uses that form. The same is true of “them” in [8:18](../08/18.md) and “they” and “the ones” in [8:25](../08/25.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youdual]])
-ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])d John placed their **hands** on the Samaritan people who had believed Stephen’s message of the gospel. This symbolic action shows that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to the believers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 8 17 q7gd translate-symaction ἐπετίθεσαν τὰς χεῖρας ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 they were laying their hands on them Peter and John **laying their hands** on the Samaritans who had believed Philip’s message of the gospel was a symbolic action that showed that Peter and John wanted God to give the Holy Spirit to these believers. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 8 18 rh79 figs-activepassive δίδοται τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 the Holy Spirit was being given through the laying on of the hands of the apostles If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you must state who did the action, it is clear from the context that this was God. Alternate translation: “God was giving the Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 8 19 fbw9 δότε κἀμοὶ τὴν ἐξουσίαν ταύτην, ἵνα ᾧ ἐὰν ἐπιθῶ τὰς χεῖρας, λαμβάνῃ Πνεῦμα Ἅγιον 1 so that whoever I lay my hands on may receive the Holy Spirit Alternate translation: “Give me the authority to give the Holy Spirit to anyone I lay my hands on”
ACT 8 20 df1j figs-exclamations τὸ ἀργύριόν σου, σὺν σοὶ εἴη εἰς ἀπώλειαν 1 Peter is using the exclamation form to emphasize how forcefully he rejects Simon’s offer. You may want to use an exclamation to convey this same emphasis in your language. Alternate translation: “I refuse your offer! I can see that you are going to perdition, and you can take your money with you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclamations]])
ACT 8 20 y4ny figs-metonymy τὸ ἀργύριόν 1 Peter is referring to money by association with the way that **silver** was used for money at this time. Alternate translation: “money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 8 20 gh12 figs-metonymy τὴν δωρεὰν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the gift of God Peter is referring to the ability to confer the Holy Spirit by the laying on of hands. Since this is an ability that only God can give, by association Peter calls it **the gift of God**. Alternate translation: “the power to confer the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 8 21 p2ev figs-doublet οὐκ ἔστιν σοι μερὶς οὐδὲ κλῆρος ἐν τῷ λόγῳ τούτῳ 1 There is to you no part or share in this matter The terms **part** and **share** mean similar things. Peter is using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “We will not let you have anything to do with this work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
-ACT 8 21 ufk3 figs-doublet σοι 1 The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ACT 8 21 ufk3 figs-possession σοι 1 The phrase **to you** represents a possessive form. Alternate translation: “yours” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
ACT 8 21 xbh2 figs-metaphor ἡ γὰρ καρδία σου οὐκ ἔστιν εὐθεῖα 1 because your heart is not right Here, the **heart** represents the thoughts and motives. Alternate translation: “your thoughts and motives are not right” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 8 21 p9v4 figs-metonymy ἔναντι τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 This could mean: (1) that Simon’s **heart** is not **right** in God’s opinion by association with the way that God would assess anything that came to his attention in front of him. Alternate translation: “as far as God is concerned” (2) that Simon does not have the right thoughts about God or intentions towards God. Alternate translation: “in its attitude towards God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 8 22 sa6s figs-abstractnouns ἀπὸ τῆς κακίας σου ταύτης 1 this wickedness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **wickedness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “for trying to buy God’s gift with money” or “for trying to bribe God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -1308,7 +1308,7 @@ ACT 8 26 le2c figs-idiom τὴν ὁδὸν τὴν καταβαίνουσαν
ACT 8 26 a18y writing-background αὕτη ἐστὶν ἔρημος 1 This is desert This sentence could be: (1) something that Luke adds to provide background information about the area through which Philip would be travelling. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza.’ (Now that road leads through a desert.)” (2) part of what the angel is saying to Philip. Alternate translation: “from Jerusalem to Gaza, which is a desert road.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 8 27 s0yn figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, ἐπορεύθη 1 As in the previous verse, the word **arising** means that Philip took preparatory action, not that he stood up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “he prepared for a journey and left” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 8 27 xy7x writing-participants ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the word **behold** to alert his audience to a new person in the story. Use the natural form in your language for introducing a new character. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT 8 27 zkc5 writing-background ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translatewriting-background]])
+ACT 8 27 zkc5 writing-background ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης βασιλίσσης Αἰθιόπων, ὃς ἦν ἐπὶ πάσης τῆς γάζης αὐτῆς, ὃς ἐληλύθει προσκυνήσων εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 This verse provides background information about this Ethiopian official and why he was travelling along this road. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence and to use a natural form for introducing background information. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia. Now this man was a eunuch, an official of the Kandake, the queen of the Ethiopians, who was over all her treasure, and he had come to Jerusalem to worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 8 27 i5zh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ, Αἰθίοψ 1 This is an idiomatic way of describing someone. Alternate translation: “a man from Ethiopia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 8 27 s1uf translate-unknown εὐνοῦχος, δυνάστης Κανδάκης 1 a eunuch While the word **eunuch** describes a man who has been castrated, as men sometimes were who served in royal courts in the ancient world, the emphasis here is on the fact that this man was a high government official, not on his physical state. Alternate translation: “an important official in the court of the Kandake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 8 27 t5t1 translate-names Κανδάκης 1 of Candace **Kandake** was a title for the queens of Ethiopia. It is similar to the word Pharaoh, the title that was used for the kings of Egypt. So in your translation, make clear that it is a title rather than a name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -1354,7 +1354,7 @@ ACT 8 40 r1x7 figs-explicit Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτο
ACT 8 40 bbws figs-activepassive Φίλιππος…εὑρέθη εἰς Ἄζωτον 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Philip reappeared at Azotus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 8 40 arh5 διερχόμενος 1 passed through Alternate translation: “as he passed through that area, he was”
ACT 8 40 zfn6 figs-hyperbole τὰς πόλεις πάσας 1 to all the cities Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “to the cities in that region” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT 8 40 yf7i translate-names Ἄζωτον… Καισάρειαν 1 **Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 8 40 yf7i translate-names Ἄζωτον…Καισάρειαν 1 **Azotus** and **Caesarea** are the names of cities. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 9 intro jm6x 0 # Acts 9 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
In [9:1](../09/01.md), the story shifts back to Saul and tells about his salvation.
In [9:32](../09/32.md), the story shifts from Saul to a new part of the story about Peter.
Acts [9:31](../09/31.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the third major part of the book.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### “Letters for the synagogues in Damascus”
The “letters” Paul asked for in 9:2 were probably legal papers that permitted him to put Christians in prison. The synagogue leaders in Damascus would have obeyed the letter because it was written by the high priest. If the Romans had seen the letter, they also would have allowed Saul to persecute the Christians, because they permitted the Jews to do as they desired to people who broke their religious laws.
### “The Way”
No one knows for sure who first started calling the community of Jesus’ followers “the Way.” This may be what the believers called themselves, because the Bible often speaks of a person living his life as if that person were walking on a path or “way.” If this is true, the believers were “following the way of the Lord” by living in a way that pleased God. However, in the book of Acts the term is only used by outsiders, as in 9:2, or by believers speaking to outsiders. So it could also be a term by which the community of Jesus’ followers was known outside that community.
### “the church”
Acts 9:31 is the first use of the word **church** in the singular to refer to more than one local congregation. In that verse it refers to all the believers in all the groups throughout Judea, Galilee, and Samaria. It shows that they recognized that they all had a common identity as followers of Jesus.
## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter
### “the Lord”
Luke refers to Jesus by a respectful title, “the Lord,” in verses 1, 10, 11, 15, 27, 28, 31, 35, and 42, and Ananias refers to Jesus the same way in verse 17. In your translation, you may wish to clarify that this means “the Lord Jesus.” Or you could say “Jesus,” as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter
### What Saul saw when he met Jesus
It is clear that Saul saw a light and that it was because of this light that he “fell upon the ground.” Some people think that Saul knew that it was the Lord speaking to him without seeing a human form, because the Bible often speaks of God as being light and living in light. Other people think that later in his life he was able to say, “I have seen the Lord Jesus” because it was a human form that he saw here.
ACT 9 1 r4n5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 General Information: Luke uses the word translated **But** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 9 1 anb6 figs-hendiadys ἐμπνέων ἀπειλῆς καὶ φόνου εἰς 1 still speaking threats even of murder against the disciples Luke is using the two words **threat** and **murder** together to express a single idea. The word **murder** tells what kind of **threat** Saul was making. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use **and**. Alternate translation: “making murderous threats against” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
@@ -1377,19 +1377,19 @@ ACT 9 5 jaq2 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε? 1 Who are you, Lord? S
ACT 9 5 abc0 writing-pronouns εἶπεν…ὁ 1 he The first instance of **he** stands for Saul, and the second instance of **he** stands for Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul said … Jesus replied” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 9 5 q8ge εἶ…σὺ 1 Both occurrences of the word **you** here are singular.
ACT 9 6 fbi6 figs-activepassive λαληθήσεταί σοι 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-explicit ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 9 8 puw3 figs-activepassive ἀνεῳγμένων…τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτοῦ 1 his eyes being opened If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “when he opened his eyes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 9 8 dgg8 writing-pronouns εἰσήγαγον 1 he was seeing nothing The pronoun **they** stands for the men who were traveling with Saul, as described in [9:8](../09/08.md). Alternate translation: “the men who were traveling with him brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 9 9 fhn6 ἦν ἡμέρας τρεῖς μὴ βλέπων 1 he was … without sight Alternate translation: “he remained blinded for three days”
ACT 9 9 t8uc figs-explicit οὐκ ἔφαγεν οὐδὲ ἔπιεν 1 neither ate nor drank This could mean: that Saul chose not to eat or drink as a form of worship. [9:11](../09/11.md) says that Saul was praying at this time, and he may have been fasting along with his prayers. Alternate translation: “he fasted from food and drink” (2) that Saul had no appetite or thirst because he was too distressed from his situation. Alternate translation: “he was too distressed to eat or drink” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 9 10 j847 writing-participants ἦν δέ τις μαθητὴς ἐν Δαμασκῷ ὀνόματι Ἁνανίας 1 Now there was Luke uses this sentence to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
ACT 9 10 kgn9 translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 **Ananias** is the name of a man. This is not the same Ananias whom Luke described in [5:1](../05/01.md) (that man died), but you may translate the name here the same way you did there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 9 10 vqh0 writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Here and throughout this chapter, **the Lord** is a respectful title that Luke is using to refer to Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT 9 10 vl8k figs-idiom ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 3 he said **Behold, I** is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 9 10 u3e1 figs-explicit ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 3 Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 9 10 vl8k figs-idiom ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 he said **Behold, I** is a Hebrew idiom that Ananias is using to identify himself as the Ananias to whom the Lord is calling. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 9 10 u3e1 figs-explicit ἰδοὺ, ἐγώ, Κύριε 1 Ananias is saying implicitly that he is present and available to serve **the Lord**. Alternate translation: “Yes, Lord, this is Ananias, and I am here ready to do what you ask” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 9 11 mn24 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς, πορεύθητι ἐπὶ τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 go to the street which is called Straight Here, the word **arising** means that God wants Ananias to take action, not that Ananias is lying down or sitting down and God wants him to stand up. You may be able to convey this with a different kind of expression. Alternate translation: “Go on over to Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 9 11 kopv figs-activepassive τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 If your language does not use the passive form **called**, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the street that people call Straight” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 9 11 pyr2 translate-names τὴν ῥύμην τὴν καλουμένην Εὐθεῖαν 1 **Straight** is the name of a street. Alternate translation: “Straight Street” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 9 11 ie1l Ἰούδα 1 the house of Judas **Judas** it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in [1:13](../01/13.md), [1:16](../01/16.md), and [5:37](../05/37.md) for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 9 11 ie1l translate-names Ἰούδα 1 the house of Judas **Judas** it the name of a man. This is not the disciple who betrayed Jesus (that man died); this Judas was the owner of a house in Damascus where Saul was staying. But you may translate the name here the same way you did in [1:13](../01/13.md), [1:16](../01/16.md), and [5:37](../05/37.md) for the disciple and two other men with the same name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 9 11 u5j8 translate-names Σαῦλον ὀνόματι Ταρσέα 1 a man named Saul, from Tarsus **Tarsus** is the name of a city. Alternate translation: “a man named Saul from the city of Tarsus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 9 11 k3ve figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ γὰρ, προσεύχεται 1 The Lord says **behold** to get Ananias to focus his attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use here in your translation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now listen carefully: He is praying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 9 12 jk46 translate-symaction ἐπιθέντα αὐτῷ χεῖρας 1 laying hands on him In this culture, **laying hands on** people was a symbolic way of conveying a spiritual blessing to them, as the apostles did in [6:6](../06/06.md) for the men chosen to oversee the food distribution. If there is a comparable symbolic action in your culture, you could use that in your translation. You could also use a general expression. Alternate translation: “giving him a spiritual blessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -1411,8 +1411,8 @@ ACT 9 15 bbfd figs-synecdoche βασιλέων 1 The Lord is using **kings**, o
ACT 9 15 uq9b figs-metaphor υἱῶν…Ἰσραήλ 1 The Lord is using the word **sons** to mean “descendants.” He is speaking of the Israelites, who were descendants of the patriarch Jacob, also known as Israel. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 9 16 kty3 figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματός μου 1 for my name Here, **name** represents a person by association with the way that each person has a name. This could mean: (1) that Saul will suffer for telling people about Jesus. Alternate translation: “to make me known” (2) that Saul will suffer for Jesus himself. Alternate translation: “for me” or “for my sake” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 9 17 s8ms figs-explicit ἀπῆλθεν δὲ Ἁνανίας καὶ εἰσῆλθεν εἰς τὴν οἰκίαν 1 And Ananias departed, and entered into the house It may be helpful to state that **Ananias** went to **the house** before he **entered into** it. UST models one way to express this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 9 17 my6m translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 having laid his hands on him When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../01/32.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
-ACT 9 17 q61x figs-you σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς 1 All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT 9 17 my6m translate-symaction ἐπιθεὶς ἐπ’ αὐτὸν τὰς χεῖρας 1 having laid his hands on him When Ananias **laid his hands** on Saul, this was a symbolic way of giving him a blessing. See the explanation at [9:2](../09/02.md) and see how you translated the same expression there. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 9 17 q61x figs-yousingular σοι…ἤρχου…ἀναβλέψῃς 1 All of the occurrences of the word **you** in this verse are singular and refer to Saul. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
ACT 9 17 cah9 figs-metaphor Σαοὺλ, ἀδελφέ 1 **Brother** is a figurative title that Ananias is using for **Saul**. The two men are not actual brothers. This could mean: (1) that Ananias is already addressing Saul as someone who shares the same faith. See how you translated “brother” with this meaning in [1:15](../01/15.md) and [6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow believer” (2) that Ananias is addressing Saul as a fellow Israelite, as the word is used in [3:17](../03/17.md) and many other places in this book. Alternate translation: “Saul, my fellow Israelite” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 9 17 cxu4 figs-nominaladj ὁ ὀφθείς σοι 1 Ananias is using the participle **having appeared**, which functions as an adjective, as a noun to mean a person, Jesus. ULT adds the term **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “who appeared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 9 17 ptg0 figs-go ᾗ ἤρχου 1 Your language may say “coming” rather than **going** in a context such as this. Use whichever word is more natural. Alternate translation: “by which you were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -1421,7 +1421,7 @@ ACT 9 17 x4ey figs-metaphor πλησθῇς Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 An
ACT 9 18 m1hx translate-unknown λεπίδες 1 something like scales fell It may be helpful to your readers if you use something they would recognize that has scales to describe the **scales** that fell from Saul’s eyes. Alternate translation: “fish scales” or “lizard scales” or “snake scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 9 18 efs9 figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 rising up, he was baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Ananias baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 9 19 rxfi figs-activepassive ἐνισχύθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he felt stronger” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 9 20 rc49 writing-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The personal pronoun **he** refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
+ACT 9 20 rc49 figs-pronouns ἐκήρυσσεν τὸν Ἰησοῦν, ὅτι οὗτός ἐστιν ὁ Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 The personal pronoun **he** refers to Saul, and the demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “Saul proclaimed that Jesus is the Son of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
ACT 9 20 w65r guidelines-sonofgodprinciples Υἱὸς τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Son of God **Son of God** is an important title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
ACT 9 21 xid8 figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ ἀκούοντες 1 all who were hearing Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who heard him” or “many who heard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 9 21 a8j8 figs-nominaladj οἱ ἀκούοντες…ὁ πορθήσας…τοὺς ἐπικαλουμένους 1 Luke is using the participles **hearing**, **having destroyed**, and **calling on**, which function as adjective, as nouns. ULT adds the terms **ones** and **one** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these with equivalent expressions. Alternate translation: “those who heard … the man who destroyed … those who call” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -1464,7 +1464,7 @@ ACT 9 31 hl24 figs-possession τῇ παρακλήσει τοῦ Ἁγίου Π
ACT 9 32 w68g writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 Now it happened that Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 9 32 m9sg figs-hyperbole διὰ πάντων 1 throughout the whole region Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “many places in the region of Judea, Galilee, and Samaria” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 9 32 ad7g figs-idiom κατελθεῖν 1 to come down Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 9 32 tckc figs-metonymy τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα 1 Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 9 32 tckc figs-idiom τοὺς ἁγίους τοὺς κατοικοῦντας Λύδδα 1 Luke says **to come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, where Peter was living, since that city is up on a mountain. Lydda is lower in elevation. Alternate translation: “to travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 9 32 g5c4 translate-names Λύδδα 1 in Lydda **Lydda** is the name of a city in Israel. It is located where the foothills meet the coastal plain. This city was called Lod in the Old Testament and it has that name in modern Israel as well. Decide what name would be most helpful to your readers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 9 33 hzd7 εὗρεν…ἐκεῖ ἄνθρωπόν τινα 1 he found there a certain man The word **found** does not mean that Peter was intentionally searching for a certain man; he happened to meet him. Alternate translation: “there Peter happened to meet a man”
ACT 9 33 jnc4 writing-participants ἄνθρωπόν τινα ὀνόματι Αἰνέαν 1 a certain man named Aeneas Luke uses this sentence to introduce **Aeneas** as a new character in the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
@@ -1472,7 +1472,7 @@ ACT 9 33 owf3 translate-names Αἰνέαν 1 **Aeneas** is the name of a man.
ACT 9 33 uj5f writing-background ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 lying in a bed … who was paralyzed In this verse, Luke provides background information about Aeneas to help readers understand what happens next in the story. This information shows how remarkable it was that Jesus could heal a man who had been bedridden for that long. In your translation, present this information in a way that would be natural and meaningful in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 9 33 k7hw grammar-connect-logic-result ἐξ ἐτῶν ὀκτὼ κατακείμενον ἐπὶ κραβάττου, ὃς ἦν παραλελυμένος 1 paralyzed The reason why Aeneas had been **lying in a bed for eight years** was that he **was paralyzed**. It may be clearer in your language to describe this result after giving the reason for it. Alternate translation: “who was paralyzed and so had lain in a bed for eight years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
ACT 9 34 t13n ἀνάστηθι 1 **Arise** in this context is literal, not figurative. It means to get up from a position of lying down, rather than to take action or make preparations.
-ACT 9 34 ff2a figs-rpronouns ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 make your bed Peter says **for yourself** to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you can make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronoun]])
+ACT 9 34 ff2a figs-rpronouns ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 make your bed Peter says **for yourself** to emphasize that Jesus has healed Aeneas so completely that he will now be able to do for himself what others previously had to do for him. Alternate translation: “Get up, you can make your own bed now” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
ACT 9 34 khrm translate-symaction στρῶσον σεαυτῷ 1 Getting up and making his own bed was also a symbolic action by which Aeneas demonstrated that Jesus had healed him. Alternate translation: “Arise and make your bed to show everyone that Jesus has healed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 9 35 wykn writing-pronouns εἶδαν αὐτὸν πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα, οἵτινες ἐπέστρεψαν ἐπὶ τὸν Κύριον 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Aeneas. The pronoun **who** refers to the people of Lydda and Sharon. Alternate translation: “when all the people living in Lydda and Sharon saw him, they turned to the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 9 35 z3fp figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ κατοικοῦντες Λύδδα καὶ τὸν Σαρῶνα 1 all who were living in Lydda and in Sharon Luke says **all** as a generalization for emphasis. Alternate translation: “those who lived in Lydda and in Sharon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1508,7 +1508,7 @@ ACT 10 intro ym7z 0 # Acts 10 General Notes
## Structure and Formattin
ACT 10 1 wtb9 writing-participants ἀνὴρ δέ τις 1 Now there was a certain man Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
ACT 10 1 h6zu translate-names Κορνήλιος 1 **Cornelius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 10 1 x476 translate-unknown ἑκατοντάρχης 1 named Cornelius, a centurion from the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ A **centurion** was an officer in the Roman army who was in charge of a group of 100 soldiers. Such a group was called a “century.” Alternate translation: “an army officer in charge of 100 soldiers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-ACT 10 1 abcd Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 10 1 abcd figs-activepassive Σπείρης τῆς καλουμένης Ἰταλικῆς 1 the regiment that was called ‘Italian.’ If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the regiment people called Italian” or “the regiment whose name was Italian” or “the Italian Regiment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 10 1 h2a4 translate-unknown Σπείρης 1 A **regiment** was a military unit consisting of six centuries or 600 soldiers. You may have a term in your language that you can use for a unit of about this size. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 10 1 e88y translate-names Ἰταλικῆς 1 **Italian** is the name of a military unit. The name indicates that although the soldiers in it were stationed in Syria, they came from Italy and thus were native Romans. This made them more reliable protection for the high-ranking Roman officials whose residence was in Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 10 2 s6rh figs-doublet εὐσεβὴς καὶ φοβούμενος τὸν Θεὸν 1 devout and fearing God The word **devout** and the phrase **fearing God** mean similar things. (In this context, the word **fearing** has the sense of deep respect and awe.) Luke may be using them together for emphasis. Alternate translation: “sincerely devoted to God” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -1526,7 +1526,7 @@ ACT 10 4 p5ml figs-metaphor αἱ προσευχαί σου, καὶ αἱ ἐλ
ACT 10 4 xpa1 figs-idiom ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here, **before** means “in the presence of.” Alternate translation: “into the presence of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 10 5 h33i figs-activepassive ὃς ἐπικαλεῖται Πέτρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom people call Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 10 6 hou9 figs-activepassive ξενίζεται παρά 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “is the guest of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 10 6 bw0q translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 See how you translated the term **tanner** in [9:43](../09/43.md).
+ACT 10 6 bw0q translate-unknown βυρσεῖ 1 See how you translated the term **tanner** in [9:43](../09/43.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 10 7 g6lq ὡς δὲ ἀπῆλθεν ὁ ἄγγελος ὁ λαλῶν αὐτῷ 1 And when the angel who spoke to him had left Alternate translation: “And when Cornelius’ vision of the angel had ended”
ACT 10 7 yg7g εὐσεβῆ 1 devout The adjective **devout** describes a person who worships God and serves him. Alternate translation: “sincerely religious”
ACT 10 8 pcg2 figs-hyperbole ἅπαντα 1 having told them everything By **everything**, Luke means the details of the vision that Cornelius had. Alternate translation: “how an angel had spoken to him in a vision and what the angel had said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -1558,7 +1558,7 @@ ACT 10 18 qe9d figs-activepassive ὁ ἐπικαλούμενος Πέτρος 1
ACT 10 18 r91o figs-activepassive ξενίζεται 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “was a guest” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 10 19 iqx5 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 Behold The Spirit is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Pay attention, this is important: Three men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 10 19 va39 translate-textvariants ἄνδρες τρεῖς 1 three men are looking for you Cornelius sent two of his servants and one soldier. Some ancient texts say “two men” or “some men.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ACT 10 20 ndju figs-idiom ἀναστάς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 10 20 ndju figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Here the term **arising** means that the voice wanted Peter to take action, not that the voice wanted him to stand up from a seated position. Alternate translation: “Go ahead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 10 20 ym1x figs-explicit κατάβηθι 1 go down The implication is that Peter is to **go down** from the roof of the house and greet the men. Alternate translation: “go down from the roof of the house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 10 20 wx4n figs-explicit πορεύου σὺν αὐτοῖς 1 go with them. Do not hesitate It would be natural for Peter not to want to go with the men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “go with them, even though they are Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 10 20 j3iy figs-explicit μηδὲν διακρινόμενος 1 This could mean: (1) that the Spirit did not want Peter to have any doubts or worries about going with the men, even though they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “without worrying about it” (2) that the Spirit did not want Peter to feel that he should not be in the company of these men, because they were Gentiles. Alternate translation: “not making a distinction between these men and others you would associate with” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1577,7 +1577,7 @@ ACT 10 24 c3s6 τῇ…ἐπαύριον 1 the following day The **next day** m
ACT 10 25 b4pn translate-symaction πεσὼν ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας 1 and falling down at his feet Be sure that it is clear in your translation that Cornelius did not fall down accidentally. He knelt down at Peter’s feet as a gesture to honor him. Alternate translation: “kneeling down and putting his face close to Peter’s feet to honor him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 10 26 s7n5 figs-declarative ἀνάστηθι, καὶ ἐγὼ αὐτὸς ἄνθρωπός εἰμι 1 Get up! I too am a man myself Peter is using the statement form to give a mild rebuke or correction to Cornelius. It may be clearer for your readers if you translate this as an imperative. Alternate translation: “Stop doing that! I am only a man, as you are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
ACT 10 27 f9x6 writing-pronouns συνομιλῶν αὐτῷ, εἰσῆλθεν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Cornelius, and the pronoun **he** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “talking with Cornelius, Peter went in” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT 10 27 kdva writing-pronouns εὑρίσκει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found”
+ACT 10 27 kdva writing-pronouns εὑρίσκει 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “found” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 10 27 twp9 figs-activepassive συνεληλυθότας πολλούς 1 many people gathered together If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “many people whom Cornelius had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 10 28 iyx6 figs-explicit ὡς ἀθέμιτόν ἐστιν ἀνδρὶ Ἰουδαίῳ 1 how unlawful it is for a Jewish man This phrase refers to the requirements of the Jewish religious law. Alternate translation: “that the Jewish law forbids a Jewish man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 10 28 k3we figs-explicit ἀλλοφύλῳ 1 a foreigner Here, the term **foreigner** refers to people who are not Jews. It is not a reference to where they live. Alternate translation: “a Gentile” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1593,7 +1593,7 @@ ACT 10 30 u1es figs-idiom τὴν ἐνάτην 1 In this culture, people began
ACT 10 30 p73u translate-ordinal τὴν ἐνάτην 1 If you decide to translate this in the way that the biblical culture reckoned time, but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here. Alternate translation: “hour nine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
ACT 10 30 yy6e figs-explicit τὴν ἐνάτην 1 at the ninth hour This was the normal afternoon prayer time for Jews. Cornelius, as a Gentile who worshiped the God of Israel, would have praying at this time. Alternate translation: “during my usual afternoon prayer time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 10 30 oicx figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἀνὴρ 1 Cornelius is using the term **behold** to focus Peter’s attention on how suddenly this **man** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “just then a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 10 30 g485 figs-explicit ἀνὴρ 1 Luke says in [10:3](../01/32.md) that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him **a man** here because the angel appeared to him in human form. You could say that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 10 30 g485 figs-explicit ἀνὴρ 1 Luke says in [10:3](../10/03.md) that Cornelius saw an angel. Cornelius calls him **a man** here because the angel appeared to him in human form. You could say that explicitly in your translation if your readers might be confused otherwise. Alternate translation: “an angel in human form” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 10 31 twnu figs-quotesinquotes φησί, Κορνήλιε, εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “he told me that my prayer had been heard and that my alms had been remembered before God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])Q
ACT 10 31 uep3 φησί 1 To call attention to a development in the story, here Cornelius uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “he said”
ACT 10 31 heh3 figs-activepassive εἰσηκούσθη σου ἡ προσευχὴ καὶ αἱ ἐλεημοσύναι σου ἐμνήσθησαν ἐνώπιον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 your prayer has been heard If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God has heard your prayer and has remembered your alms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1646,7 +1646,7 @@ ACT 10 42 c1ak figs-activepassive ὁ ὡρισμένος ὑπὸ τοῦ Θε
ACT 10 42 ws4t figs-nominaladj ζώντων καὶ νεκρῶν 1 of the living and the dead Peter is using the adjectives **living** and **dead** as nouns. (The word **living** is actually a participle, but it functions here as an adjective.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “of those who are alive and of those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 10 43 ub5d writing-pronouns τούτῳ 1 To this one, all the prophets bear witness that The demonstrative pronoun **this** refers to Jesus. Alternate translation: “To Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 10 43 y6d1 figs-metonymy διὰ τοῦ ὀνόματος αὐτοῦ 1 through his name Peter is speaking of the **name** of Jesus. It could mean: (1) his actions. Alternate translation: “through what Jesus has done for them” (2) his authority. Alternate translation: “by his authority” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 10 44 cz7x figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/12.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
+ACT 10 44 cz7x figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσε τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπὶ πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας τὸν λόγον 1 the Holy Spirit fell Luke is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it could fall on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expression in [8:16](../08/16.md). Alternate translation: “all the ones listening to his word received the Holy Spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])Q
ACT 10 44 wf7u figs-hyperbole πάντας τοὺς ἀκούοντας 1 all of those who were listening While the believers who came with Peter from Joppa were also **listening** to his message, the word **all** refers to the Gentiles who were present. Alternate translation: “Cornelius and his guests, who were listening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 10 44 o839 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean what Peter was saying by using words. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 10 45 j6wt figs-nominaladj οἱ…πιστοὶ 1 the gift of the Holy Spirit Luke is using the adjective **faithful** as a noun, to mean people who have faith in Jesus. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the faithful men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -1669,7 +1669,7 @@ ACT 11 intro hva5 0 # Acts 11 General Notes
## Special Concepts in thi
ACT 11 1 ab75 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 11 1 f1md figs-metaphor οἱ…ἀδελφοὶ 2 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation, as in UST: “the other believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 11 1 w3rx figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 had received the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Peter, by using words, shared with Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 11 2 kb4m ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 11 2 kb4m figs-idiom ἀνέβη…εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 came up to Jerusalem Luke says that Peter **came up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “returned to Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 11 2 yar6 figs-metonymy οἱ ἐκ περιτομῆς 1 those from the circumcision As in [10:45](../10/45.md), Luke is using the term **circumcision** by association to identify as Jewish these believers who disputed with Peter. They were likely to have been strictly observant Jews who followed the teaching of the Pharisees about Jews visiting with Gentiles. See the discussion of this in the General Notes to Chapter 10. Alternate translation: “some believers who were strictly observant Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 11 3 pcce figs-quotations λέγοντες, ὅτι εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς ἄνδρας, ἀκροβυστίαν ἔχοντας, καὶ συνέφαγεν αὐτοῖς. 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “saying, ‘You went in to men having foreskins and ate with them!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
ACT 11 3 zmou figs-explicit εἰσῆλθεν πρὸς 1 This expression implicitly means that Peter went in to the home of these **men**. Alternate translation: “he went into the home of” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1702,7 +1702,7 @@ ACT 11 14 fnjz figs-yousingular σὲ…σωθήσῃ σὺ…σου 1 All the
ACT 11 14 p3gk figs-activepassive σωθήσῃ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It is clear from the context that God will do the action. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 11 14 hpr2 figs-metonymy πᾶς ὁ οἶκός σου 1 all your household Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. Alternate translation: “all the people living in your house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 11 15 a8jw figs-explicitinfo ἐν…τῷ ἄρξασθαί με λαλεῖν 1 as I began to speak, the Holy Spirit came on them Peter is using the word **began** to indicate that he had been doing something else (listening to Cornelius tell why he had summoned him) but then began to do something new when Cornelius finished speaking. It might not be necessary to translate the word **began**, since it may seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express in your language. Alternate translation: “as I was speaking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/12.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 11 15 ak2p figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς, ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 the Holy Spirit came on them, just as also on us in the beginning Peter is speaking of the Holy Spirit as if it **fell** on Cornelius and his guests. See how you translated the similar expressions in [8:16](../08/16.md) and [10:44](../10/44.md). Alternate translation: “they received the Holy Spirit, just as we did in the beginning” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 11 15 qdon writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Cornelius and his guests. Alternate translation: “the man who had sent for me and the others in his house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 11 15 qy12 figs-exclusive ὥσπερ καὶ ἐφ’ ἡμᾶς 1 General Information: Here the word **us** refers to Peter himself and to the believers to whom he is speaking in Jerusalem, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 11 15 th4m figs-explicit ἐν ἀρχῇ 1 in the beginning By **in the beginning**, Peter means the day of Pentecost. Alternate translation: “on the day of Pentecost” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -1779,7 +1779,7 @@ ACT 12 4 pps1 translate-unknown τέσσαρσιν τετραδίοις στρα
ACT 12 4 i23a figs-idiom βουλόμενος…ἀναγαγεῖν αὐτὸν τῷ λαῷ 1 he was intending to bring him out to the people The phrase **to bring him out** means to put Peter on trial publicly. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Herod planned to judge Peter in a public trial in the presence of the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 12 5 xpcx figs-activepassive ὁ…Πέτρος ἐτηρεῖτο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to specify who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was the soldiers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers were guarding Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 12 5 f8qc figs-activepassive προσευχὴ…ἦν ἐκτενῶς γινομένη ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας πρὸς τὸν Θεὸν περὶ αὐτοῦ 1 prayer was being made earnestly to God for him by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the church was earnestly praying to God for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night Here, the word translated **to bring him out** is slightly different from the word translated that same way in [12:4](../01/01.md). It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 12 6 km83 figs-explicit προαγαγεῖν αὐτὸν 1 Herod was going to bring him out for trial, that night Here, the word translated **to bring him out** is slightly different from the word translated that same way in [12:4](../12/04.md). It means to put someone on trial, and the implications, based on the fact that Herod saw that it pleased the Jewish leaders when he executed James, are that Herod planned to execute Peter after this trial. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to put Peter on trial and then execute him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 12 6 g2bh figs-activepassive δεδεμένος ἁλύσεσιν δυσίν 1 bound with two chains If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with two chains binding him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 12 7 i7g3 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ, ἄγγελος 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold** to focus readers’ attention on how suddenly this **angel** appeared. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “suddenly an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 12 9 wqct figs-quotations οὐκ ᾔδει ὅτι ἀληθές ἐστιν τὸ γινόμενον διὰ τοῦ ἀγγέλου; ἐδόκει δὲ 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here and to add a sentence break. Alternate translation: “he did not realize, ‘What is being done by the angel is real!’ He was thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
@@ -1808,7 +1808,7 @@ ACT 12 17 jf16 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 the brothers Luke is
ACT 12 18 ail9 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 12 18 zl7i figs-litotes τάραχος οὐκ ὀλίγος 1 there was no small disturbance among the soldiers over what therefore had happened to Peter Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “a great disturbance” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
ACT 12 18 bt2b figs-quotations ἐν τοῖς στρατιώταις, τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “among the soldiers: ‘What then had Peter become?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT 12 18 plyg τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 The word translated **become** can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone"
+ACT 12 18 plyg τί ἄρα ὁ Πέτρος ἐγένετο 1 The word translated **become** can be used to indicate that a person has entered a new condition, and in this context it indicates that Peter has changed his location. Alternate translation: “where then Peter had gone”
ACT 12 19 blx5 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν 1 The pronoun **him** refers to Peter. Alternate translation: “Peter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 12 19 pz6v figs-synecdoche ἐπιζητήσας αὐτὸν 1 And Herod, having searched for him It was probably not Herod himself who **searched for** Peter. Rather, he most likely ordered his soldiers to do this. Alternate translation: “having ordered a search for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 12 19 br16 figs-idiom κατελθὼν 1 And having gone down Luke speaks of Herod **having gone down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1826,16 +1826,16 @@ ACT 12 20 dy51 figs-explicit τὸ τρέφεσθαι αὐτῶν τὴν χώ
ACT 12 21 e3w9 figs-explicit τακτῇ…ἡμέρᾳ 1 on a set day The implication is that this was the **day** on which Herod had agreed to meet with the representatives of the Tyrians and Sidonians. Alternate translation: “on the day when Herod had agreed to meet with them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 12 21 kv7g translate-symaction ἐνδυσάμενος ἐσθῆτα βασιλικὴν, καὶ καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 in royal clothing Putting on this **royal clothing**, which was visibly expensive, and sitting on the **throne** were symbolic actions by which Herod demonstrated that he was a wealthy and powerful king. He did these things to impress and intimidate the Tyrians and Sidonians as they negotiated. Alternate translation: “having put on royal clothing and having sat on the throne to show what a wealthy and powerful king he was” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 12 21 g6ir καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 sitting on the throne The **throne** was where Herod formally addressed people who came to see him.
-ACT 12 23 iw57 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 he did not give the glory to God If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
ACT 12 22 feyy figs-synecdoche Θεοῦ φωνὴ, καὶ οὐκ ἀνθρώπου 1 The people are using one part of Herod, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “This person who is speaking to us is a god, not a man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 12 23 iw57 grammar-connect-logic-result ἀνθ’ ὧν οὐκ ἔδωκεν τὴν δόξαν τῷ Θεῷ 1 he did not give the glory to God If it would be clearer in your language, you could put this reason before the result it led to (the angel striking Herod), as UST does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
ACT 12 23 d419 figs-activepassive γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 becoming worm-eaten, he died The word translated **worm-eaten** is an adjective, so this is not a passive verbal form. However, if your language does not use passive forms, it might be clearer for your readers if you use an expression that does not seem to be a passive verbal form. The word **worm-eaten** expresses the result of action by a different agent, so you can use an active form with that agent as the subject. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 12 23 pjbw figs-explicit γενόμενος σκωληκόβρωτος, ἐξέψυξεν 1 It is not clear exactly what this means, and you might choose to say nothing further in your translation. However, this could mean: (1) that when the angel **struck** Herod, this caused a deep wound, and by the time Herod died of this wound, it was already infested with maggots. Alternate translation: “he died after his wound became so infected that it was infested with maggots” (2) that the word **struck** is figurative and it refers to an illness, a severe case of intestinal worms. Alternate translation: “he got such a severe case of intestinal worms that he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 12 24 sv8l figs-hendiadys ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 Luke is expressing a single idea by using two verbs connected with **and.** The verb **being multiplied** tells in what way the word of God was **increasing**, that is, very rapidly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express this same idea with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the word of God was increasing very rapidly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
ACT 12 24 m1sw figs-personification ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ ηὔξανεν καὶ ἐπληθύνετο 1 the word of God increased and was multiplied Luke is speaking of the way the message about Jesus was becoming more widespread as if the word of God itself were **increasing** and **being multiplied**. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
ACT 12 24 wn8m figs-metonymy ὁ…λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the word of God Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that God told the believers to spread by using words. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 12 24 iwr1 figs-activepassive ἐπληθύνετο 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God was multiplying it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 12 25 j2un writing-endofstory δὲ 0 Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-ACT 12 25 rt9o figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 0 This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they **returned** to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 12 25 j2un writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **Then** to introduce information about what happened after Herod died. This is the end of the part of the story about him. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a significant part of a larger story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
+ACT 12 25 rt9o figs-explicit Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ, πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 This can also be translated, “Then Barnabas and Saul returned, having completed their service in Jerusalem.” If that is the correct translation, then Luke is saying implicitly that they **returned** to Antioch. Alternate translation: “Then Barnabas and Saul returned to Antioch, having completed their service in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 12 25 t7d8 translate-textvariants Βαρναβᾶς δὲ καὶ Σαῦλος ὑπέστρεψαν εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 And Barnabas and Saul returned to Jerusalem Some ancient copies say that Barnabas and Saul returned “from” Jerusalem, which makes sense, since in the next verse, Barnabas and Saul are back in Antioch. If the reading **to** is correct, this verse may be indicating that they went somewhere else in Judea and then returned to Jerusalem before going back to Antioch. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
ACT 12 25 pv6a figs-explicit πληρώσαντες τὴν διακονίαν 1 having completed their service This refers implicitly to the trip that Barnabas and Saul made to Jerusalem to deliver money from the believers in Antioch, which Luke describes in [11:29-30](../11/29.md). Alternate translation: “having delivered to the church leaders in Jerusalem the money that the believers in Antioch had collected” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 12 25 zhsc figs-activepassive Ἰωάννην, τὸν ἐπικληθέντα Μᾶρκον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. See how you translated it in [12:12](../12/12.md). Alternate translation: “John, whom people called Mark” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -1923,7 +1923,7 @@ ACT 13 20 tb5w translate-names Σαμουὴλ 1 The word**Samuel** is the name
ACT 13 21 nrug translate-names τὸν Σαοὺλ…Κείς…Βενιαμείν 1 The word **Saul** is the name of a man. The word **Kish** is the name of another man, the father of Saul. The word **Benjamin** is the name of one of the tribes of Israel, the tribe to which Saul belonged. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 13 21 yxi8 figs-ellipsis ἔτη τεσσεράκοντα 1 for 40 years Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence. Alternate translation: “to be their king for 40 years” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 13 22 bsp6 figs-idiom ἤγειρεν τὸν Δαυεὶδ αὐτοῖς εἰς βασιλέα 1 he raised up David for them as their king Here, the expression **raised up** describes God giving someone an important position. See how you translated it in [3:22](../03/22.md). Alternate translation: “made David their king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 13 22 akg6 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου 1 In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel [13:14](../1sa/13/14.md) and Psalm [89:20](../psa/89/20.md).) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 13 22 akg6 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν μαρτυρήσας, εὗρον Δαυεὶδ τὸν τοῦ Ἰεσσαί, ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου, ὃς ποιήσει πάντα τὰ θελήματά μου 1 In order to avoid having a second-level quotation, you could turn Paul’s quotation into an indirect quotation. (Paul is quoting from 1 Samuel [13:14](../1sa/13/14.md) and Psalm [89:20](../psa/089/020.md).) Alternate translation: “he said, testifying, that he had found David, son of Jesse, a man according to his heart, who would do all his will” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 13 22 dbu5 figs-idiom εὗρον 1 I have found While God was indeed searching for someone to replace Saul, here the word **found** does not refer to the results of that search, but rather to God’s estimation of David. Alternate translation: “I have recognized that David, son of Jesse, is a man according to my heart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 13 22 jf03 translate-names τοῦ Ἰεσσαί 1 The word **Jesse** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 13 22 mp53 figs-idiom ἄνδρα κατὰ τὴν καρδίαν μου 1 a man according to my heart This is an idiomatic expression. Alternate translation: “the kind of person who does what pleases me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -1944,7 +1944,7 @@ ACT 13 25 rp32 writing-pronouns οὐκ εἰμὶ ἐγώ 1 I am not him The pr
ACT 13 25 nnl5 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 But behold John is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 13 25 gys2 translate-symaction οὗ οὐκ εἰμὶ ἄξιος τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν λῦσαι 1 of whom the sandals of his feet I am not worthy to untie John is using the action of untying sandals symbolically to signify humble service. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could translate this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “to whom I am not even worthy to offer humble service” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 13 25 gj98 figs-explicitinfo τὸ ὑπόδημα τῶν ποδῶν 1 In your language, the expression **the sandals of his feet** might seem to convey redundant information that would be not be natural to express. If so, you can abbreviate it. Alternate translation: “his sandals” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
-ACT 13 26 bwet figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 13 26 bwet figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 Paul is using an idiomatic form of address. Alternate translation: “My brothers—my fellow sons of the family of Abraham—and you others who fear God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 13 26 kci9 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοί, υἱοὶ γένους Ἀβραὰμ, καὶ οἱ ἐν ὑμῖν φοβούμενοι τὸν Θεόν 1 brothers, sons of the family of Abraham, and those among you who fear God Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. Alternate translation: “My fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 13 26 c9pw figs-metaphor υἱοὶ 1 Paul is using the term **sons** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 13 26 jdp6 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 Here the word **us** includes Paul and his entire audience in the synagogue, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks this distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
@@ -1970,7 +1970,7 @@ ACT 13 31 g4vl figs-explicit ἡμέρας πλείους 1 many days We know fr
ACT 13 31 rw9e figs-idiom τοῖς συναναβᾶσιν 1 Paul says **having come up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Alternate translation: “by the ones who traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 13 32 h6ch figs-explicit τὴν πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ἐπαγγελίαν γενομένην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that he is referring to a **promise** that God made. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 13 32 hr2g figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge 1 God has fulfilled this for our children It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. You could say something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
+ACT 13 33 b1uh translate-versebridge ὅτι ταύτην ὁ Θεὸς ἐκπεπλήρωκεν τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 God has fulfilled this for our children It may be helpful to create a verse bridge that combines verse 32 with the first part of verse 33. You could say something like this: “And we are proclaiming to you that by raising Jesus, God has completely fulfilled for our children the promise he made to our fathers.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
ACT 13 33 t0wt figs-explicit ταύτην 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will know that by **this** he means the promise he described in the previous verse. Alternate translation: “this promise” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 13 33 dy6w translate-textvariants τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 for our children Some ancient copies read, “for us, their children” which makes sense, since Paul is saying that this promise was fulfilled in his own generation, not in the next generation. If the reading **for our children** is correct, Paul may mean “for the children of us Israelites.” If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider using the reading in that translation. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, you may wish to follow the readings of ULT and UST. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
ACT 13 33 t176 figs-metaphor τοῖς τέκνοις ἡμῶν 1 If this is the correct reading, then Paul may be using the term **children** to mean “descendants.” Alternate translation: “for our descendants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2062,7 +2062,7 @@ ACT 13 51 xi1z translate-symaction ἐκτιναξάμενοι τὸν κονι
ACT 13 51 fvop translate-names Ἰκόνιον 1 The word **Iconium** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 13 52 dp5k figs-explicit οἵ…μαθηταὶ 1 the disciples Here, **the disciples** implicitly means the new believers that Paul and Barnabas were leaving behind in Antioch of Pisidia. Alternate translation: “the new believers in Antioch of Pisidia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 13 52 hhgj figs-metaphor ἐπληροῦντο χαρᾶς καὶ Πνεύματος Ἁγίου 1 Luke is speaking of these disciples as if they were a container that **joy** and **the Holy Spirit** had **filled**. Alternate translation: “experienced great joy and a strong sense of the Holy Spirit’s presence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### “the word of his grace”
The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
### Zeus and Hermes
In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter
### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”
Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.
+ACT 14 intro rsg2 0 # Acts 14 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
- Verses 1–4 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Iconium.
- Verses 5–19 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel in Lystra.
- Verses 20–28 describe how Paul and Barnabas proclaimed the gospel and strengthened the believers in several cities on their way back to Antioch.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### “the word of his grace”
The expression “the word of his grace” refers to the message that God will graciously forgive and accept those who believe in Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/grace]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/believe]])
### Zeus and Hermes
In this chapter, Barnabas and Paul are mistaken for the pagan gods Zeus and Hermes. The Gentiles in the Roman Empire worshiped many different false gods that did not really exist. Paul and Barnabas told them to believe in the “living God,” that is, the one and only true God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
## Other Possible Translation Difficulties in this Chapter
### “We must enter into the kingdom of God through many sufferings.”
Jesus told his followers before he died that everyone who followed him would suffer persecution. Paul and Barnabas were saying the same thing using different words as they encouraged the new believers in the cities that they had visited.
ACT 14 1 hk1z writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Iconium Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 14 1 f4sq figs-explicit λαλῆσαι 1 spoke in such a way It may be helpful to say explicitly that they spoke about Jesus. Alternate translation: “spoke about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 14 2 wc4x οἱ…ἀπειθήσαντες Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews who were disobedient Alternate translation: “those Jews who did not believe the message about Jesus”
@@ -2084,12 +2084,12 @@ ACT 14 6 tl4q translate-names Δέρβην 1 Derbe The word**Derbe** is the name
ACT 14 8 wb5k writing-participants τις ἀνὴρ…ἐκάθητο 1 a certain man sat Luke uses this phrase to introduce a new character into the story. If your language has its own way of doing that, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
ACT 14 8 kz7d figs-metonymy ἀδύνατος…τοῖς ποσὶν 1 powerless in his feet Luke is referring to the strength of this man’s legs by association with the way people are able to stand on their **feet** when their legs are strong. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “whose legs could not support him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 14 8 tca1 figs-metonymy χωλὸς ἐκ κοιλίας μητρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 lame from the womb of his mother Luke is referring to the time of this man’s birth by association with the way he came out of the **womb of his mother** when he was born. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “lame from the time he was born” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 14 9 di49 figs-rpronouns οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν 1 He looked intently at him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 14 9 di49 figs-pronouns οὗτος ἤκουσεν τοῦ Παύλου λαλοῦντος, ὃς ἀτενίσας αὐτῷ καὶ ἰδὼν ὅτι ἔχει πίστιν 1 He looked intently at him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to the lame man, and the pronoun **who** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “This man heard Paul speaking. Paul looked intently at the man and saw that he had faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
ACT 14 9 xak4 figs-abstractnouns ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 he has faith to be saved If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he could trust in Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 14 9 uwov figs-activepassive ἔχει πίστιν τοῦ σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be Jesus. (Here Luke is using the word that is often translated “saved” in one of its specific senses to mean **healed**.) Alternate translation: “he could trust Jesus to heal him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 14 10 i2kz writing-pronouns εἶπεν…ἥλατο 1 The first instance of the pronoun **He** refers to Paul, and the second instance refers to the man who was lame. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul said … the man jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 14 10 tect figs-imperative ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός 1 This was not a command that the man was capable of obeying. Instead, it was a command that directly caused the man to be healed. Alternate translation: “Jesus the Messiah gives you the ability to walk” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative)
-ACT 14 10 sagd figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός, 1 It might seem that the expression **Arise upon your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT 14 10 sagd figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου ὀρθός! 1 It might seem that the expression **Arise upon your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “Get up!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
ACT 14 10 v1kz figs-explicit ἥλατο 1 he jumped up The implication is that the man’s legs were completely healed. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the man was completely healed and he jumped up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 14 11 isyz ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **voice**. Alternate translation: “they raised their voices”
ACT 14 11 lvs9 figs-idiom ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 they raised their voice The phrase **raised up their voice** is an idiom that means that the crowds spoke loudly. Alternate translation: “they said loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2124,7 +2124,7 @@ ACT 14 20 aqx3 writing-pronouns αὐτὸν…εἰσῆλθεν…ἐξῆλθ
ACT 14 21 lint figs-nominaladj μαθητεύσαντες ἱκανοὺς 1 Luke is using the adjective **many** as a noun to mean the people who became disciples. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “having helped many people to become disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 14 22 ek9l figs-synecdoche ἐπιστηρίζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς τῶν μαθητῶν 1 They were strengthening the souls of the disciples Luke is using one part of the disciples, their **souls**, to represent their entire beings as believers in Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “They were strengthening the disciples” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 14 22 zkd2 figs-abstractnouns παρακαλοῦντες ἐμμένειν τῇ πίστει 1 and encouraging them to continue in the faith If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “encouraging them to keep believing in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 14 22 d9ic writing-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT 14 22 d9ic figs-quotations καὶ ὅτι διὰ πολλῶν θλίψεων, δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 and saying, “It is necessary for us to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions.” You may want to have an indirect quotation here, if that would be more natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and saying that it was necessary for all of them to enter into the kingdom of God through many afflictions” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
ACT 14 22 ci6q figs-abstractnouns δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν εἰς τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 See the discussion of the concept of the **kingdom of God** in Part 2 of the General Introduction to Acts. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the idea behind the abstract noun **kingdom** with a noun such as “king.” Alternate translation: “It is necessary for us to endure many afflictions in order to live in allegiance to God as our true king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 14 22 wu1c figs-exclusive δεῖ ἡμᾶς εἰσελθεῖν 1 It is necessary for us to enter By **us**, Paul and Barnabas mean both themselves and the believers to whom they were speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 14 23 pk5l writing-pronouns χειροτονήσαντες…παρέθεντο…πεπιστεύκεισαν 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the new believers in the cities of Lystra, Iconium, and Antioch, and the pronoun **they** refer to Paul and Barnabas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “for the new believers in these cities … Paul and Barnabas entrusted these believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2140,14 +2140,14 @@ ACT 14 27 vymy figs-possession ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύρ
ACT 14 27 b4id figs-metaphor ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 he had opened a door of faith for the Gentiles Here the expression **opened a door** means that God created an opportunity, as if a door that gave access to this opportunity had previously been closed. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles an opportunity for faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 14 27 xgvb figs-abstractnouns ἤνοιξεν τοῖς ἔθνεσιν θύραν πίστεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **faith**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “he had given the Gentiles the opportunity to believe in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 14 28 abcq figs-litotes χρόνον οὐκ ὀλίγον 1 for not a little time Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could take the meaning plainly. Alternate translation, as in UST: “for a long time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.
Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.
Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?
Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
+ACT 15 intro h917 0 # Acts 15 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
Verses 1–35 tell how the church resolved the question of whether Gentiles who believed in Jesus needed to keep the whole law of Moses.
Verses 36–41 tell how Paul began a new journey to proclaim the gospel, bringing Silas with him.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with the poetry that is quoted from the Old Testament in 15:16–18.
Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present the quotation from the prophet Amos in verses 16–18 as a direct quotation if possible, since in it God is speaking directly the people of Israel. Since Amos acknowledges in verse 17 that God is speaking by saying “says the Lord,” a third-level quotation actually starts in verse 16. ULT uses second-level and third-level quotation marks within the first-level quotation from James to identify the various speakers. But it may not be necessary to do this in your translation. You could just use second-level quotation marks or some other punctuation or convention available in your language to indicate the beginning and ending of the second-level quotation from Amos. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### Did Gentiles have to obey the law of Moses?
Some believers wanted the Gentiles to be circumcised because God had told Abraham and Moses that everyone who wanted to belong to him had to be circumcised, so this was a law that would always exist. But Paul and Barnabas had seen God give uncircumcised Gentiles the gift of the Holy Spirit, so they did not believe that the Gentiles needed to be circumcised. Both groups went to Jerusalem to have the church leaders decide what they should do. The meeting that the apostles and elders held to decide about this issue is commonly called the “Jerusalem Council.”
ACT 15 1 su66 figs-explicit τινες 1 certain ones Luke assumes that his readers will recognize that these were Jews who believed in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers will need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “certain Jews who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 15 1 p3k9 figs-idiom κατελθόντες ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰουδαίας 1 coming down from Judea Luke speaks of these Jews ** coming down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “who had traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 15 1 zi1n figs-metaphor ἐδίδασκον τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 taught the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “were teaching the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 1 pm8h figs-activepassive ἐὰν μὴ περιτμηθῆτε 1 Unless you are circumcised in the custom of Moses, you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “Unless someone circumcises you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 15 1 lwbi figs-activepassive οὐ δύνασθε σωθῆναι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who would do the action, it is clear from the context that it would be God. Alternate translation, as in UST: “God will not save you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 15 2 abcr figs-litotes στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως οὐκ ὀλίγης 1 not a little dispute and debate Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word, **not**, together with a word, **little**, that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be helpful in your language, you could states the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great dispute and debate” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-abstractnouns στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως 1 not a little dispute and debate The terms **dispute** and **debate** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT 15 2 f9nd figs-doublet στάσεως καὶ ζητήσεως 1 not a little dispute and debate The terms **dispute** and **debate** mean similar things. Luke may be using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single word or phrase. Alternate translation: “controversy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
ACT 15 2 w6tc writing-pronouns πρὸς αὐτοὺς…ἔταξαν…ἐξ αὐτῶν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the Jewish believers from Judea, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the believers in the church in Antioch. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with the Jewish believers from Judea … the believers in Antioch appointed … from the church there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 15 2 ek6a figs-idiom ἀναβαίνειν…εἰς Ἰερουσαλὴμ 1 to go up … in Jerusalem Luke says **to go up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain.. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 15 3 av5y figs-activepassive οἱ…προπεμφθέντες ὑπὸ τῆς ἐκκλησίας 1 Therefore, the ones who had been sent by the church If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones the church had sent out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2184,11 +2184,11 @@ ACT 15 9 jr3b figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Peter is using the word **us** to ref
ACT 15 9 ase1 figs-metaphor τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 having made their hearts clean by faith Peter speaks of God forgiving the Gentile believers’ sins as though God literally **cleansed** their hearts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made them innocent because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 9 yi8r figs-metonymy τῇ πίστει καθαρίσας τὰς καρδίας αὐτῶν 1 Here, the word **hearts** represents the inner beings of the Gentiles. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having forgiven them because they believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 10 rfr4 νῦν οὖν τί 1 Now **Now** in this context does not mean “at this moment.” Peter is using the word to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So tell me, therefore: Why”
-ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν…? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT 15 10 zaz6 figs-rquestion τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν, ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι? 1 why are you testing God, to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear? Peter is using the question form to challenge the believers who are Pharisees about what they want the Gentiles to do. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement, ending the verse with a period or exclamation point. Alternate translation: “you must not test God to put a yoke upon the neck of the disciples which neither our fathers nor we were able to bear!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ACT 15 10 ha45 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν…ἡμεῖς 1 Peter is using the words **our** and **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 15 10 n2bv τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν…? 1 Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
+ACT 15 10 n2bv τί πειράζετε τὸν Θεόν 1 Here the word **testing** means **challenging**. Peter is saying that God has accepted the Gentiles without requiring them to be circumcised or keep the law, but the believers who are Pharisees are challenging God’s judgment that the Gentiles should be accepted on that basis. See how you translated the similar expression in [5:9](../05/09.md). Alternate translation: “why are you challenging God”
ACT 15 10 qpyd figs-metaphor ἐπιθεῖναι ζυγὸν ἐπὶ τὸν τράχηλον τῶν μαθητῶν, ὃν οὔτε οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν οὔτε ἡμεῖς ἰσχύσαμεν βαστάσαι 1 Peter is speaking as if the believers who are Pharisees literally want to put a **yoke** on the necks of the Gentile believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “requiring the disciples to meet an onerous obligation that neither our fathers nor we have been able to fulfill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 15 10 bdfu bdfu 1 Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks”
+ACT 15 10 bdfu τὸν τράχηλον 1 Since Peter is referring to a group of people, it might be more natural in your language to use the plural form of **neck**. Alternate translation: “the necks”
ACT 15 10 bfd5 figs-metaphor οἱ πατέρες ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Peter is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 11 e1m4 figs-rpronouns πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 Peter is using a construction in which the object is implied. Since the object is the same as the subject of the verb, the construction calls for the relative pronoun **ourselves**. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “we believe that we will be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
ACT 15 11 q28c figs-activepassive πιστεύομεν σωθῆναι 1 But we believe to be saved through the grace of the Lord Jesus, and they according to that same manner If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who will do the action, it is clear from the context that it will be God. Alternate translation: “we believe that God will save us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2221,11 +2221,11 @@ ACT 15 17 c8gm figs-metonymy ἐφ’ οὓς ἐπικέκληται τὸ ὄ
ACT 15 18 tr27 figs-activepassive γνωστὰ 1 known If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that people have known” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 15 19 pyb9 figs-explicit μὴ παρενοχλεῖν τοῖς ἀπὸ τῶν ἐθνῶν, ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 not to trouble those from the Gentiles who are turning to God In your translation, you can make explicit in what way James does not want to **trouble** these **Gentiles**. Alternate translation: “that we should not require the Gentiles who are believing in God to be circumcised and obey the laws of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 15 19 vr6u figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφουσιν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 who are turning to God James is speaking of these Gentiles as if they are physically **turning** to God. He means that they are believing in the true God and starting to live in a way that pleases him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning of this expression plainly. Alternate translation: “believing in God and obeying him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 15 20 vcm4 translate-versebridge 1 James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-ACT 15 20 wx8f τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pollution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ACT 15 20 vcm4 translate-versebridge 0 James lists four regulations in this verse and he gives the reason for them in the next verse. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 19–21. It might say something like this: “Therefore, I judge that we should not trouble the Gentiles who are turning to God. However, since Moses has had those proclaiming him in every city from ancient generations—he is read in the synagogues on every Sabbath—we should write to the Gentiles to abstain from the pollution of idols and sexual immorality and strangled things and blood.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
+ACT 15 20 wx8f figs-abstractnouns τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 to keep away from the pollution of idols, and sexual immorality, and things that are strangled, and blood If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **pollution**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 15 20 qun9 figs-possession τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 If your language would not use a possessive form here, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “from things that idols have polluted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
ACT 15 20 n6f2 figs-explicit τῶν ἀλισγημάτων τῶν εἰδώλων 1 pollution of idols James is likely talking about food that has been offered to **idols**, and he is speaking as if being offered to idols has polluted this food. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating food that has been offered to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, for one thing, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been **strangled**, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. For another thing, while James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood, he is saying implicitly that they should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood, and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 15 20 j2rl figs-explicit τοῦ πνικτοῦ, καὶ τοῦ αἵματος 1 things that are strangled, and blood God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, for one thing, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been **strangled**, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. For another thing, while James is not saying that the Gentiles should have no contact at all with blood, he is saying implicitly that they should not consume blood. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood, and from consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 15 20 brc2 figs-nominaladj καὶ τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is using the adjective **strangled** as a noun to mean animals that have been killed by strangulation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 15 20 h27f figs-metonymy τοῦ πνικτοῦ 1 James is referring by association to meat from animals that have been killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 21 si1h figs-explicit Μωϋσῆς γὰρ ἐκ γενεῶν ἀρχαίων κατὰ πόλιν τοὺς κηρύσσοντας αὐτὸν, ἔχει ἐν ταῖς συναγωγαῖς κατὰ πᾶν Σάββατον ἀναγινωσκόμενος 1 For Moses has in every city, from ancient generations, those proclaiming him, being read in the synagogues every Sabbath James is saying implicitly that Gentile believers should observe at least the four regulations he has listed because they embody essential aspects of the law of Moses (not worshiping idols, not practicing sexual immorality, and respecting the blood of sacrifices), and the law of Moses is well known because it is read aloud regularly in the Jewish synagogues. If the Gentiles did not observe even these regulations, that would upset Jewish believers and make Jews who were not yet believers more hostile to Christianity. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what James is saying. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2243,7 +2243,7 @@ ACT 15 23 xz3f figs-youdual χειρὸς αὐτῶν 1 Since Luke is referrin
ACT 15 23 e4g2 οἱ ἀπόστολοι καὶ οἱ πρεσβύτεροι, ἀδελφοὶ, τοῖς κατὰ τὴν Ἀντιόχειαν, καὶ Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν, ἀδελφοῖς τοῖς ἐξ ἐθνῶν, χαίρειν 1 The apostles and the elders, brothers, to those throughout Antioch and Syria and Cilicia, who are brothers from among the Gentiles. Greetings This is the introduction of the letter. In the culture of this time, letter writers would give their own names first. Your language and culture may have its own way of introducing the author of a letter and saying to whom it is written. Alternate translation: “This letter is from your brothers, the apostles and elders. We are writing to you Gentile believers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings to you” or “To our Gentile brothers in Antioch, Syria, and Cilicia. Greetings from the apostles and elders, your brothers”
ACT 15 23 kp51 figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὶ…ἀδελφοῖς 1 brothers … brothers The apostles and elders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. By doing this, they are assuring the Gentile believers that they accept them as fellow believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to our fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 23 php8 translate-names Συρίαν, καὶ Κιλικίαν 1 Cilicia The words **Syria** and **Cilicia** are the names of Roman provinces. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν… ἡμῶν…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 15 24 g8m9 figs-exclusive ἠκούσαμεν…ἡμῶν…οὐ διεστειλάμεθα 1 Here and in the rest of the letter, by **we** and **us** (and “our”), the apostles and elders mean themselves and probably the rest of the church in Jerusalem, but not the Gentiles to whom they are writing, so use the exclusive forms of those words in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 15 24 p1tl figs-explicit ἐξ ἡμῶν 1 that certain ones The apostles and elders seem to mean implicitly that these people have gone out from their community, but not from among themselves. That is, the word **some** refers to people who were part of the church in Jerusalem, but who were not apostles or elders. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “from our community” or “from here in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 15 24 hbw5 figs-metonymy λόγοις 1 The apostles and elders are using the term **words** to mean what the people who have gone out from them have been teaching by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by what they have been teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 24 bxq8 figs-synecdoche ἀνασκευάζοντες τὰς ψυχὰς ὑμῶν 1 to disturb you with teachings that are upsetting your souls The apostles and elders are using one part of the people to whom they are writing, their **souls**, to mean the people themselves. Alternate translation: “upsetting you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2252,15 +2252,15 @@ ACT 15 26 dhj8 figs-metonymy παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐ
ACT 15 26 dinn figs-metaphor παραδεδωκόσι τὰς ψυχὰς αὐτῶν 1 The letter is speaking as if Paul and Barnabas have literally **handed over** their lives. This means that they have been willing to risk their lives. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having put their lives at risk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 26 t7vw figs-metonymy ὑπὲρ τοῦ ὀνόματος τοῦ Κυρίου ἡμῶν, Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 for the name of our Lord Jesus Christ This is a figurative expression. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) that the **name** of Jesus represents his person. Alternate translation: “out of loyalty to our Lord Jesus Christ” (2) that the **name** of Jesus represents his cause in the world. Alternate translation: “for the cause of our Lord Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 27 y972 figs-nominaladj ἀπαγγέλλοντας τὰ αὐτά 1 The letter is using the adjective **same** as a noun to mean the details of the decision that the apostles and elders have reached. ULT adds **thing** to show this. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “confirming that this is our decision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 15 27 xw8l figs-explicit διὰ λόγου 1 they are reporting to you the same thing in words The letter is using the term **word** to mean “by word of mouth,” that is, “in person.” If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “in person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 15 28 l9z6 figs-metaphor μηδὲν πλέον…βάρος 1 to be laid upon you no greater burden than these necessary things The letter is speaking of the restrictions it describes as if they were a physical **burden** that the Gentiles would need to carry. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “no greater obligation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 28 bx90 figs-activepassive μηδὲν πλέον ἐπιτίθεσθαι ὑμῖν βάρος 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to lay no greater burden upon you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 15 29 nt7s figs-nominaladj εἰδωλοθύτων 1 things sacrificed to idols The letter is using the adjective **sacrificed**, with the qualifier **to idols**, as a noun to mean the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols. (ULT adds **things** to show this.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been sacrificed to idols” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 15 29 vcc6 figs-explicit αἵματος 1 blood See how you translated **blood** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “consuming blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 15 29 rt55 πνικτῶν 1 things strangled See how you translated **the strangled** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 15 29 rt55 figs-nominaladj πνικτῶν 1 things strangled See how you translated **the strangled** in [15:20](../15/20.md). Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 15 29 buy9 figs-imperative ἔρρωσθε 1 Farewell This is an imperative, but it communicates a friendly wish rather than a command. This was the customary way of ending a letter in this culture. Your language may have its own way of ending a letter that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
ACT 15 30 usz6 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἀπολυθέντες, κατῆλθον 1 when they were dismissed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “once the apostles and elders had dismissed them, they came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 15 30 c3uk οἱ 1 So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 15 30 c3uk figs-pronouns οἱ 1 So when they were dismissed, they came down to Antioch The pronoun **they** refers to Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, Barnabas, Judas, and Silas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
ACT 15 30 t55a figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 they came down to Antioch Luke says that these four men **came down** to Antioch because that city is lower in elevation than Judea. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 15 30 oh4g figs-go κατῆλθον 1 You may wish to retain the idiom for travel to a lower elevation, and if so, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
ACT 15 30 yl8v figs-explicit τὸ πλῆθος 1 Luke assumes that his readers will know that by **the crowd**, he means the people of the church in Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand this sentence. Alternate translation: “the people of the church in Antioch” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2273,11 +2273,11 @@ ACT 15 32 j99g figs-metaphor ἐπεστήριξαν 1 strengthened them Luke do
ACT 15 33 v6im figs-activepassive ἀπελύθησαν μετ’ εἰρήνης ἀπὸ τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 they were sent away with peace from the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the brothers sent them away with peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 15 33 wzw4 figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 33 xv3h figs-explicit πρὸς τοὺς ἀποστείλαντας αὐτούς 1 to those who had sent them Luke is referring implicitly to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem, who had sent Judas and Silas to Antioch. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “back to the apostles and elders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 15 34 hkh0 translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
ACT 15 35 anfc writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened once the church resolved the question about whether the Gentiles needed to obey all the laws of Moses. Your language may have its own way of indicating how such information relates to a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
ACT 15 35 e7s4 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted the believers to share by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 35 hnnb writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT 15 34 hkh0 translate-textvariants 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
-ACT 15 36 jjoa figs-idiom ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** to mean "time." Alternate translation: “time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 15 36 jjoa figs-idiom ἡμέρας 1 Luke is using the term **days** to mean “time.” Alternate translation: “time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 15 36 ib2j figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 let us visit the brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 15 36 ua1f figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Κυρίου 1 the word of the Lord Paul is using the term **word** to mean the message that he and Barnabas shared by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message of the Lord” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 36 k08n writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
@@ -2291,7 +2291,7 @@ ACT 15 41 cbat writing-pronouns διήρχετο 1 The pronoun **he** refers to
ACT 15 41 e3ym figs-synecdoche διήρχετο 1 he went through Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they went through” or “Paul and Silas went through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 15 41 s7yf figs-metonymy ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 Luke is using the term **churches** to refer to the people associated with the churches. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 15 41 tbv3 figs-metaphor ἐπιστηρίζων τὰς ἐκκλησίας 1 strengthening the churches Luke does not mean that Paul and Silas strengthened the people of the churches physically but that they strengthened them spiritually. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “strengthening the people of the churches in their faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### Timothy’s circumcision
Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.
+ACT 16 intro e7z2 0 # Acts 16 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
- Verses 1–5 describe how Paul began his second missionary journey and met Timothy and brought him along with him.
- Verses 6–12 describe how the Holy Spirit led Paul and his companions to share the gospel in the city of Philippi
- Verses 13–40 describe how Paul and Silas made disciples in Philippi, delivered a young woman from an evil spirit, and were imprisoned but miraculously released. Acts [16:5](../16/05.md) is a summary statement that Luke uses to mark the transition into the fourth major part of the book.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### Timothy’s circumcision
Paul circumcised Timothy because he and Silas were telling the message of Jesus to Jews as well as to Gentiles. Many Jews would have been so offended that Timothy was not circumcised, even though his mother was Jewish, that they would not have listened to the message. Paul felt that he could have Timothy circumcised as a discretionary matter to remove an offense to hearing the gospel, even though the church leaders in Jerusalem had decided that Gentile believers did not have to be circumcised.
ACT 16 1 m5tb figs-synecdoche κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says **he**, meaning Paul, to refer both to Paul and to Silas, who was traveling with him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas also came down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 16 1 rhut figs-idiom κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Luke says that Paul **came down** to Derbe and Lystra because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Paul likely travel by sea from Syria to Cilicia, and Luke is saying that he then also went to Derbe and to Lystra. Alternate translation: “he also traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 1 km5q figs-go κατήντησεν…καὶ 1 Paul also came down If you retain the idiom, it may be more natural in your language to say “went” rather than **came**. Alternate translation: “he also went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
@@ -2299,7 +2299,7 @@ ACT 16 1 u3vr figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold Luke is using the term **behold*
ACT 16 1 f49m writing-participants μαθητής τις ἦν ἐκεῖ ὀνόματι Τιμόθεος, υἱὸς γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς, πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain disciple** to introduce **Timothy** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a disciple there named Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
ACT 16 1 mc9i figs-explicit ἐκεῖ 1 By **there**, Luke means the city of Lystra. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “in Lystra” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 16 1 l0w5 translate-names Τιμόθεος 1 The word **Timothy** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-ellipsis γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 16 1 wxl8 figs-explicit γυναικὸς Ἰουδαίας πιστῆς 1 a believing Jewish woman By **believing**, Luke means believing in Jesus. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “a Jewish woman who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 16 1 vh73 figs-idiom πατρὸς δὲ Ἕλληνος 1 Luke is describing Timothy’s father in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “but whose father was Greek” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 2 t1lu figs-activepassive ὃς ἐμαρτυρεῖτο ὑπὸ τῶν ἐν Λύστροις καὶ Ἰκονίῳ ἀδελφῶν. 1 He was well spoken of by the brothers If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The brothers in Lystra and Iconium spoke well of him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 16 2 rez2 figs-metaphor ὑπὸ τῶν…ἀδελφῶν 1 by the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2323,7 +2323,7 @@ ACT 16 7 b539 figs-explicit τὸ Πνεῦμα Ἰησοῦ 1 the Spirit of Jes
ACT 16 8 s6l1 figs-idiom κατέβησαν 1 they came down to the city of Troas Luke says that Paul, Silas, and Timothy **came down** to Troas because that city is lower in elevation than Mysia. Alternate translation: “they traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 8 xq6n figs-go κατέβησαν 1 they came down In a context such as this, if you retain the idiom, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
ACT 16 8 h9d3 translate-names Τρῳάδα 1 The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 16 9 cm2u διαβὰς 1 Coming over into Macedonia The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 16 9 cm2u figs-idiom διαβὰς 1 Coming over into Macedonia The man in the vision uses the phrase **coming over** because **Macedonia** is across the sea from Troas. Alternate translation: “across the sea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 9 tzxh figs-idiom ἀνὴρ Μακεδών τις 1 Luke is describing this man in an idiomatic way. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular kind of person. Alternate translation: “A certain man of Macedonia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 10 q0c7 writing-pronouns εἶδεν 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul had seen” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 16 10 fg5h figs-explicit ἐζητήσαμεν…προσκέκληται ἡμᾶς ὁ Θεὸς 1 we sought to go out to Macedonia, reasoning together that God had called us to proclaim the gospel to them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **we** and **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2341,9 +2341,9 @@ ACT 16 14 qj86 figs-metonymy πορφυρόπωλις 1 a seller of purple Luke
ACT 16 14 c6n8 translate-names Θυατείρων 1 of Thyatira The word **Thyatira** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 16 14 cyk3 figs-idiom σεβομένη τὸν Θεόν 1 worshiping God Here the expression **worshiping God** means the same thing as the expression “fearing God,” which Jews in the time of the New Testament used to describe Gentiles (non-Jews) who worshiped the God of Israel and attended the synagogue. See how you translated “fearing God” in [10:2](../10/02.md). Alternate translation: “a Gentile who sincerely worshiped the God of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 14 rd4r figs-metaphor ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 of whom the Lord opened the heart to pay attention to Luke is speaking as if the Lord physically **opened** Lydia’s heart to receive the message that Paul was sharing. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy whose heart the Lord opened 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 16 15 f38e figs-explicit ὡς…ἐβαπτίσθη 1 The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 16 14 s9ju figs-metonymy ἧς ὁ Κύριος διήνοιξεν τὴν καρδίαν 1 opened the heart Here, the **heart** represents a person’s will and disposition. Alternate translation: “whom the Lord made disposed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 16 14 a74y figs-activepassive τοῖς λαλουμένοις ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου 1 what was being said by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 16 15 f38e figs-explicit ὡς…ἐβαπτίσθη 1 The implication is that Lydia believed in Jesus and then was baptized. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “when she believed in Jesus and was baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 16 15 g7e9 figs-activepassive ὡς δὲ ἐβαπτίσθη 1 And when she was baptized, and her household If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is likely from the context that it was Paul. Alternate translation: “when Paul baptized her” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 16 15 lv50 figs-ellipsis καὶ ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and her household was also baptized” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 16 15 s799 figs-metonymy ὁ οἶκος αὐτῆς 1 her household Here, **her household** refers to all the people who lived in Lydia’s house. Alternate translation: “the members of her household” or “her family and household servants” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2394,16 +2394,16 @@ ACT 16 32 pq5w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 they spoke the word of the Lor
ACT 16 32 ftg1 writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
ACT 16 33 gied figs-idiom ἐν ἐκείνῃ τῇ ὥρᾳ τῆς νυκτὸς 1 Luke is using the term **hour** to mean a particular time. Alternate translation: “at that time in the night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 16 33 r3la figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίσθη 1 he was baptized immediately—he and all those who were his If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, the context suggests that it was Paul and Silas who baptized the jailer and his family. Alternate translation: “Paul and Silas baptized him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 16 34 v5fy figs-metonymy παρέθηκεν τράπεζαν 1 Luke is referring to a meal by association with the way, in this culture, a meal was served at a **table**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “he set a meal before them” or “he served them a meal” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 16 35 lb4z writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a significant development in this story. Here Luke tells the last part of the story that started in [16:16](../16/16.md). Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new development in a story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 16 36 qrw0 figs-metonymy τοὺς λόγους 1 Luke is using the term **words** to mean the message that the officers whom the magistrates sent communicated by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 16 36 f76u figs-imperative ἐξελθόντες, πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 The word **go** is an imperative, but it communicates permission rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates permission. Alternate translation: “you may come out of the jail and go in peace” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
ACT 16 36 noc2 figs-abstractnouns πορεύεσθε ἐν εἰρήνῃ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “go peacefully” or “go without being concerned that the authorities will trouble you any further” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 16 37 b4jm figs-explicit πρὸς αὐτούς 1 said to them The implication is that the officers whom the magistrates sent had come into the prison with the jailer. That is why Luke says **them** and not just **him**, meaning the jailer. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to the officers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 16 37 xmqz writing-pronouns αὐτούς…ἔβαλαν… ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν…ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 16 37 xmqz writing-pronouns αὐτούς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν…ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 The first instance of the pronoun **them** refers to the officers whom the magistrates sent to the prison, and the pronoun **they** and the second instance of the pronoun **them** refer to the magistrates. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the officers … the magistrates threw us … they cast us out … let the magistrates lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 16 37 v4yk figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἔβαλαν…ἡμᾶς…ἡμᾶς 1 By **us**, Paul means himself and Silas but not the officers to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 16 37 qq1u figs-rquestion δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ, ἀκατακρίτους ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας, ἔβαλαν εἰς φυλακήν καὶ νῦν λάθρᾳ ἡμᾶς ἐκβάλλουσιν? 1 they cast us out secretly? No indeed! Paul is using the question form to protest that what the magistrates want to do is not just or fair. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “The magistrates beat us in public without trial, men being Romans, and then they threw us into prison; I will not allow them, after doing that, to cast us out secretly!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 16 37 b7cc figs-metonymy δείραντες ἡμᾶς δημοσίᾳ 1 They have beaten us in public The magistrates did not do this themselves. They ordered soldiers to do it. Paul is speaking of the magistrates, some of the people who were involved in this action, to mean everyone who was involved. Alternate translation: “having ordered their soldiers to beat us in public” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 16 37 v1fd translate-names ἀνθρώπους Ῥωμαίους ὑπάρχοντας 1 Here the word **Romans** is a name for people who are citizens of the Roman Empire. Alternate translation: “even though we are Roman citizens” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 16 37 b5a3 figs-ellipsis οὔ γάρ 1 Paul is using an expression that leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “No, for they will not do that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 16 37 jr2j figs-rpronouns ἐλθόντες αὐτοὶ, ἡμᾶς ἐξαγαγέτωσαν 1 Instead, coming themselves Paul is using the reflexive pronoun **themselves** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “let them come in person and lead us out” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
@@ -2418,9 +2418,9 @@ ACT 16 39 a7yq figs-explicit παρεκάλεσαν αὐτούς 1 Luke means
ACT 16 40 y14i writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word **So** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the imprisonment of Paul and Silas. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
ACT 16 40 ylk9 figs-metonymy τὴν Λυδίαν 1 the house of Lydia Luke is referring to the house of **Lydia** by association with the name of the woman who lived there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they came to the house of Lydia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 16 40 t1pf figs-go εἰσῆλθον 1 they came to the house of Lydia In a context such as this, your language might say “went” instead of **came**. Alternate translation: “they went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
-ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-gendernotations τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 16 40 ntc9 figs-metaphor τοὺς ἀδελφοὺς 1 when they had seen the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 16 40 qs0x figs-synecdoche καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Luke says that **they … went out**, meaning Paul and Silas, to refer to those two men and to Timothy, who was still traveling with them. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and then Paul and Silas and Timothy left Philippi” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 16 40 gld6 figs-explicit καὶ ἐξῆλθαν 1 Since Luke says **they … went out**, not “we went out,” the implication is that Luke remained in Philippi for a time, likely to strengthen and encourage the new believers there. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. UST models one way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 17 intro gj4c 0 # Acts 17 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
- Verses 1–9 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Thessalonica.
- Verses 10–14 describe how Paul, Silas, and Timothy proclaimed the gospel in the city of Berea.
Verses 15–34 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Athens.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### The religion of Athens
Paul said that the people in the city of Athens were “religious,” but this did not mean that they worshiped the true God. They worshiped many different false gods. In the past they had conquered other peoples, and they had begun to worship the gods of the peoples they had conquered. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/falsegod]])
As Paul spoke to the philosophers in Athens, he told the message of Christ for the first time to people who knew nothing of the Old Testament.
ACT 17 1 e4w5 writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 17 1 kll1 translate-names τὴν Ἀμφίπολιν καὶ τὴν Ἀπολλωνίαν 1 Amphipolis and Apollonia The words **Amphipolis** and **Apollonia** are the names of coastal cities in the Roman province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2454,7 +2454,7 @@ ACT 17 11 gu6s figs-metonymy εὐγενέστεροι 1 these were more open-mi
ACT 17 11 hle3 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 received the word Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message about Jesus that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 17 11 uh8a figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης προθυμίας 1 with all readiness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “with great readiness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 17 11 qrnm figs-explicit ταῦτα 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that Paul was showing the Bereans from the Scriptures that Jesus was the Messiah, just as Paul did for the Thessalonians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 17 11 g8an εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT 17 11 g8an figs-ellipsis εἰ ἔχοι ταῦτα οὕτως 1 these things were so Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from earlier in the sentence if it would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “to find out whether these things might be so” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 17 12 abcv figs-litotes ἀνδρῶν οὐκ ὀλίγοι 1 not a few men Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. Alternate translation: “many men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
ACT 17 13 ybos figs-activepassive καὶ…κατηγγέλη ὑπὸ τοῦ Παύλου ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was also proclaiming the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 17 13 dijk figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2463,7 +2463,7 @@ ACT 17 14 ael8 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Luke is using the
ACT 17 14 zw1c figs-explicitinfo ἕως ἐπὶ τὴν θάλασσαν 1 to go as far as to the sea It might seem that the expression **as far as to the sea** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “to the seacoast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
ACT 17 15 vn8h translate-names Ἀθηνῶν 1 The word **Athens** is the name of one of the most important cities in ancient Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 17 15 gs1p figs-quotations πρὸς τὸν Σιλᾶν καὶ τὸν Τιμόθεον, ἵνα ὡς τάχιστα ἔλθωσιν πρὸς αὐτὸν, ἐξῄεσαν 1 after receiving a command to Silas and Timothy It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “to Silas and Timothy, ‘Come to me as quickly as possible!’ they departed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT 17 16 y9cr writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+ACT 17 16 y9cr writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 17 16 wk63 writing-pronouns αὐτοὺς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to Silas and Timothy. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Silas and Timothy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 17 16 u2th grammar-connect-logic-result παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ, θεωροῦντος κατείδωλον οὖσαν τὴν πόλιν 1 If it would be more natural in your language, you could reverse the order of these phrases, since the second phrase gives the reason for the result that the first phrase describes. Alternate translation: “when he saw that the city was full of idols, his spirit was provoked within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-result]])
ACT 17 16 s011 figs-activepassive παρωξύνετο τὸ πνεῦμα αὐτοῦ ἐν αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this provoked his spirit within him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2473,7 +2473,7 @@ ACT 17 17 ec14 translate-unknown ἐν τῇ ἀγορᾷ 1 in the marketplace S
ACT 17 18 ru6a writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…δοκεῖ…εὐηγγελίζετο 1 The pronouns **him**, **He**, and **he** all refer to Paul.It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “with Paul … He seems … Paul was proclaiming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 17 18 l7le translate-names τῶν Ἐπικουρίων 1 of the Epicurean and Stoic philosophers The word **Epicurean** is the name of a certain kind of philosopher. Epicureans believed that all things were formed by chance and that the gods were too busy being happy to be bothered with governing the universe. They rejected the resurrection and wanted only simple pleasures. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 17 18 f976 translate-names Στοϊκῶν 1 Stoic philosophers The word **Stoic** is the name of another kind of philosopher. Stoics believed that freedom comes from resigning oneself to fate. They rejected a personal, loving God and the resurrection. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 17 18 g4bv figs-idiom ὁ σπερμολόγος 1 What is this babbler wanting to say? These Athenian philosophers are using a common expression in their culture that refers negatively to a person who only knows little bits of information. The expression depicts a person picking up words or ideas the way a bird picks up seeds. The philosophers are saying that Paul has only a few bits of information that are not worth listening to. Alternate translation: “uneducated person” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 17 18 sx9t figs-explicit ξένων δαιμονίων 1 of foreign gods Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the Athenian philosphers misunderstood Paul and thought that he was introducing two new **gods** that the Greeks and Romans had not known about before, Jesus and Anastasis (the Greek word for resurrection). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “of two new gods, Jesus and Anastasis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 17 19 unc8 translate-transliterate Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 Areopagus The word **Areopagus** means “Hill of Ares” in Greek. It was named after the pagan god whose name was Ares in Greek and Mars in Latin. Luke does not explain the meaning of this word, since his readers already understand Greek. ULT spells this name the way it sounds in English. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also translate the meaning of the word and use the name “Mars Hill,” as UST does. Or you could spell the word the way it sounds and then explain its meaning. Alternate translation: “Mars Hill” or “the Areopagus, that is, Mars Hill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
ACT 17 19 b56g figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τὸν Ἄρειον Πάγον 1 to the Areopagus Luke most likely means that the philosophers from the marketplace brought Paul to meet the main group of philosophers on the Areopagus, not that they just brought Paul to the hill itself. Luke would be using the word **Areopagus** by association to mean the philosophers who gathered there. Alternate translation: “to the philosophers who met on the Areopagus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -2511,8 +2511,8 @@ ACT 17 27 s2xs figs-explicit ζητεῖν τὸν Θεὸν 1 Paul means impli
ACT 17 27 jae5 figs-metaphor ψηλαφήσειαν αὐτὸν καὶ εὕροιεν 1 to seek God and perhaps they might feel around for him and find him Paul is speaking as if people could **feel around for** God and **find him** that way. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they might sincerely try to know God and come to know him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 17 27 p8hk figs-litotes οὐ μακρὰν ἀπὸ 1 Yet he is not far from each one of us Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “close to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
ACT 17 27 onm4 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **us** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 17 28 tkd3 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… γένος 1 General Information: The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT 17 28 o4vy figs-exclusive ζῶμεν… ἐσμέν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 17 28 tkd3 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…γένος 1 General Information: The pronouns **him** and **his** refer to God. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “in God … God’s offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 17 28 o4vy figs-exclusive ζῶμεν…ἐσμέν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **we** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 17 28 jxph figs-quotesinquotes ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν. 1 Here Paul is quoting from the Greek philosopher-poet Epimenides and from the Greek poets Aratus and Cleanthes. While it would be preferable to present these two quotations as direct quotations (see next note), you could translate them as indirect quotations so that there are not direct quotations within a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “For some of your own poets have said that in him we live and are moved and are and that we too are his offspring” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 17 28 rpaz figs-quotemarks ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν; ὡς καί τινες τῶν καθ’ ὑμᾶς ποιητῶν εἰρήκασιν, τοῦ γὰρ καὶ γένος ἐσμέν 1 Even if your language does not customarily put one direct quotation inside another, it would be good to present these two quotations as direct quotations if possible, since that would show that Paul is quoting Greek poets as he speaks to the philosophers in Athens. You may be able to enclose these quotations within second-level quotation marks or use some other punctuation or convention that is available in your language to indicate second-level quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
ACT 17 28 ii2n figs-doublet ἐν αὐτῷ γὰρ ζῶμεν καὶ κινούμεθα καὶ ἐσμέν 1 The expressions **live** and **are moved** and **are** mean similar things. Epimenides is using the three terms together for poetic effect. It would be good to preserve that effect if possible, but it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the same idea with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “For he is the source of our entire existence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -2534,15 +2534,15 @@ ACT 17 32 j44o figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 Luke is using the adjective **de
ACT 17 32 tc8t figs-exclusive ἀκουσόμεθά 1 By **We**, these philosophers mean themselves but not Paul, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 17 32 txre figs-explicitinfo καὶ πάλιν 1 It might seem that the expression **also again** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “again” or “another time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
ACT 17 32 c4sm writing-endofstory 0 This is the end of the part of the story about Paul in Athens. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
+ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.
+ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
ACT 17 34 nb26 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Now Luke uses the word **But** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of what Paul did in Athens. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
ACT 17 34 nysg figs-gendernotations τινὲς…ἄνδρες 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, Paul is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women, as the mention of **Damaris** shows. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “certain people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
ACT 17 34 hlgu figs-infostructure κολληθέντες αὐτῷ, ἐπίστευσαν 1 The people Luke describes here **believed** before they were **joined** to Paul, so it might be more natural to put the information about them believing first. Alternate translation: “believed and were joined to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ACT 17 34 vcx3 figs-activepassive κολληθέντες αὐτῷ 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “joining him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 17 32 jlm5 ἀκούσαντες 1 when they heard of These are the people who were present at the Areopagus, listening to Paul.
-ACT 17 32 sn6j οἱ μὲν ἐχλεύαζον 1 some mocked him These did not believe it was possible for someone to die and then return to life. Alternate translation: “some ridiculed Paul” or “some laughed at Paul”
ACT 17 34 psh8 translate-names Διονύσιος ὁ Ἀρεοπαγίτης 1 Dionysius the Areopagite The word **Dionysius** is the name of a man. The word **Areopagite** is the name for someone who was a member of a council of rulers and judges that met on the Areopagus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 17 34 hsz3 translate-names Δάμαρις 1 Damaris The word **Damaris** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### The baptism of John
Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
+ACT 18 intro rky6 0 # Acts 18 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
- Verses 1–17 describe how Paul proclaimed the gospel in the city of Corinth.
- Verses 18–23 describe how Paul returned to Antioch and then started out on another missionary journey.
- Verses 24–28 describe how a man named Apollos became an effective preacher of the gospel.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### The baptism of John
Some Jews who lived far away from Jerusalem and Judea had heard of John the Baptist and followed his teachings. They had not yet heard about Jesus. One of these Jews was Apollos. He followed John the Baptist, but he did not know that the Messiah had come. John had baptized people to show that they were sorry for their sins, but that kind of baptism was different from Christian baptism. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/faithful]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/christ]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]])
ACT 18 1 fky7 writing-newevent μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things Luke is using the phrase **After these things** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 18 1 abcw writing-pronouns ἦλθεν 1 having departed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul went” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 18 1 h2si translate-names Κόρινθον 1 Athens The word **Corinth** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2553,7 +2553,7 @@ ACT 18 2 y97p translate-names Ποντικὸν 1 a native of Pontus The word **
ACT 18 2 q11b figs-infostructure προσφάτως ἐληλυθότα ἀπὸ τῆς Ἰταλίας, καὶ Πρίσκιλλαν γυναῖκα αὐτοῦ, διὰ τὸ διατεταχέναι Κλαύδιον χωρίζεσθαι πάντας τοὺς Ἰουδαίους ἀπὸ τῆς Ῥώμης 1 It might be more natural to keep all of the information about Aquila leaving Italy together and mention afterwards that Paul also met his wife Priscilla. Alternate translation: “having recently come from Italy because Claudius had ordered all the Jews to depart from Rome, and Priscilla, his wife” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
ACT 18 2 n631 translate-names τῆς Ἰταλίας 1 Italy The word **Italy** is the name of a country. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 2 b06i translate-names Πρίσκιλλαν 1 The word **Priscilla** is the name of a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 18 2 n95f translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered The word **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md).
+ACT 18 2 n95f translate-names Κλαύδιον 1 Claudius had ordered The word **Claudius** is the name of the man who was the Roman emperor at this time. See how you translated his name in [11:28](../11/28.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 2 db3t translate-names τῆς Ῥώμης 1 The word **Rome** is the name of a city. See how you translated the similar word “Romans” in [2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 5 r56h 0 General Information: Silas and Timothy rejoin Paul.
ACT 18 5 btkg figs-idiom κατῆλθον 1 Luke says that Silas and Timothy **came down** to Corinth because that city is lower in elevation than Macedonia. Alternate translation: “traveled” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2571,7 +2571,7 @@ ACT 18 7 vs6y translate-names Τιτίου Ἰούστου 1 Titius Justus The w
ACT 18 8 lj2t translate-names Κρίσπος 1 Crispus The word **Crispus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 8 zc89 writing-politeness τῷ Κυρίῳ 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “in the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
ACT 18 8 uaq5 figs-metonymy ὅλῳ τῷ οἴκῳ αὐτοῦ 1 all those in his house Here, **house** refers to an entire household living together. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his entire household” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 18 8 ykso translate-names Κορινθίων 1 The word **Corinthians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Corinth. See how you translated that name in [18:1](../18/01.md). . (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 18 8 ykso translate-names Κορινθίων 1 The word **Corinthians** is the name for people who live in or come from the city of Corinth. See how you translated that name in [18:1](../18/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 8 t3np figs-activepassive ἐβαπτίζοντο 1 were being baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “were receiving baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 18 9 ws7p figs-explicit μὴ φοβοῦ 1 Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **fear** what people might do to him if he continues proclaiming the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “Do not fear what people might do to you if you continue proclaiming the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 18 9 l4yy writing-politeness ὁ Κύριος 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
@@ -2579,7 +2579,7 @@ ACT 18 9 zg8a figs-doublet λάλει καὶ μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 continue
ACT 18 9 a529 figs-explicit μὴ σιωπήσῃς 1 do not be silent Jesus means implicitly that Paul should not **be silent** about the gospel. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “do not be silent about the gospel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 18 10 isn8 writing-pronouns ἐγώ εἰμι μετὰ σοῦ 1 Jesus is stating the pronoun **I**, which is already implied in the verb **am**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I am certainly with you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 18 10 a8lq figs-possession λαός ἐστί μοι πολὺς ἐν τῇ πόλει ταύτῃ 1 I have many people in this city This means “many people in this city are mine.” Jesus is using the possessive form to indicate that these people are loyal to him. Alternate translation: “there are many people in this city who are loyal to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
-ACT 18 11 a18w figs-synecdoche τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 18 11 a18w figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that God wanted Paul to teach by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 18 12 se8m translate-names Γαλλίωνος 1 Gallio The word **Gallio** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 12 f41k translate-names τῆς Ἀχαΐας 1 The word **Achaia** was the name of the Roman province in which Corinth was located. Corinth was the largest city in southern Greece and the capital of the province. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 12 j762 figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to one part of that group, its leaders. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
@@ -2600,11 +2600,11 @@ ACT 18 15 ywpd figs-declarative ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 Gallio is using a f
ACT 18 15 royp figs-idiom ὄψεσθε αὐτοί 1 By **see**, Gallio means investigate the matter and resolve it. Your language may have a similar idiom that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “you must see to it yourselves” or “you must look into it yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 18 16 d6nh figs-metonymy ἀπήλασεν αὐτοὺς ἀπὸ τοῦ βήματος 1 he sent them away from the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to the place where Gallio sits to make legal decisions in court. Alternate translation: “Gallio made them leave his presence in the court” or “Gallio made them leave the court” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 18 17 x9w5 translate-names Σωσθένην 1 Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue The word **Sosthenes** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke says in [18:8](../01/01.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 18 17 ju3w figs-explicit τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον 1 Since Luke says in [18:8](../18/08.md) that Crispus was the synagogue leader in Corinth, the implication is that during the year and a half that had passed since then, another man, Sosthenes, had become the leader. Since the Jewish leaders who were hostile to Paul were also hostile to him, a further implication is that, like Crispus, Sosthenes had become a believer in Jesus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. (However, see next note for another possibility that some interpreters favor.) Alternate translation: “the new synagogue leader, who believed in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 18 17 mj77 figs-explicit ἐπιλαβόμενοι δὲ πάντες Σωσθένην τὸν ἀρχισυνάγωγον, ἔτυπτον ἔμπροσθεν τοῦ βήματος 1 But they all, having seized Sosthenes, the ruler of the synagogue, were beating him in front of the judgment seat This could mean: (1) that the Jewish leaders were beating Sosthenes because he was a believer in Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders were all beating him” (2) that the Gentiles who were present in the court beat Sosthenes because the Jews had caused trouble by bothering Gallio with an insignificant matter and Sosthenes was the synagogue leader. Alternate translation: “the Gentiles who were in the court were all beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 18 17 cyk6 figs-hyperbole πάντες…ἔτυπτον 1 they all, having seized Luke likely says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “they were angrily beating him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 18 18 j0we grammar-connect-logic-contrast ὁ δὲ Παῦλος ἔτι προσμείνας ἡμέρας ἱκανὰς 1 Luke is using the word **But** here to introduce a contrast between what Paul might have been expected to do—leave the city because he was in danger and to protect the believers from danger themselves, as he did in Thessalonica and Berea—and what Paul actually did—remain in the city. In your translation, indicate this contrast in a way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Nevertheless, Paul stayed yet many days, then” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-logic-contrast]])
-ACT 18 18 et8c figs-gendernotations τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 18 18 et8c figs-metaphor τοῖς ἀδελφοῖς 1 left the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 18 18 x25w translate-names Κενχρεαῖς 1 The word **Cenchreae** is the name of a city. This city was the seaport for the larger inland city of Corinth. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 18 18 kq6f translate-symaction κειράμενος ἐν Κενχρεαῖς τὴν κεφαλήν, εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 He had cut the hair of his head … because he had a vow Paul cut the hair off **his head** to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Paul cut off his hair in Cenchrea to show that he had fulfilled a vow that he had made to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 18 18 ceor figs-infostructure εἶχεν γὰρ εὐχήν 1 Luke seems to offer the information that Paul had made a **vow** as the explanation for why he **stayed yet many days** in Corinth despite the danger he was in. It may be more natural in your translation to put this information right after the phrase it seems to explain, **having stayed many days**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
@@ -2631,7 +2631,7 @@ ACT 18 25 ym5i figs-hendiadys ἐλάλει καὶ ἐδίδασκεν 1 This
ACT 18 25 z7a8 figs-activepassive οὗτος ἦν κατηχημένος 1 He had been instructed in the way of the Lord If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Other believers had taught him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 18 25 jj3b figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 18 25 jwol writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-synecdoche ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 18 25 ift8 figs-metonymy ζέων τῷ πνεύματι 1 and being fervent in spirit Here the **spirit** represents a person’s feelings and motivation. Alternate translation: “being very enthusiastic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 18 25 lr1h figs-possession τὸ βάπτισμα Ἰωάννου 1 the baptism of John Luke is using the possessive form here not to describe a **baptism** that **John** received but the baptism that John performed. Alternate translation: “the baptism that John performed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
ACT 18 26 ga6v figs-metaphor τὴν ὁδὸν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the way of God Luke is speaking as if the salvation that God has provided through Jesus is a way or path that people walk on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “about the salvation that God has provided through Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 18 27 c2sq writing-pronouns βουλομένου…αὐτοῦ 1 The pronoun **he** refers to Apollos. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when Apollos desired” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2684,14 +2684,11 @@ ACT 19 13 vqt1 figs-metonymy τὸν Ἰησοῦν 1 by the Jesus The exorcists
ACT 19 14 cwzb writing-background δέ 1 Luke uses the word **Now** to introduce background information about these **seven sons of Sceva** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
ACT 19 14 emgz writing-participants ἦσαν…τινος Σκευᾶ Ἰουδαίου ἀρχιερέως, ἑπτὰ υἱοὶ τοῦτο ποιοῦντες 1 Luke is using the phrase **a certain Jewish high priest** to introduce his **seven sons** as new participants in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “there was a Jewish chief priest whose seven sons were doing this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
ACT 19 14 cb8p translate-names Σκευᾶ 1 of Sceva The word **Sceva** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 19 15 fhzn figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲντὸ…πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT 19 15 fhzn figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθὲν…τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν εἶπεν 1 Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that the evil spirit responded to the sons of Sceva. Alternate translation: “the evil spirit responded” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
ACT 19 15 lrky figs-explicit τὸ πνεῦμα τὸ πονηρὸν 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is continuing the story he began in verse 13 after providing background material in verse 14. By **the evil spirit**, he means one to which some of the sons of Sceva were saying on a specific occasion, “I adjure you by the Jesus whom Paul proclaims.” Luke indicates in verse 16 that two of the sons were involved on this occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. UST models one way to do that. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 19 15 nsl1 figs-rquestion ὑμεῖς δὲ τίνες ἐστέ? 1 but who are you? The evil spirit is using the question form to emphasize that it does not know or respect these sons of Sceva the way he knows and respects Jesus and Paul, the representative of Jesus. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “but I do not know or respect you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ACT 19 15 vqwh writing-pronouns ὑμεῖς…τίνες ἐστέ? 1 The evil spirit is stating the pronoun **you**, which is already implied in the verb **are**, for emphasis. If your language can state implied pronouns explicitly for emphasis, you may want to use that construction here. Other languages may have other ways of bringing out this emphasis. Alternate translation: “I certainly do not know you!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 19 16 lu7u figs-explicit ἀμφοτέρων 1 them Luke assumes that his readers will understand that only two of the seven sons of Sceva were involved on this particular occasion. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the two sons of Sceva who were trying to cast out the evil spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 19 19 i31a figs-nominaladj τὰ περίεργα 1 Luke is using the adjective **magical** as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word **arts** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT 19 19 z9rj figs-explicit τὰς βίβλουςσυνενέγκαντες τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **declaring** tells how these believers were **confessing** the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
ACT 19 17 mx62 writing-endofstory δὲ 1 Luke uses the word translated **And** to introduce information about what happened at the end of the story of the seven sons of Sceva. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
ACT 19 17 jodu figs-activepassive τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “all living in Ephesus came to know about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 19 17 fd5m figs-hyperbole τοῦτο…ἐγένετο γνωστὸν πᾶσιν…τοῖς κατοικοῦσιν τὴν Ἔφεσον 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “this became widely known among those who lived in Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -2699,10 +2696,13 @@ ACT 19 17 h0lq figs-metaphor ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας
ACT 19 17 w1su figs-hyperbole ἐπέπεσεν φόβος ἐπὶ πάντας αὐτούς 1 Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “all who heard about it became very afraid” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 19 17 j85h figs-activepassive ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of the Lord Jesus was magnified If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they magnified the name of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 19 17 j2hh figs-metonymy ἐμεγαλύνετο τὸ ὄνομα τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the name Here the word **name** stands for the reputation of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus received a great reputation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-numbers ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might say something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
+ACT 19 18 v9ib figs-hendiadys ἐξομολογούμενοι καὶ ἀναγγέλλοντες 1 This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The phrase **declaring** tells how these believers were **confessing** the wrong things that they had done. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “publicly confessing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT 19 19 i31a figs-nominaladj τὰ περίεργα 1 Luke is using the adjective **magical** as a noun to describe certain practices. ULT adds the word **arts** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “practices that involved magic” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 19 19 z9rj figs-explicit τὰς βίβλους 1 having brought their books together Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the word **books** refers to scrolls on which magical incantations and formulas were recorded. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “their scrolls of magical incantations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 19 19 u9pi translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου μυριάδας πέντε 1 50000 Each of these **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead, you might say something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “an amount equivalent to well over a hundred years’ wages” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
ACT 19 19 bcv2 translate-bmoney ἀργυρίου 1 pieces of silver Each of the **pieces of silver** was the approximate daily wage of a common laborer. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
ACT 19 20 es71 figs-personification τοῦ Κυρίου ὁ λόγος ηὔξανεν καὶ ἴσχυεν 1 So the word of the Lord was spreading and prevailing according to power Luke is speaking of the way that the **word of the Lord** was becoming more widely known and accepted as if it were a living thing that was **increasing** and **prevailing**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “more and more people were hearing and believing the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
-ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 19 20 lbg9 figs-metonymy ὁ λόγος 1 Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was proclaiming by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 19 20 t49m writing-politeness τοῦ Κυρίου 1 Luke is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “about the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
ACT 19 21 de4f writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
ACT 19 21 q18b figs-idiom ὡς…ἐπληρώθη ταῦτα, ἔθετο ὁ Παῦλος ἐν τῷ Πνεύματι…πορεύεσθαι 1 this was completed, Paul The word **fulfilled** conveys the sense that Paul had completed the work that God had for him to do in Ephesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “once all these things had happened, the Spirit showed Paul that he had completed his work in Ephesus and that he should travel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -2726,7 +2726,7 @@ ACT 19 27 hz7l figs-hyperbole ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκο
ACT 19 27 aq5c figs-metonymy ἣν ὅλη ἡ Ἀσία καὶ ἡ οἰκουμένη σέβεται 1 Here the words **Asia** and **the world** refer to the people in Asia and in the known world. Alternate translation: “whom many people in Asia and in other parts of the world worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 19 28 t4lm writing-pronouns ἔκραζον 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the craftsmen who were making the idols. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the craftsmen were shouting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 19 28 uc5c figs-metaphor γενόμενοι πλήρεις θυμοῦ 1 having become filled with anger Luke is speaking of the craftsmen as if they were containers that **anger** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “becoming very angry” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 19 28 ii1u translate-names Ἐφεσίων 0 General Information: The word **Ephesians** describes people who live in or come from the city of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 19 28 ii1u translate-names Ἐφεσίων 1 General Information: The word **Ephesians** describes people who live in or come from the city of Ephesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 19 29 t7xs figs-activepassive ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 the whole city was filled with confusion If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “confusion filled the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]]);
ACT 19 29 u42d figs-metaphor ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 Luke is speaking of **the city** as if they was a container that **confusion** filled. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “there was confusion throughout the city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 19 29 u51d figs-abstractnouns ἐπλήσθη ἡ πόλις τῆς συγχύσεως 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **confusion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “people throughout the city were confused” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
@@ -2734,7 +2734,7 @@ ACT 19 29 ej3q translate-unknown τὸ θέατρον 1 into the theater The **t
ACT 19 29 d6r9 translate-names Γάϊον…Ἀρίσταρχον 1 Gaius … Aristarchus The words **Gaius** and **Aristarchus** are names of men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 19 29 zm0j translate-names Μακεδόνας 1 The word **Macedonians** described people who lived in or came from the province of Macedonia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 19 31 o6qt translate-names τῶν Ἀσιαρχῶν 1 The word **Asiarchs** is the name for the provincial officers who governed the Roman province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 19 31 we87 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ… αὐτὸν…παρεκάλουν…ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 19 31 we87 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ…αὐτὸν…παρεκάλουν…ἑαυτὸν 1 The pronouns **him** and **himself** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “of Paul’s … him … were urging Paul … himself” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 19 31 r183 figs-idiom δοῦναι ἑαυτὸν εἰς τὸ θέατρον 1 The expression **to give himself** means “to go,” but it suggests risk and danger. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to risk going into the theater” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 19 33 ukaw figs-explicit συνεβίβασαν Ἀλέξανδρον 1 The implication is that some people **instructed Alexander** about how he could speak to everyone in the theater. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “instructed Alexander about how he could speak to everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 19 33 jr85 translate-names Ἀλέξανδρον 1 Alexander The word **Alexander** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
@@ -2747,8 +2747,8 @@ ACT 19 35 n4qz φησίν 1 To call attention to a development in the story, h
ACT 19 35 gox9 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, Ἐφέσιοι 1 This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “Citizens of Ephesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 19 35 mtsc figs-ellipsis τίς γάρ ἐστιν 1 The city clerk is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “you should stop this uproar because, after all, who is there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 19 35 sd3s figs-rquestion τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος καὶ τοῦ διοπετοῦς? 1 what man indeed is there who does not know that the city of Ephesus is temple keeper of the great Artemis and of that which is fallen down from heaven? The city clerk is using the question form to emphasize that the people of Ephesus do not need to be concerned that the worship of Artemis is in peril. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “there is no one of men who does not know that the city of Ephesus is the temple warden of the great Artemis and of the Zeus-fallen image!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-doublenegatives τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT 19 35 gqr7 figs-hyperbole τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 19 35 k8dy figs-doublenegatives τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 who does not know The city clerk’s question becomes a double negative when it takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression instead. Alternate translation: “all men know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 19 35 gqr7 figs-hyperbole τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων, ὃς οὐ γινώσκει 1 A generalization for emphasis is implicit in the city clerk’s question, and this generalization becomes explicit when the question takes the form of a statement or exclamation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “men know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 19 35 zzmv figs-gendernotations τίς…ἐστιν ἀνθρώπων 1 Although the term **men** is masculine, the city clerk is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “what person is there” or, as a statement or exclamation, “all people know” or “people know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
ACT 19 35 hiw3 writing-politeness τὴν Ἐφεσίων πόλιν νεωκόρον οὖσαν τῆς μεγάλης Ἀρτέμιδος 1 temple keeper The term **temple keeper** was an honorary title that cities assumed when they built and maintained temples to the gods that the Greeks and Romans worshiped or to the emperor. In your translation, use an expression that shows that the city clerk is using honorific language. Alternate translation: “the city of Ephesus has the honor of hosting the temple of the great Artemis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
ACT 19 35 afd1 figs-nominaladj τοῦ διοπετοῦς 1 of that which is fallen down from heaven The city clerk is using the adjective **Zeus-fallen** as a noun to mean a specific kind of object. ULT adds the word **image** to show that. (Within the temple of Artemis was an image of the goddess. It had been fashioned from a meteorite that had fallen from the sky. The people of Ephesus thought that this rock had come directly from Zeus, whom they considered the ruler of their pagan gods.) Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the image that fell from the sky from Zeus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
@@ -2780,22 +2780,22 @@ ACT 20 3 jypq αὐτῷ…μέλλοντι ἀνάγεσθαι εἰς τὴν
ACT 20 4 dw6j translate-names Σώπατρος Πύρρου…Σεκοῦνδος,…Τυχικὸς…Τρόφιμος 1 were Sopater of Pyrrhus … Secundus … Tychicus … Trophimus These words are the names of five men. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 20 4 dpyn figs-possession Σώπατρος Πύρρου 1 Here, the possessive form indicates that **Sopater** is the son of **Pyrrhus**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could say that specifically. Alternate translation: “Sopater, whose father was named Pyrrhus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
ACT 20 4 w4n1 translate-names Βεροιαῖος…Θεσσαλονικέων…Δερβαῖος…Ἀσιανοὶ 1 from Berea … from Derbe The word **Berean** is the name for someone from the city of Berea. The word **Thessalonians** describes people from the city of Thessalonica. The word **Derbean** is the name for someone from the city of Derbe. The word **Asians** describes people from the province of Asia. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 20 4 w8j6 translate-names Ἀρίσταρχος…Γάϊος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md).
+ACT 20 4 w8j6 translate-names Ἀρίσταρχος…Γάϊος 1 Aristarchus … Gaius The words **Aristarchus** and **Gaius** are the names of men. See how you translated these names in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 20 5 y35x figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Luke begins to use the pronouns **us** and **we** to refer to himself and his traveling companions, but not to his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words throughout this chapter if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 20 5 gb5f writing-pronouns οὗτοι 1 The pronoun **they** refers to the seven men who were traveling with Paul, whom Luke lists in the previous verse. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “those seven men” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 20 5 o1bl figs-explicit ἡμᾶς 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul and his other companions at this point in the story. You can include this information if it will help your readers understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 20 5 itz1 translate-names Τρῳάδι 1 Troas The word **Troas** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 20 7 xsyv figs-nominaladj τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular day of the **week**. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 20 7 wpfh figs-explicit τῇ μιᾷ τῶν σαββάτων 1 Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the believers met on **the first of the week** because that was the day Jesus rose from the dead. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the first day of the week, when Jesus rose from the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 20 7 tgsb figs-activepassive συνηγμένων ἡμῶν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we having gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 20 7 ls6u writing-pronouns αὐτοῖς 1 The pronoun **them** refers to the believers in Troas with whom Paul and his traveling companions were meeting. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the believers in Troas” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-ACT 20 6 l5dr translate-names τὰς ἡμέρας τῶν Ἀζύμων 1 the days of unleavened bread The words **Unleavened Bread** are the name of a Jewish religious observance that took place over several **days**. See how you translated this in [12:3](../12/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 20 7 zff8 figs-synecdoche κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 to break bread Luke could be using the word **break** to mean “eat,” and he could be using the word **bread** to mean “food.” In each case he would be using one part of something to mean the whole thing. Breaking bread is one thing people do when they eat it, and bread is one kind of food. So this could be a reference to the believers sharing a meal together. Alternate translation: “to share a meal” or see the next note for a further possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 20 7 ckiy figs-explicit κλάσαι ἄρτον 1 By **to break bread**, Luke could also mean remembering the death of Jesus in the way that Jesus commanded, by literally breaking a loaf of bread and sharing it (and also sharing a cup of wine). If it would be helpful to your readers, you could say that explicitly. Alternate translation: “to observe the Lord’s Supper” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν… λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 20 8 t6on figs-explicit ἦσαν…λαμπάδες ἱκαναὶ ἐν τῷ ὑπερῴῳ, οὗ ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 The implication seems to be that it became warm in this **upper room** because there were **many lamps** lit in it, and this helps account for why Eutychus fell asleep, as Luke describes in the next verse. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “it was warm in the upper room where we were gathered together because many lamps were in it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 20 8 ak8z translate-unknown ὑπερῴῳ 1 upper room In this culture, in some houses, rooms were built above other rooms. According to the next verse, this room was actually built above a room that was built above another room. If your community does not have houses like that, you can use another expression to describe a large indoor space where people could meet. See how you translated this in [9:37](../09/37.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 20 8 cshh figs-activepassive ἦμεν συνηγμένοι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we had gathered together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 20 7 j888 figs-metonymy τὸν λόγον 1 and so he continued his message Luke is using the term **word** to mean the message that Paul was sharing by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “his message” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 20 9 ju64 translate-names Εὔτυχος 1 Eutychus The word **Eutychus** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 20 9 v5q7 translate-unknown ἐπὶ τῆς θυρίδος 1 on the window This **window** was an opening in the wall with a ledge that was wide enough for a person to sit on. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could describe this more fully. Alternate translation: “on the ledge of a window opening in the wall” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
ACT 20 9 tsp4 figs-activepassive καταφερόμενος ὕπνῳ βαθεῖ…κατενεχθεὶς ἀπὸ τοῦ ὕπνου 1 was falling into a deep sleep If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express this idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a deep sleep overcoming him … sleep having overcome him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -2838,7 +2838,7 @@ ACT 20 21 w7mv figs-abstractnouns τὴν εἰς Θεὸν μετάνοιαν
ACT 20 21 x552 figs-exclusive ἡμῶν 1 Paul is using the pronoun **our** to refer to himself and his listeners, so use the inclusive form of that word if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 20 22 hcs0 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 20 22 vam4 figs-activepassive δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 20 22 n99n figs-metaphor δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 20 22 n99n figs-metaphor δεδεμένος…τῷ Πνεύματι 1 Paul is speaking as if **the Spirit** had **bound** him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “with the Spirit constraining me” or “with the Spirit leading me in a way that I cannot refuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 20 22 um41 grammar-connect-exceptions τὰ ἐν αὐτῇ συναντήσοντά μοι, μὴ εἰδώς 1 Since Paul says in the next verse that he does know one thing that will happen to him in Jerusalem, it might appear in your language he is contradicting himself. If so, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. You could begin a new sentence here that continues into the next verse, leaving out the word “except” at the start of the next verse. Alternate translation: “The one thing I do know that will happen to me in her is” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
ACT 20 22 a9j1 writing-pronouns ἐν αὐτῇ 1 not knowing what will happen to me in it The pronoun **her** refers to the city of Jerusalem. Conventionally, Greek referred to cities with feminine pronouns. Your language may use a different gender. You could also use a noun. Alternate translation: “in it” or “in that city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 20 23 u26j figs-personification δεσμὰ καὶ θλίψεις με μένουσιν 1 Luke is speaking as if these **chains** and **sufferings** were living things that were waiting for Paul in Jerusalem. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will experience chains and afflictions when I get there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -2852,16 +2852,16 @@ ACT 20 24 hg3l figs-abstractnouns τὸ εὐαγγέλιον τῆς χάριτ
ACT 20 25 kj9c figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 And now, behold, I know Paul is using the term **behold** to focus his listeners’ attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 20 25 l59w figs-explicit τὴν βασιλείαν 1 Paul assumes that his listeners will understand that by **kingdom** he means the kingdom of God. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the kingdom of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 20 25 aur9 figs-abstractnouns τὴν βασιλείαν 1 among whom I went about proclaiming the kingdom If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God has begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 20 26 rab4 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 20 25 cq45 figs-synecdoche οὐκέτι ὄψεσθε τὸ πρόσωπόν μου 1 will see my face no more Paul is using one part of himself, his **face**, to represent all of himself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “will see me no more” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 20 26 rab4 figs-idiom ἐν τῇ σήμερον ἡμέρᾳ 1 This is an idiomatic expression. Your language may have its own way of expressing the same meaning. Alternate translation: “this very day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 20 26 e546 figs-metonymy καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 I am innocent from the blood of all Paul is referring to death as a punishment by association with the way a person’s blood is often shed when they are executed. In this case the death is not physical but spiritual. It is the punishment of spiritual death. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 20 26 rs87 figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 20 27 g1vx translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Paul is giving the reason why he is not responsible for any spiritual punishment the people in Ephesus might receive. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 26–27. It might say something like this: “I did not hold back from declaring all the counsel of God to you. Therefore I testify to you this very day that I am innocent of the blood of all of you.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
-ACT 20 26 rs87 figs-explicit καθαρός εἰμι ἀπὸ τοῦ αἵματος πάντων 1 Paul assumes that his readers will understand that they would receive a punishment of spiritual death for rejecting Jesus as their Savior from the guilt of sin. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I am not responsible for the punishment of spiritual death that any of you might receive for rejecting Jesus as your Savior from the guilt of sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 20 27 qa9y figs-doublenegatives οὐ γὰρ ὑπεστειλάμην τοῦ μὴ ἀναγγεῖλαι…ὑμῖν 1 For I did not hold back from declaring to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **hold back**. Alternate translation: “For I forthrightly declared to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
ACT 20 27 jl2w figs-hyperbole πᾶσαν τὴν βουλὴν τοῦ Θεοῦ ὑμῖν 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “everything that you needed to know in order to be saved” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 20 28 u52d figs-metaphor τῷ ποιμνίῳ, ἐν ᾧ ὑμᾶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἔθετο ἐπισκόπους, ποιμαίνειν τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the flock among which the Holy Spirit has made you overseers to shepherd the church of God Paul is speaking as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and the elders to whom he is speaking were their shepherds. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers whose leaders the Holy Spirit has made you, to care for the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 20 28 hjh6 figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 his own blood Paul is referring to death by association with the way people may shed their **blood** when they die. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the church of God, which he obtained through his own death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-rpronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 20 28 cx69 figs-pronouns τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 the church of God, which he purchased with his own blood The word translated **obtained** means to make something one’s own. The pronoun **he** may refer to Jesus, and this would mean that Jesus made the people of the church his own by dying for them. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God, whom Jesus made his own by dying for them” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-pronouns]])
ACT 20 28 r66x figs-nominaladj τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ, ἣν περιεποιήσατο διὰ τοῦ αἵματος τοῦ ἰδίου 1 This could also mean that God made the people of the church his own by sending his Son to die for them. In that case the translation would be “through the blood of his Own” and Paul would be using the adjective **own** as a noun to mean God’s own Son. Alternate translation: “the people of the church, whom God made his own through the death of his own Son” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 20 28 ybzd figs-metonymy τὴν ἐκκλησίαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 Here the term **church** refers to the people who belong to the church. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people of the church of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 20 29 ka6u figs-metaphor εἰσελεύσονται…λύκοι βαρεῖς εἰς ὑμᾶς, μὴ φειδόμενοι τοῦ ποιμνίου 1 vicious wolves will come in among you, not sparing the flock Paul is continuing to speak as if the believers were a **flock** of sheep and as if the false teachers he describes in the next verse are **vicious wolves**. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “false teachers will come to your group of believers and they will harm many of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -2879,7 +2879,7 @@ ACT 20 32 tbeo figs-abstractnouns τῷ λόγῳ τῆς χάριτος αὐτ
ACT 20 32 s7rf figs-metaphor τῷ δυναμένῳ οἰκοδομῆσαι 1 which is able to build you up Paul is speaking as if these believers were a wall or building or other structure and the **word** of God’s **grace** was making them higher and stronger. Alternate translation: “which is able to make you more confident and mature in your faith” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 20 32 x5jy figs-metaphor τὴν κληρονομίαν 1 the inheritance Paul is speaking as if the blessings that God gives believers were money or property that a child inherits from a father. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God’s blessings” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 20 32 sdlc figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who does the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “the ones whom God has sanctified” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 20 33 yw8a ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and did not try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 20 33 yw8a figs-explicit ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 I coveted no one’s silver The implication is that Paul did not desire any of these things and did not try to get them by charging for his ministry to the Ephesians. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I did not insist on being paid for my work” or “I did not try to become wealthy by teaching you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 20 33 o5jp figs-doublenegatives ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ, οὐδενὸς ἐπεθύμησα 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative phrase **no one** and the negative word **coveted**. Alternate translation: “I served you freely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
ACT 20 33 yl6k figs-metonymy ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου 1 Paul is referring to money by association with the way, in this culture, people used **silver** and **gold** as money. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the money” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 20 33 ipq5 figs-merism ἀργυρίου, ἢ χρυσίου, ἢ ἱματισμοῦ 1 no one’s silver, gold, or clothing In this culture, owning expensive **clothing** was a way of storing and displaying wealth. Paul is referring to wealth by naming two of its major components. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wealth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
@@ -2890,7 +2890,7 @@ ACT 20 35 zibu figs-ellipsis πάντα ὑπέδειξα ὑμῖν, ὅτι…
ACT 20 35 pvrm figs-hyperbole πάντα…ὅτι…δεῖ 1 Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “consistently, that it is necessary” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 20 35 b6o1 figs-nominaladj πάντα 1 Paul is using the adjective **all** as a noun. ULT adds the word **things** to show that. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “all kinds of things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
ACT 20 35 d1bh figs-metonymy ἀντιλαμβάνεσθαι τῶν ἀσθενούντων 1 Paul is referring to helping people by association with the way that someone might **take hold** of a person who was **weak** to keep him from falling. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to help those who are weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ , ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+ACT 20 35 tr1d figs-rpronouns τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ, ὅτι αὐτὸς εἶπεν 1 Paul is adding the word **himself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. Alternate translation: “the words that none other than our Lord Jesus spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
ACT 20 35 ps2i figs-metonymy τῶν λόγων τοῦ Κυρίου Ἰησοῦ 1 the words of the Lord Jesus Paul is using the term **words** to mean a statement that Jesus made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the statement of the Lord Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 20 35 mj5s figs-quotesinquotes εἶπεν, μακάριόν ἐστιν μᾶλλον, διδόναι ἢ λαμβάνειν 1 If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “said that it is more blessed to give than to receive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 20 36 u3uc translate-symaction θεὶς τὰ γόνατα αὐτοῦ 1 having bowed his knees, he prayed Paul knelt down as a symbolic action to show that he was approaching God humbly in prayer. If this would not be clear to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “humbly kneeling down” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -2947,7 +2947,7 @@ ACT 21 16 k9kr writing-participants τινι Κυπρίῳ ἀρχαίῳ μαθ
ACT 21 16 zd9i translate-names Μνάσωνί…Κυπρίῳ 1 Mnason…Cypriot The word **Mnason** is the name of a man. The word **Cypriot** is the name for someone who lives on or comes from the island of Cyprus. See how you translated it in [11:20](../11/20.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 21 16 a441 figs-activepassive παρ’ ᾧ ξενισθῶμεν 1 with whom we would be hosted If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “who would be hosting us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 21 17 d3gj figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοί 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the believers there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 21 20 a1hk writing-pronouns οἱ… ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν…αὐτῷ 1 they were glorifying…they said to him The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 21 20 a1hk writing-pronouns οἱ…ἐδόξαζον…εἶπόν…αὐτῷ 1 they were glorifying…they said to him The pronoun **they** refers in these instances to James and the elders, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “James and the elders were glorifying … they said to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 21 20 a442 figs-metaphor θεωρεῖς 1 you see Paul does not physically **see** these tens of thousands of Jewish believers. James and the elders mean that he knows about them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 21 20 xki4 figs-metaphor ἀδελφέ 1 brother James and the elders using the term **brother** to mean someone who shares the same faith. Since this expression occurs in direct discourse, you may want to preserve it in your translation to show how these believers addressed one another. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 21 20 c5pu writing-pronouns ὑπάρχουσιν 1 they are In this instance the pronoun **they** refers to the believing Jews whom James and the elders are describing. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “these believing Jews are” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
@@ -2958,7 +2958,7 @@ ACT 21 21 sdl3 figs-metonymy ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 a
ACT 21 21 a444 figs-abstractnouns ἀποστασίαν…ἀπὸ Μωϋσέως 1 apostasy from Moses If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **apostasy**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “not to obey the law of Moses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
ACT 21 21 knt4 figs-metaphor μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs James and the elders are speaking as if the Jewish **customs** were a path that people walked on. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “nor to observe the customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 21 21 u56t figs-explicit μηδὲ τοῖς ἔθεσιν περιπατεῖν 1 not to walk in the customs By **the customs**, James and the elders implicitly mean the customs that Jews ordinarily observe. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “nor to observe our Jewish customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 21 22 a445 figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 21 22 a445 figs-ellipsis τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “What therefore is it that you should do” or “So what should you do about this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 21 22 a446 figs-rquestion τί οὖν ἐστιν 1 What therefore is it James and the elders are using the question form to introduce what they think Paul should do in response to the situation they have described. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You need to do something about this!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ACT 21 23 b28b figs-exclusive λέγομεν 1 we say As the General Notes to this chapter indicate, by **we**, James and the elders mean themselves but Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 21 23 b22r translate-unknown εὐχὴν ἔχοντες 1 having a vow See how you translated the term **vow** in [18:18](../18/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
@@ -2972,8 +2972,8 @@ ACT 21 24 a450 figs-idiom ὧν κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ οὐδέ
ACT 21 24 nu9v figs-activepassive κατήχηνται περὶ σοῦ 1 they have been told about you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people have told them about you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 21 24 a451 figs-rpronouns καὶ αὐτὸς, φυλάσσων τὸν νόμον 1 also keeping the law yourself James and the elders are using the word **yourself** for emphasis. Use a way that is natural in your language to indicate this emphasis. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “You too observe the law very carefully” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
ACT 21 25 a452 figs-ellipsis ἡμεῖς ἀπεστείλαμεν…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτοὺς 1 we sent that they should guard James and the elders are leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “we sent them a letter telling them that they should guard themselves from” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-nominaladj τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
-ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό…εἰδωλόθυτον… πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 21 25 bpb5 figs-nominaladj τό…εἰδωλόθυτον…πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are using the adjectives **idol-sacrificed** and **strangled** as nouns to mean specific kinds of animals. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate these words with equivalent phrases. Alternate translation: “animals that have been offered to idols … animals that have been killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 21 25 wjd2 figs-metonymy τό…εἰδωλόθυτον…πνικτὸν 1 the idol-sacrificed…the strangled James and the elders are referring by association to meat from animals that have been offered to idols or killed by strangulation. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from eating the meat of animals that have been offered to idols … from what is killed by strangulation” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 21 25 nu0i figs-explicit πνικτὸν 1 the strangled God did not allow the Jews to consume blood in any form. Therefore, they could not eat the meat from an animal that had been strangled, because the blood would not have been properly drained from the body of the animal. James and the elders wanted Gentiles who believed in Jesus not to consume blood either. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand the sentence. Alternate translation: “the meat of animals that have been killed by strangulation, because this meat still contains blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 21 26 cr14 figs-explicit τοὺς ἄνδρας 1 the men Luke implicitly means the four **men** who had made a vow. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the men who had each made a vow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 21 26 a453 figs-explicit ἁγνισθεὶς 1 having been purified Luke is referring implicitly to the purification ceremony that allowed Paul and these men to enter the temple area. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having been purified in order to enter the temple area” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
@@ -2994,7 +2994,7 @@ ACT 21 28 a460 figs-hyperbole πάντας πανταχῇ 1 all everywhere The
ACT 21 28 sfg3 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ, καὶ τοῦ νόμου, καὶ τοῦ τόπου τούτου 1 the people and the law and this place The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that they are referring to the special status of the people of Israel as God’s chosen people, the law of Moses, and the temple in Jerusalem. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel and the law of Moses and this temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 21 28 jc9q figs-explicit εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 into the temple The Jews from Asia assume that their listeners will understand that only Jewish males were allowed in certain areas of the courtyard of the Jerusalem **temple** and that they are accusing Paul of bringing **Greeks** into those areas. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “into areas of the temple courtyard where they are not allowed to go” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 21 28 a461 figs-metonymy τὸ ἱερὸν 1 the temple Only priests were allowed inside the temple building, so when Luke says **the temple** here, he means the courtyard associated with the temple. Alternate translation: “the temple courtyard” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 1 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid {their} hands on him, shouting, “Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
+ACT 21 29 t2z7 translate-versebridge 0 In this verse, Luke is giving the reason why the Jews from the province of Asia thought that Paul had “defiled” the temple area by bringing “Greeks” into it. To put the reason before the result, you could create a verse bridge for verses 28–29. It might say something like this: “Now some Jews from Asia had seen Trophimus the Ephesian with Paul in the city. When they saw Paul in the temple when the seven days were about to be finished, they were thinking that Paul had brought Trophimus into the temple. So they were agitating the whole crowd, and they laid {their} hands on him, shouting, ‘Men, Israelites, help! This is the man teaching all everywhere against the people and the law and this place. And he has even both brought Greeks into the temple and has defiled this holy place.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-versebridge]])
ACT 21 29 h1uu translate-names Τρόφιμον 1 Trophimus The word **Trophimus** is the name of a man. See how you translated this name in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 21 30 st3f figs-metonymy ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Here, the word **city** means the people who lived in the city of Jerusalem. Alternate translation: “all the people of the city became excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 21 30 upl8 figs-hyperbole ἐκινήθη…ἡ πόλις ὅλη 1 the whole city was excited Luke says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the people of the city were very excited” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
@@ -3025,7 +3025,7 @@ ACT 21 37 j9xk figs-activepassive μέλλων…εἰσάγεσθαι εἰς
ACT 21 37 a468 ὁ Παῦλος λέγει 1 Paul says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Paul said”
ACT 21 37 a469 figs-quotations ὁ Παῦλος λέγει τῷ χιλιάρχῳ, εἰ ἔξεστίν μοι εἰπεῖν τι πρὸς σέ? 1 Paul says to the chiliarch, “If it is permitted for me to say something to you?” Luke is recording how Paul used the typical form in his language for asking questions. It may be more natural in your language to have an indirect quotation here. Alternate translation: “Paul asked the chiliarch if it was permitted for him to say something to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
ACT 21 37 p5cd figs-rquestion Ἑλληνιστὶ γινώσκεις? 1 Do you know Greek? The commander is using the question form to express surprise that Paul is not who he thought he was. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You know Greek!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος…? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian…? The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian … !” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT 21 38 xx2w figs-rquestion οὐκ ἄρα σὺ εἶ ὁ Αἰγύπτιος, ὁ πρὸ τούτων τῶν ἡμερῶν, ἀναστατώσας καὶ ἐξαγαγὼν εἰς τὴν ἔρημον τοὺς τετρακισχιλίους ἄνδρας τῶν σικαρίων? 1 Are you not then the Egyptian…? The commander is using the question form to emphasize the conclusion he has drawn about Paul. Jews who spoke Greek typically came from somewhere outside of Palestine, and since Paul seems to be someone whom the Jews in Jerusalem consider to be very dangerous, the commander concludes that he must be **the Egyptian** he knows about. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “Then you must not be the Egyptian who before this day revolted and led the 4,000 men of the ‘Assassins’ out into the wilderness!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ACT 21 38 p2ym translate-transliterate τῶν σικαρίων 1 of the Sicarii The term **Sicarii** is a Latin word. Luke spells it out using Greek letters so his readers will know how it sounds. The term means an assassin and it comes from the Latin word for a dagger. In this context, it refers to a group of Jewish rebels who carried daggers under their robes and killed Romans and people who supported the Romans. In your translation, you could spell this the way it sounds in your language, or you could use a term with the same meaning. Alternate translation: “of the Assassins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
ACT 21 39 a470 translate-names Ταρσεὺς 1 a Tarsian The word **Tarsian** is the name for someone who comes from the city of Tarsus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 21 39 a471 figs-litotes οὐκ ἀσήμου πόλεως πολίτης 1 a not undistinguished city Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a very distinguished city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -3057,9 +3057,9 @@ ACT 22 6 w4l7 writing-newevent ἐγένετο δέ μοι 1 It happened to me t
ACT 22 7 a476 figs-quotesinquotes φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 a voice saying to me, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me?’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “someone addressing me by name and asking me why I was persecuting him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 22 7 d6nd figs-synecdoche φωνῆς λεγούσης μοι 1 a voice saying to me Paul is figuratively using one part of this speaker, his **voice**, to represent all of him in the act of speaking. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 22 7 a477 figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 22 8 a478 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος , ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 And I answered, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And he said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 22 8 a478 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ ἀπεκρίθην, τίς εἶ, κύριε? εἶπέν τε πρὸς ἐμέ, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς ὁ Ναζωραῖος, ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 And I answered, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And he said to me, ‘I am Jesus the Nazarene, whom you are persecuting’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And in response I asked this divine figure who he was, and he told me that he was Jesus the Nazarene, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 22 8 a479 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 Who are you, Lord Paul was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
-ACT 22 9 h95h figs-idiom τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 they did not hear the voice In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../01/01.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 22 9 h95h figs-idiom τὴν…φωνὴν οὐκ ἤκουσαν 1 they did not hear the voice In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand,” since Luke says in [9:7](../09/07.md) that the men traveling with Paul did actually hear the voice. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they did not understand the voice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 22 10 a480 figs-quotesinquotes εἶπον δέ, τί ποιήσω, Κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν πρός με, ἀναστὰς πορεύου εἰς Δαμασκόν, κἀκεῖ σοι λαληθήσεται περὶ πάντων ὧν τέτακταί σοι ποιῆσαι 1 But I said, ‘What should I do, Lord?’ And the Lord said to me, ‘Arising, go into Damascus, and there it will be told to you about all that has been appointed to you to do.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But I asked the Lord what I should do, and the Lord told me to get up and go into Damascus, because there it would be told to me about all that had been appointed to me to do’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 22 10 a91a figs-activepassive σοι λαληθήσεται 1 it will be told to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “someone will tell you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 22 10 a481 figs-activepassive πάντων ὧν τέτακταί 1 all that has been appointed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “all that God has appointed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3083,7 +3083,6 @@ ACT 22 15 a489 figs-quotesinquotes ὅτι ἔσῃ μάρτυς αὐτῷ πρ
ACT 22 15 i5q8 figs-gendernotations πρὸς πάντας ἀνθρώπους 1 to all men Although the term **men** is masculine, Ananias was using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “to all people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
ACT 22 16 a490 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ νῦν τί μέλλεις? ἀναστὰς, βάπτισαι καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου, ἐπικαλεσάμενος τὸ ὄνομα αὐτοῦ 1 And now, why are you delaying? Arising, be baptized and wash away your sins, calling on his name.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He asked me why I was delaying, and he told me to arise and be baptized and wash away my sins, calling on the name of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
ACT 22 16 bhg9 καὶ νῦν 1 And now Here, **now** does not mean “at this moment”; Ananias is using the term to draw attention to the important point that follows. Alternate translation: “So listen”
-ACT 22 16 mmx9 figs-rquestion τί μέλλεις? 1 why are you delaying?
ACT 22 16 a491 figs-idiom ἀναστὰς 1 Arising Here the term **arising** means that Ananias wanted Paul to take action, not that he wanted him to stand up from a sitting or lying position. Alternate translation: “Come on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
ACT 22 16 lt2i figs-activepassive βάπτισαι 1 be baptized If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “receive baptism” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 22 16 zr5p figs-metaphor καὶ ἀπόλουσαι τὰς ἁμαρτίας σου 1 and wash away your sins Ananias is speaking as if Paul could literally **wash away** his **sins**. He is using a word picture to convey his meaning. He means that just as washing one’s body removes dirt, if Paul repents and asks Jesus for forgiveness, Jesus releases him from the guilt and power sin. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to show that you are asking Jesus to free you from sin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -3100,10 +3099,10 @@ ACT 22 20 a496 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ ὅτε ἐξεχύννετο τὸ
ACT 22 20 udrd figs-activepassive ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, recall from chapter 7 that it was the enemies of Stephen. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness spilled his blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 22 20 y7t1 figs-metonymy ἐξεχύννετο τὸ αἷμα Στεφάνου τοῦ μάρτυρός σου 1 the blood of Stephen your witness was spilled Paul is referring to Stephen’s death by association with the way his **blood** was **spilled** when his enemies killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the enemies of Stephen your witness killed him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 22 21 a497 figs-quotesinquotes καὶ εἶπεν πρός με, πορεύου, ὅτι ἐγὼ εἰς ἔθνη μακρὰν ἐξαποστελῶ σε 1 But he said to me, ‘Go, because I will send you far away to the Gentiles’” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “But he told me to go because he would send me far away to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT 22 22 a498 figs-metonymy τούτου τοῦ λόγου 1 this word This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific **word** “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’ (2) that the term **word** means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul say this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 22 22 a498 figs-metonymy τούτου τοῦ λόγου 1 this word This could mean: (1) that the crowd became upset when they heard the specific **word** “Gentiles.” Alternate translation: “they heard the word ‘Gentiles’” (2) that the term **word** means what Paul said by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Paul says this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 22 22 a499 figs-metaphor ἐπῆραν τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν λέγοντες 1 they lifted up their voice, saying Luke is speaking as if the crowd in Jerusalem literally **lifted up** its **voice**. He means that they spoke loudly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “they shouted” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 22 22 a500 τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 their voice If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of "lifting up a voice" but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”
-ACT 22 22 ta8z figs-metonymy αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The crowd is referring to Paul's death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 22 22 a500 τὴν φωνὴν αὐτῶν 1 their voice If you would like to retain the metaphor in your translation of “lifting up a voice” but it would be unusual in your language to speak as if a whole group of people had one **voice**, you could make this plural. Alternate translation: “their voices”
+ACT 22 22 ta8z figs-metonymy αἶρε ἀπὸ τῆς γῆς τὸν τοιοῦτον 1 Remove such a one from the earth The crowd is referring to Paul’s death by association with the way they would **remove** him **from the earth** if they killed him. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Kill such a one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
ACT 22 22 a501 figs-explicit οὐ…καθῆκεν αὐτὸν ζῆν 1 it was not right for him to live The crowd meant implicitly that it was **not right** for Paul to **live** even long enough to offer the explanation he was giving. You can indicate this in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “we should have killed him even before he spoke to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 22 23 b6a7 translate-symaction ῥιπτούντων τὰ ἱμάτια 1 casting off their outer garments When the people in the crowd removed their outer garments, this was at least a symbolic action indicating that they felt they should stone Paul to death. They took off their long robes as they would have done in order to throw stones at Paul more easily. But some of the people may actually have intended to try to stone Paul even though he was in the custody of the Roman soldiers. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this in your translation. Alternate translation: “casting off their outer garments as if they were going to throw stones at Paul to kill him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 22 23 a502 translate-symaction κονιορτὸν βαλλόντων εἰς τὸν ἀέρα 1 throwing dust into the air This could mean: (1) that the people in the crowd were **throwing dust into the air** to symbolize how they wanted to throw stones at Paul, who was on the steps above them. Alternate translation: “throwing dust into the air as if they were throwing stones at Paul” (2) that the people in the crowd were doing this to demonstrate how angry they were. Alternate translation: “angrily throwing dust into the air” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
@@ -3129,10 +3128,10 @@ ACT 22 30 a510 figs-nominaladj τὸ ἀσφαλὲς 1 the certain Luke is usin
ACT 22 30 kx58 figs-explicit ἔλυσεν αὐτόν 1 he released him This means implicitly not that the commander **released** Paul from custody but that he freed Paul from the chains that were binding him to one solider on each side of him. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “he ordered his soldiers to unchain Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 23 intro gbw5 0 # Acts 23 General Notes
## Structure and Formatting
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page than the rest of the text. The ULT does this with the quoted material in 23:5.
## Special Concepts in this Chapter
### Resurrection of the dead
The Pharisees believed that after people died, they would become alive again and God would either reward them or punish them. The Sadducees believed that once people died, they stayed dead and would never become alive again. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/raise]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/reward]])
### “Called a curse”
Some Jews promised God that they would not eat or drink until they killed Paul, and they asked God to punish them if they did not do what they had promised to do.
### Roman citizenship
The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. The “chief captain” could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way he would treat a non-citizen.
## Important Figures of Speech in this Chapter
### Whitewash
This is a common metaphor in Scripture for appearing to be good or clean or righteous when one is evil or unclean or unrighteous. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 23 1 lrs1 figs-idiom ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “brothers of mine” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 23 1 lrs5 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοὶ καὶ πατέρες 1 Men, brothers and fathers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 23 1 lrs5 figs-metaphor ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers Paul is using the word **brothers** to refer respectfully to his fellow Israelites. Alternate translation: “My fellow Israelites” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 23 1 nn2q figs-hyperbole πάσῃ συνειδήσει ἀγαθῇ 1 in all good conscience Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in careful obedience to the law” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 23 2 yz4n translate-names Ἁνανίας 1 Ananias **Ananias** is the name of a man. See how you translated the same name for two other men in [5:1](../05/01.md) and [9:10](../09/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 23 2 a565 translate-symaction τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα 1 to strike his mouth Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his **mouth** that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 23 2 a565 translate-symaction τύπτειν αὐτοῦ τὸ στόμα 1 to strike his mouth Ananias ordered this as a symbolic action to show that he believed Paul had said something with his **mouth** that he should not have said. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “to strike his mouth because he believed Paul had said something he should not have said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 23 3 igq4 figs-metaphor τοῖχε κεκονιαμένε 1 you whitewashed wall Paul is referring to the way a **wall** can be painted white to make it look clean. Paul was suggesting that, in the same way, Ananias appeared to look morally innocent, but he was really full of evil intent. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “you who pretend to be good” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
ACT 23 3 un7g figs-rquestion καὶ σὺ κάθῃ κρίνων με κατὰ τὸν νόμον, καὶ παρανομῶν κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι? 1 And do you sit judging me by the law and, acting contrary to the law, command me to be struck? Paul is using the question form to challenge Ananias for what he has done. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “You should certainly not sit judging me by the law while acting contrary to the law by commanding me to be struck!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
ACT 23 3 m6nb figs-activepassive κελεύεις με τύπτεσθαι 1 command me to be struck If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “command someone to strike me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3155,7 +3154,7 @@ ACT 23 8 lrs2 figs-explicit τὰ ἀμφότερα 1 both By **both**, Luke mea
ACT 23 9 a519 translate-symaction ἀναστάντες 1 arising By **arising** (that is, standing up), these Pharisees were indicating that they had something important to say. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “standing up to show that they had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
ACT 23 9 ayr8 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel These Pharisees are speaking as if what they are saying is a hypothetical possibility, but they believe that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
ACT 23 9 a520 figs-explicit εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel These Pharisees assume that the Sadducees will understand that they mean this spirit or angel **spoke** to Paul when he had the vision in the Jerusalem temple that he described in [22:17–21](../22/17.md). You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “And since a spirit must have spoken to him, or an angel, when he had his vision in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 23 9 a521 figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος … 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel … These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT 23 9 a521 figs-ellipsis εἰ δὲ πνεῦμα ἐλάλησεν αὐτῷ, ἢ ἄγγελος? 1 And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel? These Pharisees are making the first part of a conditional statement and leaving the second part for the Sadduccees to realize on their own. If this would be unclear to your readers, you could supply the second part of this conditional statement in your translation. Alternate translation: “And if a spirit spoke to him, or an angel, then you should find no evil in this man either.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 23 10 f568 figs-activepassive διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 Paul be torn apart by them If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they tear Paul apart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 23 10 tqhu figs-hyperbole μὴ διασπασθῇ ὁ Παῦλος ὑπ’ αὐτῶν 1 lest Paul be torn apart by them Luke is making an overstatement here to emphasize the danger that Paul was in. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “lest they cause Paul great physical harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 23 11 i9w5 figs-idiom τῇ…ἐπιούσῃ νυκτὶ 1 on the following night This expression indicates the **night** after the day Paul went before the council. In your translation, express this in the way your culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “during the night that followed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -3169,7 +3168,7 @@ ACT 23 14 a526 figs-synecdoche μηδενὸς γεύσασθαι 1 to eat nothi
ACT 23 15 u8xm figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 we By **we**, the conspirators mean themselves but not chief priests and leaders to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
ACT 23 15 a527 figs-imperative ἐμφανίσατε 1 make it appear This is an imperative, but it communicates a request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a request. Alternate translation: “we would like you to make it appear” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
ACT 23 16 a531 figs-metonymy ἀκούσας…τὴν ἐνέδραν 1 hearing the ambush Luke means that the son of Paul’s sister heard some of the conspirators talking about the **ambush**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “hearing people talk about the ambush” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or "the nephew of Paul" (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
+ACT 23 16 w6fe translate-kinship ὁ υἱὸς τῆς ἀδελφῆς Παύλου 1 the son of the sister of Paul Luke does not tell us whether this **sister** was older or younger than Paul, but describe this relationship in the way that would be most natural for your language and cuture. Alternate translation: “Paul’s nephew” or “the nephew of Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-kinship]])
ACT 23 17 a528 figs-imperative ἄπαγε 1 take This is an imperative, but it communicates a polite request rather than a command. Use a form in your language that communicates a polite request. It may be helpful to add an expression such as “please” to make this clear. Alternate translation: “Please take” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative]])
ACT 23 18 abd0 writing-pronouns ὁ…παραλαβὼν αὐτὸν, ἤγαγεν 1 taking him, he brought him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul’s nephew, and the pronoun **he** refers to the centurion. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “taking Paul’s nephew, the centurion brought him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 23 18 lrs3 φησίν 1 says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “said”
@@ -3197,7 +3196,7 @@ ACT 23 29 wsh2 figs-metonymy θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν 1 death or chains
ACT 23 30 i2ji figs-activepassive μηνυθείσης…μοι ἐπιβουλῆς εἰς τὸν ἄνδρα ἔσεσθαι 1 when a plot that was to be against the man was revealed to me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when someone revealed to me that there was going to be a plot against the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 23 31 ny4k figs-activepassive κατὰ τὸ διατεταγμένον αὐτοῖς 1 according to what had been commanded to them If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to what the chiliarch had commanded them to do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 23 31 ifs1 translate-names τὴν Ἀντιπατρίδα 1 Antipatris The word **Antipatris** is the name of a city. It was located about halfway between Jerusalem and Caesarea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns ὑπέστρεψαν…αὐτῷ 1 they returned…him The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 23 32 abd1 writing-pronouns αὐτῷ, ὑπέστρεψαν 1 they returned…him The pronoun **they** refers to the soldiers, and the pronoun **him** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul, the soldiers returned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 23 33 abx1 writing-pronouns οἵτινες εἰσελθόντες εἰς τὴν Καισάρειαν, καὶ ἀναδόντες τὴν ἐπιστολὴν τῷ ἡγεμόνι, παρέστησαν καὶ τὸν Παῦλον αὐτῷ 1 who, entering into Caesarea and delivering the letter to the governor, also presented Paul to him The pronoun **who** refers to the horsemen who accompanied Paul all the way to Caesarea. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “When the horsemen reached Caesarea, they delivered the letter to the governor and also presented Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 23 34 dtx1 figs-quotations ἐπερωτήσας ἐκ ποίας ἐπαρχείας ἐστὶν 1 having asked what province he was from It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “having asked Paul, ‘What province are you from?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
ACT 23 35 mga2 figs-activepassive κελεύσας…φυλάσσεσθαι αὐτόν 1 commanding him to be guarded If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “commanding his soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -3220,7 +3219,7 @@ ACT 24 5 i1qs figs-metaphor λοιμὸν 1 a pest Tertullus is speaking as if P
ACT 24 5 k1v1 figs-hyperbole πᾶσι τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις τοῖς κατὰ τὴν οἰκουμένην 1 among all the Jews are throughout the world Tertullus says this as overstatements for emphasis. Since Luke is quoting directly from his speech, it would be appropriate to retain this overstatement in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
ACT 24 5 zg4a translate-names τῶν Ναζωραίων 1 the Nazarenes In this context, the word **Nazarenes** is a name that people used at this time to describe believers in Jesus. Jesus himself was known as a Nazarene because he came from the town of Nazareth. See how you translated the same word in [2:22](../02/22.md), where it has that meaning. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
ACT 24 6 a547 figs-ellipsis ὃν καὶ ἐκρατήσαμεν 1 whom also we arrested— Tertullus is making the case that Paul is a criminal, but he is leaving it up to Felix to decide what Paul’s punishment should be, so he is deliberately breaking off this sentence here. If this might be unclear to your readers, you could indicate his meaning in your translation. Alternate translation: “whom we also arrested, and who deserves to be punished, but we will leave it to you to decide his punishment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-ACT 24 6 a548 translate-textvariants 1 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ACT 24 6 a548 translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this second half of this verse, all of verse 7, and the first part of verse 8 are found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but they are not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting this material in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this material if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this material may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
ACT 24 8 a549 writing-pronouns παρ’ οὗ 1 from whom The pronoun **whom** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “From him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
ACT 24 9 rq5f figs-synecdoche οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who had come to Caesarea to accuse Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 24 11 a550 figs-litotes οὐ πλείους εἰσίν μοι ἡμέραι δώδεκα, ἀφ’ ἧς 1 it is not more than 12 days for me from when Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “it was only 12 days ago that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
@@ -3259,338 +3258,351 @@ ACT 24 27 p59c figs-synecdoche τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις 1 the Jews Luke is
ACT 24 27 gln6 figs-activepassive δεδεμένον 1 bound If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “in bonds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 24 27 a566 figs-synecdoche δεδεμένον 1 bound Luke is using one thing that the Romans did to keep Paul prisoner to represent all of what they did. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
ACT 25 intro b6uk 0 # Acts 25 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Favor
This word is used in two different ways in this chapter. When the Jewish leaders asked Festus for a favor, they were asking him to do something special for them on that day. They wanted him to do for them something that he would not usually do. When Festus “wanted to gain the favor of the Jews,” he wanted them to like him and be willing to obey him in the months and years to come. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/favor]])
### Roman citizenship
The Romans thought that they needed to treat only Roman citizens justly. They could do as they desired with people who were not Roman citizens, but they had to obey the law with other Romans. Some people were born Roman citizens, and others gave money to the Roman government so they could become Roman citizens. Roman officials could have been punished for treating a Roman citizen the same way they would treat a non-citizen.
-ACT 25 1 c84u Φῆστος 1 **Festus** becomes the governor of Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 24:27](../24/27.md).
-ACT 25 1 w8h3 οὖν 1 then The word **then** marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
-ACT 25 1 i7t9 Φῆστος…ἐπιβὰς τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 Festus … having arrived in the province This could mean: (1) Festus arrived in the area to begin his rule or (2) Festus simply arrived in the area.
-ACT 25 1 zz4l ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας 1 went from Caesarea up to Jerusalem The phrase **went up** is used here because Jerusalem is higher in elevation than Caesarea.
-ACT 25 2 uj5p παρεκάλουν αὐτὸν 1 they begged him Here the word **him** refers to Festus.
-ACT 25 3 w8um χάριν κατ’ αὐτοῦ 1 a favor against him Here the word **him** refers to Paul.
-ACT 25 3 qz46 ὅπως μεταπέμψηται αὐτὸν εἰς Ἰερουσαλήμ 1 that he might summon him to Jerusalem This means that Festus would order his soldiers to bring Paul to **Jerusalem**. Alternate translation: “that he might order his soldiers to bring Paul to Jerusalem”
-ACT 25 3 pg8x ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 to kill him along the way They were going to ambush Paul on the way to Jerusalem.
-ACT 25 4 v5f9 figs-quotations Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea, and that he himself was about to go there in haste. You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “Festus said, ‘Paul is being held prisoner in Caesarea, and I myself will soon return there.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT 25 5 a54h οἱ οὖν ἐν ὑμῖν, φησίν, δυνατοὶ συνκαταβάντες 1 He said, “Therefore, the leaders among you, having come down together Alternate translation: “He said, ‘Therefore, your leaders should go to Caesarea with us and”
-ACT 25 5 iz98 εἴ τί ἐστιν ἐν τῷ ἀνδρὶ ἄτοπον 1 If there is something wrong with the man Alternate translation: “If Paul has done anything wrong”
-ACT 25 5 nei6 κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ 1 you should accuse him Alternate translation: “you should accuse him of violating laws” or “you should bring charges against him”
-ACT 25 6 fi27 διατρίψας…καταβὰς…ἐκέλευσεν…ἀχθῆναι 1 Here all occurrences of the word **he** and **him** refer to Festus.
-ACT 25 6 s69c καταβὰς εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 he went down to Caesarea Jerusalem is higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of coming **down** from Jerusalem.
-ACT 25 6 qv24 figs-metonymy καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to Festus’ ruling as judge over Paul’s trial. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat where he acted as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 25 6 j7c5 figs-activepassive τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι 1 Paul to be brought to him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “his soldiers bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 7 v4v8 παραγενομένου δὲ αὐτοῦ 1 And when he had come Alternate translation: “And when he came and stood before Festus”
-ACT 25 7 e7g2 figs-metaphor πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα καταφέροντες 1 bringing many and serious charges Charging a person with a crime is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could bring to court. Alternate translation: “they spoke against Paul many serious things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 25 8 hc3w figs-synecdoche εἰς τὸ ἱερὸν 1 against the temple Paul says he did not break any rules about who could enter the Jerusalem **temple**. Alternate translation: “against the entry rules of the temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 25 9 b49x figs-synecdoche θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 wanting to do a favor for the Jews Here, **the Jews** means the Jewish leaders. Alternate translation: “wanting to please the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 25 9 qe8h εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς 1 to go up to Jerusalem Jerusalem was higher geographically than Caesarea. It was common to speak of going **up to Jerusalem**.
-ACT 25 9 wi2d figs-activepassive ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 and to be judged there before me about these things If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “where I will judge you with regard to these charges” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 10 u1ef figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar, where it is necessary for me to be judged The **judgment seat** refers to Caesar’s authority to judge Paul. Alternate translation: “I am already being judged by Roman authority, which is the only place where I should be judged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 25 10 p78y figs-activepassive ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι, οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Roman authority is already judging me, and they are the only ones who should judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 11 el9d figs-hypo εἰ μὲν οὖν ἀδικῶ καὶ ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι, οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν; εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου, οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 Therefore, if I have done wrong and have done anything worthy of death, I do not refuse to die. But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me, no one is able to hand me over to them Paul is stating a hypothetical situation. If he were guilty, he would accept the punishment, but he knows that he is not guilty. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hypo]])
-ACT 25 11 m49r Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι 1 Connecting Statement: Paul asks to be taken before **Caesar** for judgment.
-ACT 25 11 ta55 ἄξιον θανάτου πέπραχά τι 1 have done anything worthy of death Alternate translation: “have done some wrong that deserves the death penalty”
-ACT 25 11 hxr1 εἰ δὲ οὐδέν ἐστιν ὧν οὗτοι κατηγοροῦσίν μου 1 But if there is nothing of which they can accuse me Alternate translation: “But if the charges against me are not true”
-ACT 25 11 hr23 οὐδείς με δύναται αὐτοῖς χαρίσασθαι 1 no one is able to hand me over to them This could mean: (1) Festus does not have the legal authority to hand Paul over to these false accusers or (2) Paul was saying that if he has done nothing wrong, the governor should not give into the request of the Jews.
-ACT 25 11 b1bf Καίσαρα ἐπικαλοῦμαι 1 I appeal to Caesar Alternate translation: “I ask that I go before Caesar so he himself can judge me”
-ACT 25 12 t96z μετὰ τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 with the council This is not the Sanhedrin that is referred to as **council** throughout Acts. This is a political council in the Roman government. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors”
-ACT 25 13 izu8 writing-participants Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 **King Agrippa** and **Bernice** are new people in the story. Though he ruled over only a few territories, King Agrippa is the current reigning king in Palestine. Bernice is Agrippa’s sister.(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
-ACT 25 13 q0sv translate-names Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 **Agrippa** is a man and **Bernice** is a woman. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 25 13 c3gc δὲ 1 Now This word marks the beginning of a new event in the story.
-ACT 25 13 ukd3 ἀσπασάμενοι τὸν Φῆστον 1 paid their respects to Festus Alternate translation: “to make a formal visit to greet Festus”
-ACT 25 14 ge5h 0 Connecting Statement: Festus explains Paul’s case to King Agrippa.
-ACT 25 14 x8jf figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 There is a certain man who has been left behind by Felix, a prisoner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “When Felix left office, he left a man in prison here” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 14 z7yw Φήλικος 1 Felix **Felix** was the Roman governor of the area who resided in Caesarea. See how you translated this name in [Acts 23:24](../23/24.md).
-ACT 25 15 b6hx figs-metaphor περὶ οὗ…ἐνεφάνισαν 1 brought charges concerning him To charge someone in court is spoken of as if it were an object that a person brings to court. Alternate translation: “spoke to me against this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **judgment**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “asking me to judge him” or “requesting that I judge him to be guilty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 25 16 e4tk figs-metaphor χαρίζεσθαί τινα ἄνθρωπον 1 to hand over any man Here, **hand over** represents sending someone to people who will punish or kill him. Alternate translation: “to let someone punish anyone” or “to condemn anyone to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-idiom πρὶν ἢ ὁ κατηγορούμενος, κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 before the one who is accused may have his accusers face to face Here, **have his accusers face to face** is an idiom that means to meet in person with the people who accuse him. Alternate translation: “before the person whom others have accused of a crime had met directly with those who accused him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 25 17 z6g2 οὖν 1 Therefore Fetus had just said that an accused man should be able to face his accusers and make his defense. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
-ACT 25 17 rm5z συνελθόντων…ἐνθάδε 1 when they had come together here Alternate translation: “when the Jewish leaders had come to meet with me here”
-ACT 25 17 efe2 figs-metonymy καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Here, **judgment seat** refers to Festus ruling over Paul’s trial as judge. Alternate translation: “having sat upon the seat to act as judge” or “having sat down as judge” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 25 17 hm6g figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα 1 I commanded the man to be brought in If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to bring Paul before me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 19 d1qm τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας 1 their own religion Here, **religion** means the belief system people have toward life and the supernatural.
-ACT 25 20 y9bv figs-activepassive κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων 1 and there to be judged concerning these things If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “for me to judge him there concerning these charges” or “for a judge to decide if these charges against him are true or not” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 21 ie7x figs-activepassive τοῦ δὲ Παύλου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν εἰς τὴν τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ διάγνωσιν 1 But when Paul appealed for him to be kept for the decision of the emperor If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “But when Paul insisted that he stay under Roman guard until the time when the emperor could decide his case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 21 ceq2 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν 1 I commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I ordered the soldiers to keep him in custody” or “I told the soldiers to guard him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 22 t322 writing-quotations αὔριον, φησίν, ἀκούσῃ αὐτοῦ 1 The phrase **he says** can be moved to the beginning of the sentence. Alternate translation: “Festus says, ‘I will arrange for you to listen to Paul tomorrow.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-ACT 25 23 y1yj τοῦ Ἀγρίππα καὶ τῆς Βερνίκης 1 Though he ruled over only a few territories, **Agrippa** was the current reigning king in Palestine. **Bernice** was his sister. See how you translated these names in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md).
-ACT 25 23 yw76 μετὰ πολλῆς φαντασίας 1 with much ceremony Alternate translation: “with a great ceremony to honor them”
-ACT 25 23 ldb7 τὸ ἀκροατήριον 1 the hall This **hall** was a large room where people gathered for ceremonies, trials, and other events.
-ACT 25 23 at4t figs-activepassive ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος 1 Paul was brought in If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul to appear before them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 25 24 n8qj figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 all the multitude of the Jews The word **all** is an exaggeration used to emphasize that a great number of Jews wanted Paul to die. Alternate translation: “a great number of the Jews” or “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT 25 24 yv2q figs-litotes μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 he ought not to live any longer This statement is made in the negative to emphasize the positive equivalent. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ACT 25 25 f6hy αὐτοῦ δὲ τούτου ἐπικαλεσαμένου τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 but he himself having appealed to the emperor Alternate translation: “but because he said that he wanted the emperor to judge him”
-ACT 25 25 g856 τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 to the emperor The **emperor** was the ruler of the Roman empire. He ruled over many countries and provinces.
-ACT 25 26 fe2n figs-you ὑμῶν…σοῦ 1 Here the first **you** is plural and probably refers to “King Agrippa, and all who are present with us” in [25:24](../25/24.md). The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-ACT 25 26 jcq2 προήγαγον αὐτὸν ἐφ’ ὑμῶν, καὶ μάλιστα ἐπὶ σοῦ, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα 1 I have him before you, and especially before you, King Agrippa Alternate translation: “I have brought Paul to all of you, but especially to you, King Agrippa.”
-ACT 25 26 rhy2 ὅπως…σχῶ τι γράψω 1 so that … I might have something to write Alternate translation: “so that … I will have something else to write” or “so that … I will know what I should write”
-ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable for me to send a prisoner and to not state If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **unreasonable … not** in positive form. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me that if I send a prisoner then I should also state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT 25 27 xm65 τὰς κατ’ αὐτοῦ αἰτίας 1 the charges against him This could mean: (1) the accusations that the Jewish leaders have brought against him or (2) the charges under Roman law that apply to Paul’s case.
+ACT 25 1 w8h3 writing-newevent οὖν 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+ACT 25 1 a567 figs-synecdoche ἐπιβὰς 1 having set foot Luke is using one part of Festus, his **foot**, to represent all of himself in the act of arriving in Judea. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having arrived” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 25 1 a568 figs-explicit τῇ ἐπαρχείᾳ 1 in the province By **the province**, Luke implicitly means the province of Judea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in Judea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 25 1 zz4l figs-idiom ἀνέβη εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀπὸ Καισαρείας 1 went up from Caesarea to Jerusalem Luke says that Festus **went up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 25 2 a569 figs-nominaladj οἱ πρῶτοι τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the first of the Jews Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “the most prominent of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 25 3 w8um writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν…αὐτὸν 1 him…him…him The pronoun **him** refers to Paul in each of these instances. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him … Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 25 3 pg8x figs-explicit ἐνέδραν ποιοῦντες ἀνελεῖν αὐτὸν κατὰ τὴν ὁδόν 1 making an ambush to kill him along the way It was the Jewish leaders who were secretly **making an ambush**. This was not part of what they were **requesting** Festus to do. It may be helpful to clarify thisyou’re your readers, and it may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “But the Jewish leaders were secretly preparing an ambush to kill Paul along the way” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 25 4 v5f9 figs-quotations ὁ…Φῆστος ἀπεκρίθη, τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον εἰς Καισάρειαν, ἑαυτὸν δὲ μέλλειν ἐν τάχει ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 Festus answered that Paul was being held at Caesarea but that he himself was about to depart soon It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “Festus answered, ‘Paul is being held at Caesarea but I myself am about to depart soon’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT 25 4 a570 figs-activepassive τηρεῖσθαι τὸν Παῦλον 1 Paul was being held If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he was holding Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 4 a571 figs-explicit ἐκπορεύεσθαι 1 to depart Festus means implicitly that he is **about to depart** from Jerusalem and travel to Caesarea. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “to depart Jerusalem for Caesarea” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 25 5 a54h figs-nominaladj οἱ…ἐν ὑμῖν…δυνατοὶ 1 the powerful among you Festus is using the adjective **powerful** as a noun to mean a certain group of people. In this context, **powerful** means having the legal power to represent the Jewish nation. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “those of you who have legal standing in this matter” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 25 5 a572 figs-idiom συνκαταβάντες 1 having come down together As the General Notes to this chapter discuss, here Festus says **come down** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling from Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 25 5 nei6 figs-imperative3p κατηγορείτωσαν αὐτοῦ 1 let them accuse him If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may they accuse him” or “they should accuse him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+ACT 25 6 a573 figs-litotes ἡμέρας, οὐ πλείους ὀκτὼ ἢ δέκα 1 not more than eight or ten days Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “less than eight or ten days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT 25 6 qv24 translate-symaction καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 25 6 j7c5 figs-activepassive τὸν Παῦλον ἀχθῆναι 1 Paul to be brought to him If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “his soldiers to bring Paul to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 7 v4v8 writing-pronouns αὐτοῦ…αὐτὸν 1 he…him The pronouns **he** and **him** refer to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul … him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 25 7 e7g2 πολλὰ καὶ βαρέα αἰτιώματα 1 many and serious charges It may be more natural in your language not to use the word **and** between these adjectives. Alternate translation: “many serious charges” or “many charges that were all serious”
+ACT 25 8 a574 figs-synecdoche εἰς Καίσαρά 1 against Caesar Paul is using the leader of the Roman government to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “against the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 25 9 b49x figs-synecdoche θέλων τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 wanting to do a favor for the Jews Luke is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders who were opposing Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 25 9 a575 figs-metaphor τοῖς Ἰουδαίοις χάριν καταθέσθαι 1 to lay down a favor for the Jews Luke is speaking as if the Festus wanted to **lay down** a favor physically for the Jewish leaders, as if they would pick it up and leave something else for him in its place. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to do a favor for the Jewish leaders that they would later return” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 25 9 a560 figs-hendiadys ἀποκριθεὶς τῷ Παύλῳ εἶπεν 1 answering Paul, said Together the words **answering** and **said** mean that Festus responded to the Paul. Alternate translation: “Festus responded to Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT 25 9 qe8h figs-idiom εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα ἀναβὰς 1 having gone up to Jerusalem Festus says **gone up** because that was the customary way of speaking about traveling to Jerusalem, since that city is up on a mountain. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a higher elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 25 9 wi2d figs-activepassive εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα…ἐκεῖ περὶ τούτων κριθῆναι ἐπ’ ἐμοῦ 1 to Jerusalem, to be judged there before me about these things If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “to Jerusalem and have me judge you there about these things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 10 u1ef figs-metonymy ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar Paul is referring to Caesar’s authority to judge him by association with the **judgment seat** where Caesar sat when he judged cases. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 25 10 a576 figs-synecdoche ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος Καίσαρος ἑστώς εἰμι 1 I stand before the judgment seat of Caesar Paul is using **Caesar**, the leader of the Roman government, to represent that entire government. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I am being judged by the Roman government” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 25 10 p78y figs-activepassive οὗ με δεῖ κρίνεσθαι 1 where it is necessary for me to be judged If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “where it is necessary for someone to judge me”; or, if you translated the previous phrase as “I am being judged by the Roman government”: “which is the authority that ought to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 11 a561 figs-doublenegatives οὐ παραιτοῦμαι τὸ ἀποθανεῖν 1 I do not refuse to die If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative verb **refuse**. Alternate translation: “I am willing to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 25 12 t96z figs-explicit τοῦ συμβουλίου 1 the council Luke assumes that his readers will understand that by **council** here, he does not mean the Jewish Sanhedrin. He means the group of officials who advised Festus. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with his own government advisors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 25 12 a577 figs-declarative ἐπὶ Καίσαρα πορεύσῃ 1 to Caesar you will go Festus is using a future statement to give a ruling in Paul’s case. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a more natural form for giving a ruling. Alternate translation: “I grant your appeal and I am going to send you to Caesar for judgment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-declarative]])
+ACT 25 13 c3gc writing-newevent δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+ACT 25 13 q0sv translate-names Ἀγρίππας ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ Βερνίκη 1 King Agrippa and Bernice The word **Agrippa** is the name of a man. He ruled a few territories in the area where Festus was the Roman governor. The word **Bernice** is the name a woman. She was the sister of King Agrippa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 25 13 a578 figs-idiom κατήντησαν εἰς Καισάρειαν 1 having come down to Caesarea Luke speaks of Agrippa and Bernice **having come down** to Caesarea because that city is lower in elevation than Jerusalem, where they lived. Use a natural way in your language of referring to traveling to a lower elevation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 25 14 x8jf figs-activepassive ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 A certain man has been left a prisoner by Felix If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Felix has left a certain man a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 14 a579 writing-participants ἀνήρ τὶς ἐστιν καταλελειμμένος ὑπὸ Φήλικος δέσμιος 1 A certain man has been left a prisoner by Felix Festus is using the phrase **A certain man** to introduce **Paul** to Agrippa and Bernice. If your language has its own way of introducing people and their stories, you can use it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “There is a man named Paul whom Felix left as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT 25 15 hyp5 figs-abstractnouns αἰτούμενοι κατ’ αὐτοῦ καταδίκην 1 requesting a judgment against him If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **judgment**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “requesting that I judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 25 16 a562 figs-activepassive ὁ κατηγορούμενος 1 the one being accused If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the one against whom people are making accusations” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 16 xjb4 figs-metonymy κατὰ πρόσωπον ἔχοι τοὺς κατηγόρους 1 may have his accusers by face Here, the word **face** represents the presence of a person by association with the way people can see the face of someone who is present. Your language may have a similar expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “may meet face to face with the accusers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 25 17 rm5z writing-pronouns συνελθόντων 1 when they had come together The pronoun **they** refers to the chief priests and the elders of the Jews, whom Festus mentioned in verse 15. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “when the chief priests and the elders of the Jews had come together” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 25 17 efe2 translate-symaction καθίσας ἐπὶ τοῦ βήματος 1 having sat in the judgment seat Festus **sat in the judgment seat** as a symbolic action to show that he was ready to act as the judge in the case against Paul. If this would not be clear to your readers, you can explain the significance of this action. Alternate translation: “having sat in the judgment seat to show that I was ready to act as the judge in this case” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 25 17 hm6g figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα ἀχθῆναι τὸν ἄνδρα 1 I commanded the man to be brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I commanded soldiers to bring the man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 19 d1qm figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἰδίας δεισιδαιμονίας 1 their own religion If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **religion**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “their religious beliefs” or “their beliefs about God and spiritual things” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 25 20 a564 figs-quotations ἔλεγον εἰ βούλοιτο πορεύεσθαι εἰς Ἱεροσόλυμα, κἀκεῖ κρίνεσθαι περὶ τούτων 1 asked if he might be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “asked, ‘Might you be willing to go to Jerusalem and be judged there about these things?’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT 25 20 y9bv figs-activepassive κρίνεσθαι 1 and be judged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and have me judge him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 21 ie7x figs-activepassive ἐπικαλεσαμένου τηρηθῆναι αὐτὸν 1 appealed that he be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “asked that I keep him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 21 a570 writing-politeness τοῦ Σεβαστοῦ 1 of the August one Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “of His Majesty The Empeor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 25 21 ceq2 figs-activepassive ἐκέλευσα τηρεῖσθαι αὐτὸν 1 I commanded him to be kept If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I commanded the guards to keep him in custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 22 a565 figs-rpronouns ἐβουλόμην καὶ αὐτὸς τοῦ ἀνθρώπου ἀκοῦσαι 1 I myself was also wanting to hear this man Agrippa is using the reflexive pronoun **myself** for emphasis. It may be more natural in your language to express this emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “I too would certainly want to hear this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rpronouns]])
+ACT 25 22 a566 φησίν 1 he says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. It may be helpful to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “he said”
+ACT 25 23 at4t figs-activepassive ἤχθη ὁ Παῦλος 1 Paul was brought If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the soldiers brought Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 25 24 a567 figs-gendernotations πάντες οἱ…ἄνδρες 1 all the men Although the term **men** is masculine, Festus is using the word in a generic sense that includes both men and women. (It is clear that women as well as men are **present**, since Luke notes in verse 23 that Bernice entered with Agrippa.) If it would be helpful to your readers, you could use a term in your language that is clearly inclusive of both men and women. Alternate translation: “all of you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
+ACT 25 24 a571 figs-exclusive ἡμῖν 1 with us By **us**, Festus means himself and King Agrippa but not the rest of the crowd to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 25 24 n8qj figs-hyperbole ἅπαν τὸ πλῆθος τῶν Ἰουδαίων ἐνέτυχόν μοι 1 the whole multitude of the Jews petitioned me Festus says **the whole** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the multitude of the Jews petitioned me urgently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 25 24 a568 figs-quotations βοῶντες μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 shouting that he ought not to live any longer It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “shouting, ‘He ought not to live any longer!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT 25 24 yv2q figs-doublenegatives μὴ δεῖν αὐτὸν ζῆν μηκέτι 1 he ought not to live any longer In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “he ought not to live no longer.” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “he should die immediately” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 25 25 g856 writing-politeness τὸν Σεβαστὸν 1 to the August one Festus is referring to the Roman emperor by a respectful title. Your language and culture may have a similar title that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to His Majesty The Empeor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 25 26 a569 writing-politeness τῷ κυρίῳ 1 to the lord Festus is referring to the emperor by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “to our lord the emperor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 25 26 fe2n figs-yousingular ὑμῶν…σοῦ 1 of you…you Here the first instance of **you** is plural and refers to everyone assembled in the hall. The second **you** is singular and is directed only to Agrippa. Use the plural and singular forms in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT 25 27 txs6 figs-doublenegatives ἄλογον…μοι δοκεῖ πέμποντα δέσμιον, μὴ καὶ…σημᾶναι 1 it seems unreasonable to me, sending a prisoner and not to state If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **unreasonable**. Alternate translation: “it seems reasonable to me, sending a prisoner, that I should state” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
ACT 26 intro e2q6 0 # Acts 26 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This is the third account of Paul’s conversion in the book of Acts. Because this is such an important event in the early church, there are three accounts of Paul’s conversion. (See: [Acts 9](../09/01.md) and [Acts 22](../22/01.md))
Paul told the King Agrippa why he had done what he had done and that the governor should not punish him for that.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Light and darkness
The Bible often speaks of unrighteous people, people who do not do what pleases God, as if they were walking around in darkness. It speaks of light as if it were what enables those sinful people to become righteous, to understand what they are doing wrong and begin to obey God. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
-ACT 26 1 b34d 0 Connecting Statement: Festus has brought Paul before King Agrippa. In verse 2, Paul gives his defense to King Agrippa.
-ACT 26 1 gz9f Ἀγρίππας 1 Agrippa **Agrippa** was the current reigning king in Palestine, though he ruled over only a few territories. See how you translated this name in [Acts 25:13](../25/13.md).
-ACT 26 1 wme6 ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 having stretched out his hand Alternate translation: “holding out his hand” or “gesturing with his hand”
-ACT 26 1 vni8 figs-abstractnouns ἀπελογεῖτο 1 made his defense If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **defense**, you could express the same idea with a verb. Alternate translation: “began to defend himself against those who were accusing him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 26 2 ha47 ἥγημαι ἐμαυτὸν μακάριον 1 I consider myself blessed Paul said he was **blessed** because he considered his appearance before Agrippa to be an opportunity to speak about the gospel.
-ACT 26 2 xhz1 ἀπολογεῖσθαι 1 to make my defense Alternate translation: “to defend myself” or “to explain why I am innocent of these charges”
-ACT 26 2 mdq2 figs-activepassive περὶ πάντων ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 Concerning all the things of which I am accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “About the crimes that the Jews are saying that I committed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 26 2 cbr3 figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 26 3 kns2 figs-explicit ζητημάτων 1 their controversies You can make explicit what kinds of **controversies** Paul is speaking about. Alternate translation: “questions about religious matters” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 26 4 t8bg figs-hyperbole πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 all the Jews This is a generalization. This could mean: (1) this refers to Jews in general who knew about Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jews” or (2) this refers to Pharisees who knew Paul. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
-ACT 26 4 x96h ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου 1 among my nation This could mean: (1) among his own people, not necessarily in the geographical land of Israel or (2) in the land of Israel.
-ACT 26 5 y9a1 τὴν ἀκριβεστάτην αἵρεσιν τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας 1 the strictest sect of our religion Alternate translation: “a group within Judaism who live by very strict rules”
-ACT 26 6 s9kr νῦν 1 Now The word **Now** marks a shift from Paul discussing his past to talking about himself in the present.
-ACT 26 6 i9y5 figs-activepassive ἕστηκα κρινόμενος 1 I stand here being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am here, where they are putting me on trial” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 26 6 r42g figs-metaphor ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 because of my hope of the promise that was made to our fathers by God This speaks about a **promise** as if it were something a person could look for and see. Alternate translation: “because I am waiting expectantly for God to do what he promised our forefathers he would do” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 7 hnf1 figs-metonymy εἰς ἣν τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι 1 to which our 12 tribes hope to attain The phrase **our 12 tribes** stands for the people in those tribes. Alternate translation: “which is also what our fellow Jews in the 12 tribes are waiting for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 26 7 apf2 figs-metaphor εἰς ἣν…ἐλπίζει καταντῆσαι 1 to which … hope to attain This speaks about a promise as if it were a destination that can be reached. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 7 kzg4 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν λατρεῦον 1 serving night and day The extremes **night** and **day** mean they “worshiped God continually.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-ACT 26 7 c4lm figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “by the leaders of the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul uses a question to challenge the Jews present. They believe God can raise **the dead** but do not think God brought Jesus back to life. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “None of you think it is unbelievable that God raises the dead.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 26 8 ukk6 νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 raises the dead Here to raise up is an idiom for causing someone who has died to become alive again. Alternate translation: “makes dead people come alive again”
-ACT 26 9 hm33 μὲν οὖν 1 Then Paul uses the word **Then** to mark another shift in his defense. He is now beginning to describe how he formerly persecuted Jesus’ people.
-ACT 26 9 r4df figs-metonymy πρὸς τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ…ἐναντία 1 opposed to the name of Jesus The word **name** here stands for the teaching about the person. Alternate translation: “to stop people from teaching about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 26 10 nys7 figs-activepassive ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν, κατήνεγκα ψῆφον 1 when they were being put to death, I cast my vote against them If your language does not use this passive form, you can state the phrase **were being put to death** in active form. Alternate translation: “I voted in agreement with the other Jewish leaders to condemn the believers to die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 26 11 rri6 πολλάκις τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 often punishing them This could mean: (1) Paul punished some believers many times or (2) Paul punished many different believers.
-ACT 26 12 us8d ἐν οἷς 1 While doing this Paul uses this phrase to mark another shift in his defense. He is now telling about when he saw Jesus and became his disciple.
-ACT 26 12 h3ic ἐν οἷς 1 While The word **While** is used to mark two events that are happening at the same time. In this case, Paul went to Damascus during the time when he persecuted Christians.
-ACT 26 12 ajp6 μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς 1 with authority and a commission Paul had written letters from the Jewish leaders, granting him authority to persecute the Jewish believers.
-ACT 26 14 sip5 figs-metonymy ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με 1 I heard a voice speaking to me Here, **voice** stands for the person speaking. Alternate translation: “I heard someone speaking to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 26 14 du3t Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? 1 Saul, Saul, why do you persecute me? This is a rhetorical question. The speaker is alerting Saul to what Saul is doing to him, and implying that Saul should not do that. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Saul, Saul, you are persecuting me.” or “Saul, Saul, stop persecuting me.” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion)
-ACT 26 14 zsi2 figs-metaphor σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 It is hard for you to kick against a goad For Paul to resist Jesus and to persecute believers is spoken of as if he were an ox kicking at the sharp stick that a person uses to prod (or **goad**) the animal. It means that Paul is only harming himself. Alternate translation: “You will only harm yourself like an ox kicking a goad” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 18 fk1k figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν 1 to open their eyes Helping people to understand the truth is spoken of as if a person were literally helping someone **to open their eyes**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 18 gw8f figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 to turn from darkness to light Helping someone to stop doing what is evil and to start trusting and obeying God is spoken of as if the person is literally leading someone out of a dark place into a place of **light**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 18 q3h8 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ…τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn from … from the power of Satan to God Helping someone to stop obeying **Satan** and to start obeying God is spoken of as if a person were literally turning a person and taking them from the place where Satan rules and leading him to the place where God rules. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 1 a573 figs-activepassive ἐπιτρέπεταί σοι 1 it is permitted to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I permit you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 1 wme6 translate-symaction ἐκτείνας τὴν χεῖρα 1 stretching out {his} hand This could mean: (1) that Paul waved his hand to get the attention of the audience and signal that he was about to speak. Alternate translation: “waving his hand to signal that he was about to speak” (2) that as Paul spoke, he used hand gestures to emphasize the points he was making. Alternate translation: “gesturing with his hand as he spoke” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 26 2 mdq2 figs-activepassive ὧν ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 of which I am accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the Jews accuse me of doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 2 cbr3 figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “many of the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 26 3 kns2 figs-hyperbole πάντων τῶν κατὰ Ἰουδαίους, ἐθῶν τε καὶ ζητημάτων 1 in all the customs and controversies among the Jews Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in a wide range of customs and controversies among the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 26 4 t8bg figs-hyperbole ἴσασι πάντες οἱ Ἰουδαῖοι 1 all the Jews know Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “the Jews know very well” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 26 4 x96h figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ ἔθνει μου ἔν τε Ἱεροσολύμοις 1 in my nation and in Jerusalem By **nation**, Paul most likely means by association the people of his nation, that is, the Jews. Alternate translation: “among the Jews in the city of Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 26 5 y9a1 figs-exclusive τῆς ἡμετέρας θρησκείας 1 of our religion By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 26 6 s9kr writing-newevent νῦν 1 Now Paul is using the word translated **Now** to introduce a new phase of his defense. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that would be natural for this purpose. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+ACT 26 6 i9y5 figs-activepassive ἕστηκα κρινόμενος 1 I stand here being judged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “and you are judging me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 6 r42g figs-abstractnouns ἐπ’ ἐλπίδι τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 because of hope of the promise made to our fathers by God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because I hope in the promise made to our fathers by God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 26 6 a574 figs-activepassive τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of the promise made to our fathers by God If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “of the promise that God made to our fathers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 6 a575 figs-extrainfo τῆς εἰς τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν ἐπαγγελίας, γενομένης ὑπὸ τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 of the promise made to our fathers by God Since Paul explains in verse 8 that the **promise** for which he has **hope** is the resurrection from the dead, you do not need to explain what Paul means further here. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-extrainfo]])
+ACT 26 6 a576 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 6 a577 figs-exclusive τοὺς πατέρας ἡμῶν 1 our fathers By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 26 7 hnf1 figs-metonymy τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν 1 our 12 tribes Paul is referring to the people of Israel by association with the way that nation was historically composed of 12 tribes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “our Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 26 7 a578 figs-exclusive τὸ δωδεκάφυλον ἡμῶν 1 our 12 tribes By **our**, Paul means himself and his fellow Jews but not Agrippa to whom he is speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 26 7 a579 figs-abstractnouns ἐν ἐκτενείᾳ…λατρεῦον 1 serving in earnestness If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **earnestness**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “serving earnestly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 26 7 kzg4 figs-merism νύκτα καὶ ἡμέραν 1 night and day Paul is using the two parts of a full day, **night** and **day**, to refer to continuous activity throughout the day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “continually” or, if you translated **serving in earnestness** as “serving earnestly”: “and continually” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+ACT 26 7 a580 figs-activepassive ἐνκαλοῦμαι ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 I am being accused by the Jews If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jews are accusing me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 7 c4lm figs-synecdoche ὑπὸ Ἰουδαίων 1 by the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “by these Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 26 8 de83 figs-rquestion τί ἄπιστον κρίνεται παρ’ ὑμῖν, εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει? 1 Why is it judged unbelievable among you that God raises the dead? Paul is using the question form to challenge the Jewish leaders who are accusing him. Many of them are Pharisees who believe that God does raise the dead, and yet they do not believe that God raised Jesus from the dead. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. Alternate translation: “By accusing me, you are acting as if you do not believe that God raises the dead!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT 26 8 a581 figs-yousingular παρ’ ὑμῖν 1 among you While to this point Paul has used the word **you** in the singular to refer to Agrippa, here he uses it in the plural to refer to the Jewish leaders who are present. So use the plural form in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-yousingular]])
+ACT 26 8 a599 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ ὁ Θεὸς νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 if God raises the dead Paul is speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility, but he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. Alternate translation: “that God raises the dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ACT 26 8 ukk6 figs-idiom νεκροὺς ἐγείρει 1 raises the dead Here, **raises the dead** is an idiom that refers to making someone who has died alive again. Alternate translation: “God makes the dead alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 26 8 a582 figs-nominaladj νεκροὺς 1 the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 26 9 r4df figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομα Ἰησοῦ 1 the name of Jesus While in such contexts the word **name** often represents the person who has that name, Paul is describing a time when he did not believe that Jesus was still alive. So here the word **name** seems to represent the reputation and influence of Jesus. Alternate translation: “the reputation and influence of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 26 10 a581 figs-metonymy τῶν ἁγίων 1 of the saints Paul is using the term **saints** by association to mean believers in Jesus. See how you translated the term in [9:33](../09/33.md). Alternate translation: “of the believers in Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 26 10 a582 figs-synecdoche ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν 1 when they were being executed Paul is using one part of the process of putting someone on trial for a capital offense and punishing that person if he is found guilty to represent the entire process. Since he speaks of casting his **vote** in favor of execution, here he means specifically the trial part of the process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “when they were being put on trial for crimes with a penalty of death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 26 10 nys7 figs-activepassive ἀναιρουμένων…αὐτῶν 1 when they were being executed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the Sanhedrin was considering whether to execute them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 10 a584 figs-explicit κατήνεγκα ψῆφον 1 I cast my vote against them The implication is that Paul **cast his vote** as a member of the Sanhedrin. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “I cast my vote against them as a member of the Sanhedrin” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 26 11 a584 figs-hyperbole κατὰ πάσας τὰς συναγωγὰς…τιμωρῶν αὐτοὺς 1 punishing them in all the synagogues Paul says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “going from one synagogue to another to punish them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 26 12 ajp6 figs-hendiadys μετ’ ἐξουσίας καὶ ἐπιτροπῆς 1 with authority and a commission This phrase expresses a single idea by using two words connected with **and**. The word **authority** tells what kind of **commission** the **chief priests** gave Paul. If it would be more natural in your language, you could express this meaning with an equivalent phrase that does not use “and.” Alternate translation: “with an authoritative commission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
+ACT 26 14 a585 figs-quotesinquotes ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με τῇ Ἑβραΐδι διαλέκτῳ, Σαοὺλ, Σαούλ, τί με διώκεις? σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, ‘Saul, Saul, why are you persecuting me? It is hard for you to kick against a goad.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “I heard a voice speaking to me in the Hebrew language, calling me twice by name, asking me why I was persecuting it, and telling me it was hard for me to kick against a goad.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 26 14 sip5 figs-personification ἤκουσα φωνὴν, λέγουσαν πρός με 1 I heard a voice speaking to me Paul is speaking of this **voice** as if it were a living thing that could speak on its own. Alternate translation: “I heard someone saying to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 26 14 du3t figs-rquestion τί με διώκεις? 1 why are you persecuting me? The voice is using the question form to rebuke Saul. If you would not use a rhetorical question for this purpose in your language, you could translate its words as a statement or an exclamation and communicate the rebuke in another way. Alternate translation: “you should not be persecuting me!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT 26 14 zsi2 figs-metaphor σκληρόν σοι πρὸς κέντρα λακτίζειν 1 It is hard for you to kick against a goad The voice is speaking as if Paul were literally kicking against a **goad**, that is, a sharp object that people use to prod an animal. The voice means that by opposing Jesus and persecuting believers, Paul is hurting himself. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You are hurting yourself by what you are doing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 15 a586 figs-quotesinquotes ἐγὼ δὲ εἶπα, τίς εἶ, κύριε? ὁ δὲ Κύριος εἶπεν, ἐγώ εἰμι Ἰησοῦς, ὃν σὺ διώκεις 1 And I said, ‘Who are you, Lord?’ And the Lord said, ‘I am Jesus, whom you are persecuting If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “And I asked the Lord who he was, and the Lord said that he was Jesus, whom I was persecuting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 26 15 a587 writing-politeness τίς εἶ, κύριε 1 Who are you, Lord When Paul replied to the voice, he was not yet acknowledging that Jesus was **Lord**. He used that respectful title because he recognized that he was speaking to someone of divine power. If this might be confusing for your readers, in your translation you could use a similar term of respect. Alternate translation: “Who are you, Sir” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 26 15 a588 writing-politeness ὁ…Κύριος εἶπεν 1 the Lord said In this case Paul is referring to Jesus by a respectful title. Use a form for addressing someone respectfully in your language. Alternate translation: “the Lord Jesus said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 26 16 a589 figs-quotesinquotes ἀλλὰ ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου; εἰς τοῦτο γὰρ ὤφθην σοι, προχειρίσασθαί σε ὑπηρέτην καὶ μάρτυρα, ὧν τε εἶδές με ὧν τε ὀφθήσομαί σοι 1 But get up and stand on your feet, because for this I have appeared to you, to appoint you a servant and a witness both of the things in which you have seen me and of the things in which I will be shown to you If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “He told me to get up and stand on my feet, because for this he had appeared to me, to appoint me a servant and a witness both of the things in which I had seen him and of the things in which he would be shown to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 26 16 a590 figs-explicitinfo ἀνάστηθι, καὶ στῆθι ἐπὶ τοὺς πόδας σου 1 get up and stand on your feet It might seem that the expression **get up and stand on your feet** contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten it. Alternate translation: “stand up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT 26 16 a591 figs-activepassive ὀφθήσομαί σοι 1 I will be shown to you If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “I will show myself to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 17 a592 figs-quotesinquotes ἐξαιρούμενός σε ἐκ τοῦ λαοῦ καὶ ἐκ τῶν ἐθνῶν, εἰς οὓς ἐγὼ ἀποστέλλω σε, 1 rescuing you from the people and from the Gentiles, to whom I am sending you, If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “He told me that he would rescue me from the peoples and from the Gentiles, to whom he was sending me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 26 17 a593 figs-explicit τοῦ λαοῦ 1 the people By **the people**, Jesus means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 26 18 a594 figs-quotesinquotes ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς, καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν, τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ κλῆρον ἐν τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in me.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. Alternate translation: “to open their eyes to turn from darkness to light and from the authority of Satan to God, for them to receive forgiveness of sins and an inheritance among the ones having been sanctified by faith in him.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 26 18 fk1k figs-metaphor ἀνοῖξαι ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν, τοῦ ἐπιστρέψαι 1 to open their eyes to turn Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to understand the truth about him as if Paul would literally **open** the **eyes** of these people. Alternate translation: “to help them understand the truth about me so that they will turn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 18 gw8f figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψαι ἀπὸ σκότους εἰς φῶς 1 to turn from darkness to light Jesus is speaking of Paul helping people to stop doing what is wrong and to start obeying God as if the Paul would be literally helping these people stop directing their attention to **darkness** and start directing it to **light**. Alternate translation: “so that they will stop doing what is wrong and start obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 18 q3h8 figs-explicit καὶ τῆς ἐξουσίας τοῦ Σατανᾶ ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 and from the authority of Satan to God By **authority**, Jesus implicitly means the control that **Satan** has over people who are under his authority. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “and no longer have Satan control them but have God control them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
ACT 26 18 m65i figs-abstractnouns τοῦ λαβεῖν αὐτοὺς ἄφεσιν ἁμαρτιῶν καὶ 1 for them to receive forgiveness of sins and If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **forgiveness**, you could express the same idea with the verb “forgive.” Alternate translation: “so that God may forgive their sins and give them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον 1 an inheritance The blessings that Jesus gives to those who believe in him are spoken of as if they were **an inheritance** that children receive from their father. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-metaphor τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 those who have been sanctified by faith that is in me Jesus choosing some people to belong to him is spoken of as if he set them apart from other people. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 18 bgc5 πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 by faith that is in me Here Paul finishes quoting the Lord. Alternate translation: “because they believe in me”
-ACT 26 19 ljx2 ὅθεν 1 Therefore Paul had just explained what the Lord had commanded him in his vision. Alternate translation: “Because what I have just said is true”
-ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 I did not disobedient to the heavenly vision If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **not disobedient** in positive form. Alternate translation: “I obeyed the heavenly vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision This refers to what the person in the **vision** told Paul. Alternate translation: “to what the person from heaven told me in the vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 to turn to God To start trusting God is spoken of as if a person turns to start walking toward God. Alternate translation: “to trust in God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repented.” Alternate translation: “and start doing good deeds to show they truly have repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 26 21 tl6t figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “some Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 26 22 t8f4 μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ 1 to both small and great Here, **small** and **great** are used together to mean “all people.” Alternate translation: “to all people, whether common or great” (See: rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism)
-ACT 26 22 f6py οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς…ὧν 1 nothing other than what You can state this in positive form. Alternate translation: “the same thing that”
-ACT 26 22 i9ki ὧν τε οἱ προφῆται 1 what both the prophets Paul is referring to the collective writings of the Old Testament **prophets**.
-ACT 26 23 pe9h figs-explicit εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός 1 that the Christ is to suffer You can make explicit that Christ must also die. Alternate translation: “that the Christ must suffer and die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 26 23 p9t8 ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 from the resurrection Alternate translation: “to be brought back to life”
-ACT 26 23 sc5f νεκρῶν 1 of the dead The phrase **the dead** refers to the spirits of people who have died. To rise from among them speaks of becoming alive again.
-ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 is going to proclaim light To tell people about how God saves people is spoken of as if a person were speaking about the **light**. Alternate translation: “he would proclaim the message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 24 dvn2 μαίνῃ 1 you are insane Alternate translation: “you are speaking nonsense” or “you are crazy”
-ACT 26 24 tk27 τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 your great learning is turning you to insanity Alternate translation: “you have learned so much that it is now making you crazy”
-ACT 26 25 dur9 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι…ἀλλὰ 1 I am not insane … but If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **not insane** in positive form. Alternate translation: “I am sane … and” or “I am able to think well … and” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT 26 25 a6pb κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 most excellent Festus Alternate translation: “Festus, who deserves highest honors”
-ACT 26 26 ed7y figs-123person ὁ βασιλεύς, πρὸς ὃν…αὐτὸν 1 the king … to him … from him Paul is still speaking to King Agrippa, but he is referring to him in the third person. Alternate translation: “you … to you … from you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
-ACT 26 26 cs7b παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 I am speaking boldly Paul was not afraid to speak to the king about Christ. Alternate translation: “I speak with confidence”
-ACT 26 26 svn9 figs-activepassive πείθομαι 1 I am persuaded that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I am sure that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ…οὐθέν; οὐ γάρ ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 Paul uses two negative phrases to emphasize that the events of Jesus’ life were well-known. Alternate translation: “he is well-aware of these things, because they were done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-activepassive λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ 1 that none of this are hidden from him If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he is aware of this” or “you are aware of this” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 2 this was not done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this has not happened in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner This means doing something in secret as if a person went and did something **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. Alternate translation: “in a dark place” or “in secret” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to remind **Agrippa** that Agrippa already believes what **the prophets** said about Jesus. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You already believe what the Jewish prophets said, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In a short time, are you persuading me to become a Christian? Agrippa asks this question to show Paul that he cannot convince Agrippa so easily without more proof. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “Surely you do not think you can convince me so easily to believe in Jesus!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-metonymy παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 but without these chains Here, **these chains** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “but, of course, I do no want you to be a prisoner like I am” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 26 30 k7jh ἥ…Βερνίκη 1 **Bernice** was the sister of King Agrippa ([Acts 25:13](../25/13.md)).
-ACT 26 30 u8vl ἀνέστη τε ὁ βασιλεὺς καὶ ὁ ἡγεμὼν 1 And then the king got up, and the governor Alternate translation: “And then King Agrippa stood up, and Governor Festus”
-ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-abstractnouns οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **death**, you can express the same idea with the verb “die.” Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 26 31 dwyb figs-metonymy οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 Here, **chains** stands for being in prison. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to die or to be in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 26 32 n293 figs-activepassive ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man was able to have been released If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “This man could have gone free” or “I could have freed this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 18 m9ve figs-metaphor κλῆρον ἐν 1 an inheritance among Jesus is speaking the blessings that he gives to those who believe in him as if they were an **inheritance** such as children receive from their parents.. Alternate translation: “the blessings that I give to” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 18 c5ij figs-activepassive τοῖς ἡγιασμένοις πίστει τῇ εἰς ἐμέ 1 the ones having been sanctified by faith in me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the ones whom I sanctify because they have faith in me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 19 zv2u figs-doublenegatives οὐκ ἐγενόμην ἀπειθὴς 1 I was not disobedient If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **disobedient**. Alternate translation: “I was obedient” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 26 19 sn4h figs-metonymy τῇ οὐρανίῳ ὀπτασίᾳ 1 to the heavenly vision Paul is referring to Jesus by association with the way Jesus spoke to him in this **vision**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to Jesus, who spoke to me from heaven in this vision” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 26 20 fei4 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέφειν ἐπὶ τὸν Θεόν 1 turn to God Paul is speaking as if he declared that people should physically **turn** to God. He means that he proclaimed they should stop living in one way and begin to live in another way. Alternate translation: “start obeying God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 20 h1v2 figs-abstractnouns ἄξια τῆς μετανοίας ἔργα πράσσοντας 1 doing deeds worthy of repentance If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **repentance**, you could express the same idea with the verb “repent.” Alternate translation: “doing deeds that showed that they had truly repented” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 26 21 tl6t figs-synecdoche Ἰουδαῖοι 1 the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jews who opposed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 26 22 t8f4 figs-merism μικρῷ τε καὶ μεγάλῳ 1 to both small and great Paul is referring to people of every kind by naming two extremes. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to people of every kind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+ACT 26 22 f6py grammar-connect-exceptions οὐδὲν ἐκτὸς…ὧν 1 nothing except the things If it would appear in your language that Paul was contradicting himself by saying that he spoke **nothing** and then describing what he spoke, you could reword this to avoid using an exception clause. Alternate translation: “the same things that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-exceptions]])
+ACT 26 23 pe9h figs-explicit εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim Paul could be saying that this is what Moses and the prophets said about the Messiah. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “They addressed the question as to whether the Christ would be a sufferer, as to whether he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim” or see next note for another possibility. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 26 23 a597 grammar-connect-condition-fact εἰ παθητὸς ὁ Χριστός; εἰ πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν, φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 if the Christ would be a sufferer, if he, the first from the resurrection of the dead, was going to proclaim Paul could be speaking as if what he is saying is a hypothetical possibility even though he believes that it is actually true. If your language does not state something as a condition if the speaker believes that it is true, then you can translate these words as an affirmative statement. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “Now since the Christ was a sufferer, since he was the first from the resurrection of the dead, then he was going to proclaim” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-connect-condition-fact]])
+ACT 26 23 p9t8 figs-abstractnouns πρῶτος ἐξ ἀναστάσεως νεκρῶν 1 the first from the resurrection of the dead If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **resurrection**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “the first person whom God made alive again after he died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 26 23 sc5f figs-nominaladj νεκρῶν 1 of the dead Paul is using the adjective **dead** as a noun to mean people who have died. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of people who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 26 23 z2ms figs-metaphor φῶς μέλλει καταγγέλλειν 1 was going to proclaim light Paul is saying that the truth that Jesus proclaimed about God was like a **light** that allowed people to see. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “was going to proclaim the truth about God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 23 a595 figs-explicit τῷ…λαῷ 1 to the people By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 26 24 a596 ὁ Φῆστος…φησιν 1 Festus says To call attention to a development in the story, here Luke uses the present tense in past narration. If it would not be natural to do that in your language, you can use the past tense in your translation. Alternate translation: “Festus said said”
+ACT 26 24 tk27 figs-personification τὰ πολλά σε γράμματα εἰς μανίαν περιτρέπει 1 Great learning is turning you to insanity Festus is speaking of **learning** as if it were a living thing that was **turning** Paul from sanity to insanity. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You have become insane from learning so much” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 26 25 dur9 figs-doublenegatives οὐ μαίνομαι 1 I am not insane If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **not** and the negative adjective **insane**. Alternate translation: “I am completely sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 26 25 a6pb writing-politeness κράτιστε Φῆστε 1 most excellent Festus The expression **most excellent** was a formal title by which people addressed Roman officials. Your language and culture may have a comparable title that you can use in your translation. See how you translated the similar expression in [Acts 23:26](../23/26.md). Alternate translation: “Honorable Governor Festus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 26 25 a597 figs-possession ἀληθείας καὶ σωφροσύνης ῥήματα 1 words of truth and of sanity Paul is using the possessive form to describe the character of the **words** he is **speaking**. Alternate translation: “words that are true and sane” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
+ACT 26 26 cs7b writing-politeness πρὸς ὃν καὶ παρρησιαζόμενος λαλῶ 1 to whom indeed, speaking boldly, I am talking Paul recognizes that he is being very outspoken in response to King Agrippa’s invitation to speak for himself, so he implicitly apologizes. In your translation, you can use a comparable expression from your language and culture. Alternate translation: “and I hope that he will pardon me for speaking so boldly as I talk to him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-politeness]])
+ACT 26 26 tta8 figs-doublenegatives λανθάνειν…αὐτὸν τι τούτων οὐ πείθομαι οὐθέν 1 I am not persuaded that any of these things at all eludes him In Greek this is a double negative for emphasis, “I am not persuaded that any of these things in no respect eludes him” The second negative does not cancel the first to create a positive meaning. If for emphasis your language uses double negatives that do not cancel one another, it would be appropriate to use that construction here. You could also state the meaning positively. Alternate translation: “I am persuaded that not one of these things at all eludes him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 26 26 v1uu figs-activepassive οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 this has not been done in a corner If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this did not happen in a corner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 26 26 xqr1 figs-litotes οὐ…ἐστιν ἐν γωνίᾳ πεπραγμένον τοῦτο 1 this has not been done in a corner Paul is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this has been done openly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT 26 26 i5wg figs-metaphor ἐν γωνίᾳ 1 in a corner Paul is speaking as if Jesus might have done things secretly, as if he had done them **in a corner** of a room where no one could see him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “secretly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 26 27 a4a2 figs-rquestion πιστεύεις, Βασιλεῦ Ἀγρίππα, τοῖς προφήταις? 1 Do you believe the prophets, King Agrippa? Paul asks this question to challenge **King Agrippa** to recognize that if he believes what the prophets wrote, then he should believe that Jesus rose from the dead. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this question as a statement. Alternate translation: “You should believe what I am saying about Jesus since you believe the prophets, King Agrippa.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT 26 28 y8qq figs-rquestion ἐν ὀλίγῳ με πείθεις Χριστιανὸν ποιῆσαι 1 In little are you persuading me to make me a Christian? Agrippa is using the question form to challenge Paul. He is asserting that what Paul has said so far is not sufficiently persuasive. If you would not use the question form for this purpose in your language, you could translate this as a statement or an exclamation. The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian with so little proof” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “You cannot persuade me to become a Christian in such a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
+ACT 26 29 a598 καὶ ἐν ὀλίγῳ καὶ ἐν μεγάλῳ 1 either in little or in much The term **little** could mean: (1) little proof. Alternate translation: “whether what I have said is enough or whether you need more proof” (2) little time. Alternate translation: “whether it takes a short time or a long time”
+ACT 26 29 k7kq figs-synecdoche παρεκτὸς τῶν δεσμῶν τούτων 1 without these chains Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “without being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 26 31 blz8 figs-metonymy οὐδὲν θανάτου ἢ δεσμῶν ἄξιον τι πράσσει ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man is not doing anything worthy of death or of chains The king and governor are referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “This man does not deserve to receive the death penalty or to be kept in chains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 26 31 dwyb figs-synecdoche δεσμῶν 1 of chains These people who heard Paul speak are using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chains** that bound prisoners at this time, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of being imprisoned” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 26 32 n293 figs-activepassive ἀπολελύσθαι ἐδύνατο ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man was able to have been released If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “You could have released this man” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
ACT 27 intro r82x 0 # Acts 27 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sailing
People who lived near the sea traveled by boat powered by the wind. During some months of the year, the wind would blow in the wrong direction or so hard that sailing was impossible.
### Trust
Paul trusted God to bring him safely to land. He told the sailers and soldiers to trust that God would also keep them alive. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/trust]])
### Paul breaks bread
Luke uses almost the same words here to describe Paul taking bread, thanking God, breaking it, and eating it that he used to describe the last supper Jesus ate with his disciples. However, your translation should not make your reader think that Paul was leading a religious celebration here.
-ACT 27 1 dyf5 0 Connecting Statement: Paul, as a prisoner, begins his journey to Rome.
-ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive ὡς…ἐκρίθη 1 when it was decided If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “when the king and the governor decided” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 1 yv84 εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 to Italy **Italy** was the name of the province Rome was in. See how you translated **Italy** in [Acts 18:2](../18/02.md).
-ACT 27 1 s6ny παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας, ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ, σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners to a centurion named Julius of the Augustan regiment Alternate translation: “they put a centurion named Julius, of the Augustan regiment, in charge of Paul and some other prisoners”
-ACT 27 1 k52u παρεδίδουν τόν τε Παῦλον καί τινας ἑτέρους δεσμώτας 1 they handed over both Paul and some other prisoners This could mean: (1) **they** refers to the governor and the king or (2) **they** refers to other Roman officials.
-ACT 27 1 un2s translate-names ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 to a centurion named Julius **Julius** is a man’s name. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 1 d22f translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 of the Augustan regiment The **Augustan regiment** was the name of the battalion or army from which the centurion came. Some versions translate this as “the Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 2 efe4 translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 **Adramyttium** was a city possibly located on the west coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 2 dnr9 figs-metonymy ἐπιβάντες…πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 having boarded a ship … being about to sail Here, **a ship … being about to sail** stands for the crew that will sail the ship. Alternate translation: “having boarded a ship … with a crew that was about to sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 27 2 tol6 figs-exclusive ἀνήχθημεν…ἡμῖν 1 The words **we** and **us** include the author of Acts, Paul, and the others traveling with Paul, but not the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 27 2 fqy2 πλοίῳ Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 a ship from Adramyttium This could mean: (1) a **ship** that had come from Adramyttium or (2) a **ship** that was registered or licensed in Adramyttium.
-ACT 27 2 f8pf μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 being about to sail Alternate translation: “going to sail soon” or “departing soon”
-ACT 27 2 m3ps ἀνήχθημεν 1 we set sail Alternate translation: “we began our journey on the sea”
-ACT 27 2 h3uy Ἀριστάρχου 1 Aristarchus **Aristarchus** came from Macedonia but had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [Acts 19:29](../19/29.md).
-ACT 27 3 r71e figs-exclusive κατήχθημεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 27 3 u6lt φιλανθρώπως…ὁ Ἰούλιος τῷ Παύλῳ χρησάμενος 1 Julius having treated Paul kindly See how you translated **Julius** in [Acts 27:1](../27/01.md). Alternate translation: “Julius having treated Paul with a friendly concern”
-ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns πρὸς τοὺς φίλους πορευθέντι, ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to go to his friends to receive their care If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea behind the word **care**, you could express the same idea with a verbal form. Alternate translation: “to go to his friends so they could care for him” or “to go to his friends so they could help him with whatever he needed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
-ACT 27 4 d4hg ἀναχθέντες, ὑπεπλεύσαμεν 1 having put to sea, we sailed under Alternate translation: “we started sailing and went under”
-ACT 27 4 mjt8 ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 we sailed under Cyprus Here, **under Cyprus** means they sailed along the side of that island that blocks the strong wind, so the ship was not forced off its course.
-ACT 27 5 g1t7 Παμφυλίαν 1 Pamphylia **Pamphylia** was a province in Asia Minor. See how you translated this in [Acts 2:10](../02/10.md).
-ACT 27 5 y6m6 figs-explicit κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 we came to Myra of Lycia You can make explicit that they got off the ship in **Myra**. Alternate translation: “we came to Myra, a city of Lycia, where we got off the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 27 5 ni2x translate-names εἰς Μύρρα 1 to Myra **Myra** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 5 uaf4 translate-names τῆς Λυκίας 1 of Lycia **Lycia** was a Roman province, located on the southwestern coast of modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 6 j4cf figs-explicit εὑρὼν…πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 having found a ship from Alexandria sailing to Italy It is implied that a crew would sail the ship to Italy. Alternate translation: “having found a ship that a crew had sailed from Alexandria and was about to sail to Italy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 27 6 fdq2 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρῖνον 1 from Alexandria **Alexandria** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 7 zzw1 figs-explicit δὲ…βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι 1 And sailing slowly … and having arrived with difficulty You can make explicit that the reason they were **sailing slowly** and **with difficulty** was because the wind was blowing against them. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 27 7 pye5 translate-names κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον 1 near Cnidus **Cnidus** was an ancient settlement located in what today is modern-day Turkey. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 7 hhf1 μὴ προσεῶντος ἡμᾶς τοῦ ἀνέμου 1 the wind no longer allowing us to go that way Alternate translation: “with a strong wind blowing against us so we could no longer go that way”
-ACT 27 7 b746 ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κρήτην 1 we sailed along Crete Alternate translation: “we sailed along the side of Crete where there was less wind”
-ACT 27 7 mq4n translate-names κατὰ Σαλμώνην 1 opposite Salmone **Salmone** is a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 8 p4ri figs-explicit μόλις…παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν 1 sailing along it with difficulty You can make explicit that even though the winds were not as strong as before, they were still strong enough to make sailing difficult. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 27 8 a64y translate-names Καλοὺς Λιμένας 1 Fair Havens **Fair Havens** was a port near Lasea, located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 8 n7re translate-names πόλις ἦν Λασαία 1 the city of Lasea **Lasea** was a coastal city in Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 9 ea4l ἱκανοῦ…χρόνου διαγενομένου 1 much time having passed Because of the direction the wind was blowing, the journey from Caesarea to Fair Havens had taken more time than planned.
-ACT 27 9 u6x5 ὄντος ἤδη ἐπισφαλοῦς τοῦ πλοὸς, διὰ τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι 1 the voyage already being dangerous because even the fast had already passed This **fast** took place on the Day of Atonement, which was usually either in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars. After this time, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms.
-ACT 27 10 p29v θεωρῶ ὅτι μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας…μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν 1 I see that the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss Alternate translation: “if we travel now, we will suffer much injury and loss”
-ACT 27 10 nx9c ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν 1 loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives Here, **loss** means destruction when referring to things and death when referring to people.
-ACT 27 10 q9xt οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου 1 not only of the cargo and the ship The word **cargo** refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. Alternate translation: “not only the ship and the goods on the ship”
-ACT 27 11 b1kz figs-activepassive ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις 1 spoken by Paul If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “that Paul said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 12 l2n4 figs-activepassive ἀνευθέτου…τοῦ λιμένος ὑπάρχοντος πρὸς παραχειμασίαν 1 the harbor being unsuitable for wintering You can make explicit why it was not easy to stay in the harbor. Alternate translation: “because the harbor did not sufficiently protect docked ships during winter storms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 12 jmi3 λιμένος 1 harbor A **harbor** is a place on the coast that is protected from wind and waves so that ships can safely stay there.
-ACT 27 12 k2ti translate-names Φοίνικα 1 Phoenix **Phoenix** is a city port on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 12 z1lf figs-metaphor παραχειμάσαι 1 to spend the winter there This speaks about the season of **winter** as if it were a commodity that someone can spend. Alternate translation: “to stay there for the cold season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 27 12 x6vl βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 looking toward the southwest and toward the northwest This means the opening of the harbor was toward those directions. Alternate translation: “it opened to the northwest and southwest”
-ACT 27 12 gyd2 κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 toward the southwest and toward the northwest These directions are based on the rising and setting sun. The **southwest** is a little to the left of the setting sun, and **northwest** is a little to the right of the setting sun.
-ACT 27 13 xx67 ἄραντες 1 after they had weighed anchor Here, **weighed anchor** means to pull the anchor out of the water. An **anchor** is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea keeping the ship from drifting about.
-ACT 27 14 m2xe μετ’ οὐ πολὺ 1 not long after Alternate translation: “after a little while”
-ACT 27 14 fs4z ἄνεμος τυφωνικὸς 1 a violent wind Alternate translation: “a very strong, dangerous wind”
-ACT 27 14 g1ek translate-transliterate ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων 1 called the northeaster The word for **northeaster** in the original language is **Euroclydon**. You can transliterate this word for your language. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-ACT 27 14 tz2k ἔβαλεν κατ’ αὐτῆς 1 rushed down from it Alternate translation: “came in from the island of Crete, and it blew strongly against our ship”
-ACT 27 15 fxp1 συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 And having been seized and the ship not being able to face into the wind Alternate translation: “And when the wind blew so strongly against the front of the ship that we could not sail against it”
-ACT 27 15 w1hl figs-activepassive ἐπιδόντες ἐφερόμεθα 1 having given way, we were driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we stopped trying to sail forward, and we let the wind push us whichever way it blew” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 16 c4cg νησίον…τι ὑποδραμόντες 1 sailing under the lee of a certain island Alternate translation: “sailing where the wind was not so strong, on the side of the island”
-ACT 27 16 aq56 translate-names νησίον…τι…καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 of a certain island called Cauda This island of **Cauda** was located on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 16 h9z2 τῆς σκάφης 1 of the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship, and sometimes it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship.
-ACT 27 17 v9ag ἣν ἄραντες 1 Having hoisted it up Alternate translation: “When they had lifted up the lifeboat” or “After they had pulled the lifeboat aboard the ship”
-ACT 27 17 tx1f βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον 1 they used ropes, binding the ship They tied **ropes** around the bottom of the ship so that the ship would not come apart during the storm.
-ACT 27 17 dvv4 translate-names τὴν Σύρτιν 1 Syrtis **Syrtis** is located on the coast of Libya, northern Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 17 l8kl χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος 1 having lowered the sea anchor A **sea anchor** was a sail or other object that would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow down the ship from going where the wind was blowing them.
-ACT 27 17 g7rw figs-activepassive ἐφέροντο 1 they were driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they had to go in whatever direction the wind blew them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 18 fx4m figs-activepassive σφοδρῶς…χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν 1 with us being exceedingly battered by the storm If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “since the wind blew us roughly back and forth so that all of us were badly battered and bruised by the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 18 nd5h ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο 1 they began the jettisoning of the cargo Here, **they** is the sailors. This is done to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent the ship from sinking.
-ACT 27 18 ny6k ἐκβολὴν 1 the jettisoning of the cargo The word **cargo** refers to something that a person transports from one place to another by boat. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:10](../27/10.md). Alternate translation: “goods on the ship”
-ACT 27 19 vm2k αὐτόχειρες τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν 1 they threw overboard the equipment of the ship with their own hands Here, **equipment** refers to the sailors’ equipment needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates how desperate the situation was.
-ACT 27 20 if7a μήτε δὲ ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας 1 But neither sun nor stars appearing for many days They could not see the **sun** and **stars** because of the dark storm clouds. Sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and what direction they were headed.
-ACT 27 20 p2wd χειμῶνός…οὐκ ὀλίγου ἐπικειμένου 1 no small storm assaulting us Alternate translation: “as the terrible storm blew us roughly back and forth”
-ACT 27 20 mnj5 figs-activepassive λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all remaining hope for us to be saved was taken away If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “everyone stopped believing we would survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 21 d1le figs-explicit πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης 1 And after being a long time without food It is implied that neither the sailors, nor Luke, Paul, and those with them had eaten anything. Alternate translation: “And when we had gone a long time without food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 27 21 zns2 ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν 1 in the midst of them Alternate translation: “in the middle of the people on the ship”
-ACT 27 21 bc1x κερδῆσαί τε τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν 1 and to suffer this injury and loss Alternate translation: “and as a result to suffer this harm and loss”
-ACT 27 22 d95r figs-explicit ἀποβολὴ…ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 there will be no loss of life among you Paul is speaking to the sailors. It is implied that Paul also means that he and those with him will not die either. Alternate translation: “none of us will die” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 27 22 djh4 πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου 1 but only of the ship Here “loss” is implied. Alternate translation: “but the only thing that will be lost is the ship”
-ACT 27 24 z1j8 figs-metonymy Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι 1 You must stand before Caesar The phrase **stand before Caesar** refers to Paul’s going to court and letting Caesar judge him. Alternate translation: “You must stand before Caesar so he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 27 24 s3wv κεχάρισταί σοι…πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ 1 has graciously granted to you all those who are sailing with you Alternate translation: “has graciously decided to allow all those who are sailing with you to live”
-ACT 27 25 r9t8 figs-activepassive καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι 1 according to the way it was told to me If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 26 vmp6 εἰς νῆσον…τινα, δεῖ ἡμᾶς ἐκπεσεῖν 1 we must run aground upon some island Alternate translation: “the ship is going to be wrecked on some island”
-ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal ὡς δὲ τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ ἐγένετο 1 And when the fourteenth night came The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be translated as “fourteen” or “14.” Alternate translation: “After 14 days since the storm started, that night” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-ACT 27 27 la7u figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 as we were being driven this way and that If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “as the wind blew us back and forth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 27 afs6 translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 the Adriatic Sea The **Adriatic Sea** is the sea between Italy and Greece. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 27 28 ruj1 βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings They measured the depth of water by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water”
-ACT 27 28 tq53 translate-numbers εὗρον ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι…εὗρον ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε 1 they found 20 fathoms A “fathom” is a unit of measurement for measuring the depth of water. One fathom is about two meters. Alternate translation: “they found the water was 40 meters deep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
-ACT 27 29 b1qc ἀγκύρας 1 anchors An **anchor** is a heavy object attached to a rope that is secured to the boat. The anchor is tossed into the water and sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:13](../27/13.md).
-ACT 27 29 q4am ἐκ πρύμνης 1 from the stern Alternate translation: “from the back of the ship”
-ACT 27 30 b4wv τὴν σκάφην 1 the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that is sometimes pulled behind the ship and sometime it was brought onto the ship and tied down. The smaller boat was used for various reasons, including escaping from a sinking ship. See how you translated this in [Acts 27:16](../27/16.md).
-ACT 27 30 rr89 ἐκ πρῴρης 1 from the bow Alternate translation: “from the front of the ship”
-ACT 27 31 ez5c figs-doublenegatives ἐὰν μὴ οὗτοι μείνωσιν ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 Unless these men stay in the ship, you are not able to be saved If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **unless … not able** in positive form. Alternate translation: “These men must stay in the ship in order for you to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT 27 31 br71 figs-you ὑμεῖς 1 Here the word **you** is plural and refers to the centurion and the Roman soldiers. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-you]])
-ACT 27 31 sz8y figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 If your language does not use the passive form **be saved** in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 33 q3y8 ἄχρι δὲ οὗ ἡμέρα ἤμελλεν γίνεσθαι 1 And up until it was about to become daytime Alternate translation: “And until almost sunrise”
-ACT 27 33 j5yg translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν 1 Today is the fourteenth day The ordinal number **fourteenth** can be stated as “fourteen.” Alternate translation: “For 14 days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-ACT 27 34 j3qx figs-idiom οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται 1 a hair from the head of none of you will perish This was a customary way of saying no harm would come upon them. Alternate translation: “none of you will be injured in any way in this disaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-ACT 27 35 yh7y κλάσας 1 having broken bread Alternate translation: “after he had torn the bread into pieces” or “tearing off a piece from the loaf of bread”
-ACT 27 36 zt9q figs-activepassive εὔθυμοι δὲ γενόμενοι πάντες, καὶ 1 And they were all encouraged and If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And this encouraged all of them and they” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 27 37 ynq3 writing-background ἤμεθα δὲ αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 And in all, we were 276 souls in the ship This is background information about the number of people on the ship. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT 27 39 vdk2 κόλπον 1 a bay A **bay** is a large area of water partly surrounded by land, but open to a larger body of water.
-ACT 27 39 r1bx τὴν γῆν οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 they did not recognize the land Alternate translation: “they saw land but could not recognize it as any place they knew”
-ACT 27 40 k66v τὰς ἀγκύρας περιελόντες, εἴων 1 having cut loose the anchors, they left them Alternate translation: “they cut the ropes and left the anchors behind”
-ACT 27 40 ntr9 τῶν πηδαλίων 1 of the rudders These **rudders** were large oars or pieces of wood at the back of the ship used for steering the ship.
-ACT 27 40 cn2w τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 the foresail A “sail” was a large piece of cloth that catches the wind to move the ship. A **foresail** is the said at the front of a ship that had more than one sail. Alternate translation: “the sail at the front of the ship”
-ACT 27 40 pa1k κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν 1 they headed to the beach Alternate translation: “they steered the ship toward the beach”
-ACT 27 41 y22n περιπεσόντες…εἰς τόπον διθάλασσον 1 having come to a place between two seas Sometimes where two seas meet, the current of one can flow across the current of the other. This may cause the sand under the water to pile up making the water more shallow, and dangerous for ships.
-ACT 27 41 cpu5 πρῷρα 1 bow of the ship Alternate translation: “front of the ship”
-ACT 27 41 v35z ἡ…πρύμνα 2 the stern Alternate translation: “the back of the ship”
-ACT 27 42 qul7 τῶν…στρατιωτῶν, βουλὴ ἐγένετο 1 the plan of the soldiers was Alternate translation: “the soldiers were planning”
-ACT 27 43 s2sz ἐκώλυσεν αὐτοὺς τοῦ βουλήματος 1 stopped their plan Alternate translation: “kept them from doing what they planned to do”
-ACT 27 43 br8u ἀπορίψαντας 1 having jumped overboard Alternate translation: “having jumped off the ship into the water”
-ACT 27 44 hw7p οὓς…ἐπὶ σανίσιν 1 some on planks Alternate translation: “some on wooden boards”
+ACT 27 1 b2yz figs-activepassive ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς 1 it was decided for us to sail If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities decided that we should sail” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 1 a604 figs-explicit ἐκρίθη τοῦ ἀποπλεῖν ἡμᾶς 1 it was decided for us to sail Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he says **us** because he joined Paul at this point in the story. You can include this information if your readers need it to understand what is happening. UST models a way to do this. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 1 a600 figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς 1 us As the General Notes to this chapter explain, here and in several other places Luke says “we,” **us**, and “our” to mean himself and others who were traveling with him, but not his readers. So use the exclusive form of those words if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 27 1 s6ny writing-participants ἑκατοντάρχῃ ὀνόματι Ἰουλίῳ 1 a centurion, Julius by name Luke is using the phrase **a centurion** to introduce **Julius** as a new participant in the story. If your language has its own way of introducing new participants, you can use it here in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-participants]])
+ACT 27 1 un2s translate-names Ἰουλίῳ 1 Julius The word **Julius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 1 d22f translate-names σπείρης Σεβαστῆς 1 of the Augustan regiment The **Augustan regiment** was the name of the military unit from which this centurion came. Some versions translate this as the “Imperial regiment.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 2 efe4 translate-names Ἀδραμυντηνῷ 1 Adramyttium The word ** Adramyttium ** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 2 dnr9 figs-metonymy πλοίῳ…μέλλοντι πλεῖν 1 a ship…being about to sail Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was about to do by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was about to sail it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 27 2 h3uy translate-names Ἀριστάρχου 1 Aristarchus The word **Aristarchus** is the name of a man who came from Macedonia but who had been working with Paul in Ephesus. See how you translated his name in [19:29](../19/29.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 2 a601 translate-names Μακεδόνος Θεσσαλονικέως 1 a Macedonian, a Thessalonian The word **Macedonian** is the name for a person from the province of Macedonia. See how you translated it in [19:29](../19/29.md). The word **Thessalonian** is the name for a person from the city of Thessalonia. See how you translated it in [20:4](../20/04.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 3 a602 figs-idiom κατήχθημεν εἰς Σιδῶνα 1 we came down to Sidon As the General Notes to this chapter explain, Luke says that he and the other travelers **came down** to Sidon because that was the customary way in this culture of describing people arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Sidon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 3 rp73 figs-abstractnouns ἐπιμελείας τυχεῖν 1 to receive their care If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **care**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “so that they could care for him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 27 4 mjt8 figs-idiom ὑπεπλεύσαμεν τὴν Κύπρον 1 we sailed under Cyprus The expression **sailed under** does not mean that the travelers sailed south of the island of Cyprus, such as Luke describes in [21:3](../21/03.md), even though that would have been the shortest route. Rather, **sailed under** means that the ship kept close to the northern shore of the island, which loomed above the ship and blocked the wind. If it would be clearer in your language, you could express that meaning plainly. However, if the people of your culture are familiar with sea travel, you could use the corresponding expression that is most natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we stayed close to the northern shore of Cyprus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 5 y6m6 figs-explicit κατήλθαμεν εἰς Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 we came down to Myra of Lycia Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the travelers got off the ship at **Myra**. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “text” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 5 ni2x translate-names Μύρρα τῆς Λυκίας 1 Myra of Lycia The word **Myra** is the name of a city, and the word **Lycia** is the name of the province in which that city was located. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 6 j4cf figs-metonymy πλοῖον Ἀλεξανδρῖνον, πλέον εἰς τὴν Ἰταλίαν 1 an Alexandrian ship sailing to Italy Luke is referring to what the crew of this ship was doing by association with the ship itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a ship whose crew was sailing it to Italy” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 27 6 fdq2 translate-names Ἀλεξανδρῖνον 1 from Alexandria The word **Alexandrian** is the name for someone or something that comes from the city of Alexandria. See how you translated it in [18:24](../18/24.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 7 zzw1 figs-explicit ἐν ἱκαναῖς δὲ ἡμέραις, βραδυπλοοῦντες καὶ μόλις, γενόμενοι κατὰ τὴν Κνίδον 1 sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the ship was **sailing slowly** and **with difficulty** because it was sailing into the wind. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing slowly for many days and having arrived with difficulty near Cnidus because we were sailing into the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 7 pye5 translate-names τὴν Κνίδον 1 Cnidus The word **Cnidus** is the name of a city. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 7 mq4n translate-names τὴν Κρήτην…Σαλμώνην 1 Crete…Salmone The word **Crete** is the name of an island. See how you translated the word “Cretans” in [2:11](../02/11.md). The word **Salmone** is the name of a cape on the east end of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 8 a604 writing-pronouns παραλεγόμενοι αὐτὴν 1 sailing along it The pronoun **it** refers the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “sailing along the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 27 8 p4ri figs-explicit μόλις 1 with difficulty The implication is that even under the shelter of the island of Crete, the winds were still so strong as to make sailing to the west difficult. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “with difficulty because the winds from the west were strong even there” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 8 a64y translate-names Καλοὺς Λιμένας 1 Fair Havens The word **Fair Havens** is the name of a port on the south coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 8 n7re translate-names πόλις ἦν Λασαία 1 the city of Lasea The word **Lasea** is the name of a city on the coast of the island of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 9 a605 figs-explicit τὸ καὶ τὴν νηστείαν ἤδη παρεληλυθέναι 1 even the fast had already passed Luke assumes that his readers will understand that after this **fast**, which came in the last part of September or the first part of October according to Western calendars, there was a higher risk of seasonal storms. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “even the fast had already passed and so there was a higher risk of seasonal storms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 9 u6x5 figs-metonymy τὴν νηστείαν 1 the fast Luke is referring to the Day of Atonement by association with the way that Jews observed a **fast** in connection with that sacred day. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Day of Atonement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 27 9 a606 writing-pronouns παρῄνει ὁ Παῦλος 1 Paul was warning them The pronoun **them** refers to the centurion and to the pilot and owner of the ship, as verse 11 makes clear. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul was warning Julius and the pilot and the owner of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 27 10 p29v figs-metaphor θεωρῶ 1 I see Paul is speaking as if he could literally **see** the things he describes. He means that God has revealed them to him. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “God has revealed to me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 27 10 nx9c figs-abstractnouns μετὰ ὕβρεως καὶ πολλῆς ζημίας, οὐ μόνον τοῦ φορτίου καὶ τοῦ πλοίου, ἀλλὰ καὶ τῶν ψυχῶν ἡμῶν, μέλλειν ἔσεσθαι τὸν πλοῦν 1 the voyage is about to be with injury and much loss, not only of the cargo and the ship, but also of our lives If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **injury** and **loss**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “on this voyage, many of us will be injured and we will lose many valuable things. We will not only lose the cargo and the ship, we will lose our lives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 27 11 b1kz figs-activepassive ὁ…ἑκατοντάρχης τῷ κυβερνήτῃ καὶ τῷ ναυκλήρῳ μᾶλλον ἐπείθετο, ἢ τοῖς ὑπὸ Παύλου λεγομένοις 1 the centurion was being persuaded more by the pilot and by the captain than by the things being spoken by Paul If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in other ways that are natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the pilot and the captain were persuading the centurion more by what they were saying than Paul was persuading him by what he was saying” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 11 a607 figs-explicit τῷ ναυκλήρῳ 1 by the captain Here the word **captain** could mean: (1) someone who was in command of the ship. Alternate translation: “the ship’s commander” (2) someone who owned the ship and was in command of it. However, while this is a common meaning of the word, it is unlikely in this context. We learn from the story that this ship was carrying grain from Egypt to Italy and so it would have belonged to the emperor’s own fleet. Alternate translation: “the shipowner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 12 jmi3 translate-unknown λιμένος 1 harbor A **harbor** is a place on the coast whose location and shape allow ships to come safely close to the land. If your language does not have a term for such a place, you can use a general description in your translation. Alternate translation: “place of access to the shore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 12 z1lf translate-unknown παραχειμασίαν…παραχειμάσαι 1 wintering…to winter there The terms **wintering** and **to winder** means to stay during the winter, which is a cold and stormy season in this location, in a place that is safe. If the seasons do not vary much in your location or if there is not a cold and stormy season, you could explain this with a general expression. Alternate translation: “staying during a cold and stormy season … to stay there during the cold and stormy season” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 12 k2ti translate-names Φοίνικα 1 Phoenix The word **Phoenix** is the name of a port city on the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 12 a608 figs-idiom βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind This expression means that the Phoenix harbor provided access for ships to sail out in the directions that the winds coming from the **southwest** and the **northwest** blew. That is, ships would sail out to the northeast and southeast from the harbor, and they would enter the harbor from the northeast or southeast. Your language and culture may have a comparable expression of its own that you can use in your translation. Otherwise, you could describe this in general terms. Alternate translation: “looking down the northwest wind and down the southwest wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 12 x6vl figs-metaphor βλέποντα κατὰ λίβα καὶ κατὰ χῶρον 1 looking according to the southwest wind and according to the northwest wind Luke is speaking as if the harbor of Phoenix was literally **looking** in these directions. He means that it gave access for ships to sail in those directions. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “giving access to sail to the northeast or to the southeast” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 27 12 gyd2 translate-unknown λίβα…χῶρον 1 the southwest…the northwest These directions are based on the rising and setting of the sun. The **southwest** is somewhat to the left of the setting sun, and the **northwest** is somewhat to the right of the setting sun. If you decide to use the terms “northeast” and “southeast” instead, based on the two previous notes, the northeast is somewhat to the left of the rising sun and the southeast is somewhat to the right of the rising sun. Your language and culture may have their own terms for these directions. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 13 xx67 translate-unknown ἄραντες 1 having raised {the anchor} An **anchor** is a heavy object that is attached to a rope that is tied to a ship. The ship’s crew tosses the anchor into the water and it sinks to the bottom of the sea, keeping the ship from drifting about. The crew raises the anchor out of the water when it is time for the ship to travel. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. Alternate translation: “having weighed anchor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 13 a603 writing-pronouns παρελέγοντο 1 they were sailing The pronoun **they** refers to the crew of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the crew was sailing the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 27 14 m2xe figs-litotes μετ’ οὐ πολὺ 1 not long after Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “after a short time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT 27 14 g1ek translate-transliterate ὁ καλούμενος Εὐρακύλων 1 called Eurakylon The term **Euraklyon** is a combination of the Greek word for the east wind and the Latin word for the north wind. Luke spells out the term using Greek letters so that his readers will know how it sounds. This seems to be the name that Luke heard the sailors give to this wind. In your translation, you could spell it the way it sounds in your language. You could also say what it means. Alternate translation: “called the Northeaster” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+ACT 27 14 lrs7 figs-activepassive ὁ καλούμενος 1 called If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the sailors called” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 14 tz2k writing-pronouns αὐτῆς 1 it The pronoun **it** refers to the island of Crete. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the island of Crete” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 27 15 a609 figs-activepassive συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “when the wind seized the ship so that we were not able to face into the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 15 a610 figs-personification συναρπασθέντος δὲ τοῦ πλοίου, καὶ μὴ δυναμένου ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 the ship having been seized and not being able to face into the wind Luke is speaking of the **wind** as if they were a living thing that **seized** the **ship**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the wind blowing with such force that it kept the ship from sailing in the direction from which it was coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 27 15 a611 figs-metaphor ἀντοφθαλμεῖν τῷ ἀνέμῳ 1 to face into the wind Luke is speaking as if the ship literally had a **face** that it could turn towards the wind. Your language may have an expression that suits this context that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “to bear up against the wind” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 27 15 w1hl figs-activepassive ἐφερόμεθα 1 we were driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind drove us along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 16 c4cg figs-idiom νησίον…τι ὑποδραμόντες, καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 running under a certain island called Cauda The expression **running under** is a sailing term that means to go along a specific side of some land in order to block the wind. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “sailing under the lee of a certain island called Cauda” or “sailing on the side of an island called Cauda where the wind was not so strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 16 a612 figs-activepassive νησίον…τι…καλούμενον Καῦδα 1 a certain island called Cauda If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “a certain island that people called Cauda” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 16 aq56 translate-names Καῦδα 1 Cauda The word **Cauda** is the name of a small island located off the south coast of Crete. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 16 h9z2 translate-unknown τῆς σκάφης 1 of the lifeboat A **lifeboat** is a smaller boat that crews sometimes tow behind their larger ship and sometimes bring up onto the ship and tie down. They use the smaller boat for various reasons, including escaping from the larger ship if it is sinking. If your language does not have a term for a small boat like this, you can use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the smaller utility boat that the ship was towing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 17 tx1f figs-idiom βοηθείαις ἐχρῶντο, ὑποζωννύντες τὸ πλοῖον 1 they were using helps, undergirding the ship The word **helps** is a nautical term that means ropes or cables. The word **undergirding** describes the process of running ropes or cables around the bottom of a ship so that the ship will not come apart during a storm. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were tying ropes around the bottom of the ship so that it would not come apart during the storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 17 a613 writing-pronouns ἐχρῶντο 1 they were using Here and in the next two verses, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors of the ship. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were using” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 27 17 a614 figs-idiom μὴ εἰς τὴν Σύρτιν ἐκπέσωσιν 1 they might fall into the Syrtis The expression **fall into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship becoming stuck in quicksand. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they might run aground on the Syrtis” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 17 dvv4 translate-names τὴν Σύρτιν 1 the Syrtis The word **Syrtis** is the name of a large mass of quicksand near the north coast of Africa. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 17 a615 translate-unknown τὴν Σύρτιν 1 the Syrtis Quicksand, which the word **Syrtis** describes, is sand that is saturated with water. It does not support the weight of a person, so sailors cannot get out of a ship to free it if it gets stuck in quicksand. If your readers would not be familiar with quicksand, you could describe it generally in your translation. Alternate translation: “the large mass of waterlogged sand off the north coast of Afica” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 17 l8kl translate-unknown χαλάσαντες τὸ σκεῦος 1 lowering the gear The term **gear** could mean: (1) the sails of the ship and the rigging that the sailors uses to raise and lower the sails. If this is the meaning, then Luke is saying that without sails, the sailors could not steer the ship and it had to go wherever the wind drove it. Alternate translation: “taking down the sails” (2) a sea anchor, that is, some object that the sailors would drag along in the water behind the ship in order to slow the ship down. If this is the meaning, then the sailors lowered this sea anchor in the hopes that the storm would end before they reached the quicksand. Alternate translation: “putting a sea anchor into the water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 17 g7rw figs-activepassive ἐφέροντο 1 they were being driven along If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the wind was driving them along” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 18 fx4m figs-activepassive σφοδρῶς…χειμαζομένων ἡμῶν 1 we being exceedingly storm-tossed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was tossing us exceedingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 18 nd5h figs-idiom ἐκβολὴν ἐποιοῦντο 1 they were doing a jettison The word **jettison** is a nautical term that describes sailors throwing the cargo of a ship (the goods that the ship is transporting) into the sea to lighten the weight of the ship in an effort to prevent it from sinking. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were throwing the cargo of the ship into the sea to make the ship lighter to try to keep it from sinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 19 a617 figs-idiom τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day In the idiom of this culture, today was the “first day,” tomorrow was the “second day,” and the day after tomorrow was the “third day.” So there **the third day** means two days after the sailors tied ropes around the ship and one day after the sailors threw the cargo overboard. You may wish to express this in your translation in the way your own culture reckons time. Alternate translation: “on the day after that” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 19 a641 translate-ordinal τῇ τρίτῃ 1 on the third day If you retain this idiom but your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “on day three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+ACT 27 19 vm2k figs-explicit τὴν σκευὴν τοῦ πλοίου ἔριψαν 1 they threw the equipment of the ship {overboard} Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the sailors **threw the equipment … overboard** in a desperate effort to make the ship even lighter. In this context, **equipment** refers to everything the sailors needed to sail the ship: tackle, hoists, beams of wood, block and tackle, ropes, lines, sails, and the like. This indicates that they had given up on sailing the ship and were hoping just to survive. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “they became so desperate that they threw everything they needed to sail the ship overboard, hoping just to survive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 19 a616 figs-synecdoche αὐτόχειρες 1 with their own hands Luke is using one part of the sailors, their **hands**, to represent all of them in the act of throwing the cargo overboard. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 27 20 if7a figs-explicit μήτε…ἡλίου μήτε ἄστρων ἐπιφαινόντων ἐπὶ πλείονας ἡμέρας 1 neither sun nor stars appearing for many days Luke assumes that his readers will understand that the **sun** and **stars** did not appear because the dark storm clouds obscured them. Luke also assumes that his readers will understand that sailors needed to see the sun and stars in order to know where they were and in what direction they were headed. So this is a further indication of how desperate the situation was. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “since the sailors could not determine their position or nagivate the ship because the dark storm clouds prevented the sun and stars from appearing for many days” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 20 p2wd figs-litotes χειμῶνός…οὐκ ὀλίγου 1 no small storm Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a great storm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT 27 20 lrs6 figs-personification ἐπικειμένου 1 lying upon us Luke is speaking of the storm as if they were a living thing that was **lying upon** the ship. He means that the storm continued to buffet the ship without ever letting up. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “continually buffeting the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 27 20 mnj5 figs-activepassive λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the same ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we finally lost all hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 20 a618 figs-abstractnouns λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “we finally stopped hoping that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 27 20 a619 figs-hyperbole λοιπὸν περιῃρεῖτο ἐλπὶς πᾶσα, τοῦ σῴζεσθαι ἡμᾶς 1 all hope for us to be saved was finally being taken away Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “it finally became very difficult to hope that we could save ourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 27 21 d1le figs-abstractnouns πολλῆς τε ἀσιτίας ὑπαρχούσης 1 as there had been much abstinence If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **abstinence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “as we had gone a long time without eating food” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 27 21 zns2 translate-symaction σταθεὶς…ἐν μέσῳ αὐτῶν εἶπεν 1 having stood up in the midst of them Paul **stood up** to indicate that he had something important to say. Alternate translation: “having stood up in the midst of them to show that he had something important to say” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
+ACT 27 21 bc1x figs-doublet τὴν ὕβριν ταύτην, καὶ τὴν ζημίαν 1 this injury and loss The terms **injury** and **loss** mean similar things. Paul is using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “such a great loss” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT 27 22 djh4 figs-ellipsis ἀποβολὴ…ψυχῆς οὐδεμία ἔσται ἐξ ὑμῶν, πλὴν τοῦ πλοίου 1 there will be no loss of life among you, only of the ship Paul is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the context if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “there will be no loss of life among you, there will only be loss of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+ACT 27 23 a620 figs-parallelism τοῦ Θεοῦ, οὗ εἰμι, ᾧ καὶ λατρεύω 1 of the God whose I am and whom I serve The phrases **whose I am** and **whom I serve** mean similar things. Paul is using repetition for emphasis. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine these phrases in your translation. Alternate translation: “of the God I worship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ACT 27 24 a621 figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, μὴ φοβοῦ, Παῦλε; Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι, καὶ ἰδοὺ, κεχάρισταί σοι ὁ Θεὸς πάντας τοὺς πλέοντας μετὰ σοῦ 1 saying, ‘Do not be afraid, Paul. It is necessary for you to stand before Caesar, and behold, God has graciously granted to you all the ones sailing with you.’ If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The angel told me that I should not be afraid, because it was necessary for me to stand before Caesar, and behold, God had graciously granted to me all the ones sailing with me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 27 24 a622 figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 behold The angel is using the term **behold** to focus Paul’s attention on what he is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 27 24 z1j8 figs-synecdoche Καίσαρί σε δεῖ παραστῆναι 1 You must stand before Caesar The angel is using one aspect of the trial process, the fact that an accused person would **stand before** a judge, to represent the entire process. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “You must appear in Caesar’s court so that he can judge you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 27 25 r9t8 figs-activepassive καθ’ ὃν τρόπον λελάληταί μοι 1 according to the way it was told to me If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “according to the way the angel told me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 26 vmp6 figs-idiom εἰς νῆσον…τινα…ἐκπεσεῖν 1 to fall upon some island The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on the shore of an island. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “to run aground on some island” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 27 rrm5 translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτη νὺξ 1 the fourteenth night If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “night 14” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+ACT 27 27 la7u figs-activepassive διαφερομένων ἡμῶν 1 as we were being driven about If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as the storm was driving us about” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 27 afs6 translate-names τῷ Ἀδρίᾳ 1 the Hadria The word **Hadria** is the term that people of this culture used to describe the open Mediterranean Sea between Italy and Malta on the west and Greece and Crete on the east. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 27 27 a623 figs-personification προσάγειν τινὰ αὐτοῖς χώραν 1 some land to be approaching them Luke is speaking of this **land** as if they were a living thing that was **approaching** the sailors on the ship. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “that they were approaching some land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 27 28 ruj1 figs-idiom βολίσαντες 1 taking soundings The expression **taking soundings** is a nautical term that describes sailors determining the depth of the water. Sailors measure this by dropping a line with a weight tied to the end of it into the water. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “measuring the depth of the sea water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 28 tq53 translate-numbers ὀργυιὰς εἴκοσι…ὀργυιὰς δεκαπέντε 1 20 fathoms…15 fathoms A **fathom** is a unit of measurement of the depth of water. One fathom is equal to about two meters or about six feet. Alternate translation: “40 meters … 30 meters” or “120 feet … 90 feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+ACT 27 29 a624 figs-idiom κατὰ…ἐκπέσωμεν 1 we might fall upon a rugged place The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship running aground on **some rugged place**. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “we might run aground on” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 29 q4am figs-idiom πρύμνης 1 the stern The word **stern** is a nautical term that means the back of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the back of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 30 rr89 figs-idiom πρῴρης 1 the bow The word **bow** is a nautical term that means the front of a ship. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the front of the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 31 sz8y figs-activepassive ὑμεῖς σωθῆναι οὐ δύνασθε 1 you are not able to be saved If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “you will not be able to save yourselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 32 a625 figs-idiom ἐκπεσεῖν 1 fall away The expression **fall upon** is a nautical term that in this context could mean: (1) that the soldiers let the lifeboat fall into the water where none of the sailors could get into it because it was no longer tied to the ship. Alternate translation: “fall into the water” (2) that the soldiers let the lifeboat, which was already in the water, drift away where none of the sailors could get into it. Alternate translation: “drift away” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 33 j5yg translate-ordinal τεσσαρεσκαιδεκάτην σήμερον ἡμέραν, προσδοκῶντες…διατελεῖτε 1 Anxiously waiting for a fourteenth day today, you are continuing If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “This is day 14 that you have been anxiously waiting, and you are continuing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+ACT 27 33 a626 figs-doublet ἄσιτοι…μηθὲν προσλαβόμενοι 1 fasting, having eaten nothing The expressions **fasting** and **having eaten nothing** mean similar things. Paul is using the two expressions together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express this emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “to eat nothing at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT 27 34 a627 figs-abstractnouns τοῦτο…πρὸς τῆς ὑμετέρας σωτηρίας ὑπάρχει 1 this is for your salvation If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this will save you” or “this will keep you alive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 27 34 j3qx figs-synecdoche οὐδενὸς…ὑμῶν θρὶξ ἀπὸ τῆς κεφαλῆς ἀπολεῖται 1 a hair from the head of none of you will perish Paul is using one part of each of his listeners, a **hair** from his **head**, to represent all of that listener. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “each of you will survive without suffering harm” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 27 36 zt9q figs-activepassive εὔθυμοι…γενόμενοι πάντες 1 they were all encouraged The phrase **were … encouraged** is not actually a passive form in Greek. The word translated **encouraged** is an adjective. However, this phrase might sound like a passive verbal form in other langauges. If your language does not use passive forms, you could state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this encouraged them all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 37 ynq3 writing-background ἤμεθα…αἱ πᾶσαι ψυχαὶ ἐν τῷ πλοίῳ, διακόσιαι ἑβδομήκοντα ἕξ 1 we, all the souls in the ship, were 276 This is background information about the number of people on the ship. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+ACT 27 37 a628 figs-synecdoche αἱ…ψυχαὶ 1 the souls Luke is using one part of the people on the ship, their **souls**, to represent their entire selves. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 27 38 a629 figs-activepassive κορεσθέντες δὲ τροφῆς 1 having been satisfied with food If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “having eaten enough food to satisfy them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 39 a643 writing-pronouns οὐκ ἐπεγίνωσκον 1 they were not recognizing Here and in the rest of this verse and in the next verse, the pronoun **they** refers to the sailors. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “the sailors were not recognizing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 27 39 vdk2 translate-unknown κόλπον…τινα 1 a certain bay A **bay** is a large area of water that partly surrounded by land but open to a larger body of water. Your language may have a specific expression for this action. If not, you could explain the meaning generally. Alternate translation: “a certain area of water sheltered by the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 40 ntr9 figs-idiom τὰς ζευκτηρίας τῶν πηδαλίων 1 the bands of the rudders The words **bands** and **rudders** are nautical terms. The **rudders** were large pieces of wood at the back of the ship that the sailors used for steering the ship. The **bands** were ropes or cords that held the rudders out of the water while anchors were holding the ship in one place. If your language does not have comparable nautical terms, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “the ropes that held out of the water the pieces of wood that the sailors used to steer the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 40 cn2w translate-unknown τὸν ἀρτέμωνα 1 the topsail A sail is a large piece of cloth that catches the wind in order to propel a ship through the water. A **topsail** is a sail that sailors place at the top of a mast on a ship. A mast is a vertical pole with horizontal arms that hold sails. Alternate translation: “the sail that sailors put at the top of a pole, high above the ship” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 27 40 pa1k figs-idiom κατεῖχον εἰς τὸν αἰγιαλόν 1 they were heading to the beach In this context, the expression **they were heading** is a nautical term that describes a ship maintaining its course in a specific direction. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “they were steering the ship toward the beach” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 41 a630 figs-idiom περιπεσόντες 1 having fallen into The expression **fall into** is a nautical term that in this context describes a ship striking land. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “striking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 41 y22n figs-idiom τόπον διθάλασσον 1 a place between two seas The expression **a place between two seas** is a nautical term that describes a sand bar that extends out from the land. A sand bar forms when a sea current coming from one direction flows across a sea current coming from another direction. This causes the sand under the water to pile up, making the water shallow and dangerous for ships. If your language does not have a comparable nautical term, you can state the meaning plainly in your translation. Alternate translation: “a sand bar extending out from the land” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 27 41 a631 figs-activepassive ἐλύετο ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 the stern was being loosed by the violence If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the violence was breaking up the stern” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 27 41 a632 figs-explicit ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 the violence Luke assumes that his readers will understand that he is referring to the **violence** of the waves that were hitting the **stern** of the ship. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “by the violence of the waves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 27 41 a634 figs-abstractnouns ὑπὸ τῆς βίας 1 by the violence If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **violence**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “because the waves that were hitting it were so strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 27 44 a644 figs-ellipsis καὶ τοὺς λοιποὺς 1 and the rest Luke is leaving out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words from the previous verse if that would be clearer in your language. Alternate translation: “and the rest to depart” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
ACT 28 intro w8yn 0 # Acts 28 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
No one knows for sure why Luke ends his history without telling what happened to Paul after he had been in Rome for two years.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Letters” and “brothers”
The Jewish leaders were surprised that Paul wanted to speak with them, because they had received no letters from the high priest in Jerusalem telling them that Paul was coming.
When the Jewish leaders spoke of “brothers,” they were referring to fellow Jews, not to Christians.
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “He was a god”
The native people believed that Paul was a god, but they did not believe that he was the one true God. We do not know why Paul did not tell the native people that he was not a god.
-ACT 28 1 p1bd figs-exclusive τότε ἐπέγνωμεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to Paul, the writer, and those who traveled with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 28 1 twx8 0 Connecting Statement: After the shipwreck, people on the island of Malta helped Paul and everyone on the ship. They stay there for 3 months.
-ACT 28 1 j1yf figs-activepassive καὶ διασωθέντες 1 And having been brought safely through If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And when we had arrived safely” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 1 f8y4 translate-names Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται 1 the island was called Malta **Malta** is an island located south of the modern-day island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 28 2 e7w6 οἵ…βάρβαροι 1 the native people Alternate translation: “the local people”
-ACT 28 2 v8yh figs-metaphor παρεῖχαν οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν ἡμῖν 1 offered to us not ordinary kindness Being kind to someone is spoken of as if it were an object that someone offers. Alternate translation: “were especially kind to us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 2 r7jy figs-litotes οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν 1 not just ordinary kindness This phrase is uses a negative to emphasize the opposite of what is said. Alternate translation: “a great deal of kindness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
-ACT 28 2 z9cp ἅψαντες…πυρὰν 1 having lit a fire Alternate translation: “when they put together twigs and branches and burned them”
-ACT 28 2 itw2 προσελάβοντο πάντας ἡμᾶς 1 they welcomed us all This could mean: (1) “welcomed all of the people from the ship” or (2) “welcomed Paul and all his companions.”
-ACT 28 3 g4ad ἔχιδνα ἀπὸ τῆς θέρμης ἐξελθοῦσα 1 a viper, having come out from the heat Alternate translation: “a poisonous snake, driven from the bundle of sticks by the heat of the fire”
-ACT 28 3 xmx4 καθῆψε τῆς χειρὸς αὐτοῦ 1 fastened on to his hand Alternate translation: “bit Paul’s hand and did not let go”
-ACT 28 4 ye7h πάντως φονεύς ἐστιν ὁ ἄνθρωπος οὗτος 1 This man certainly is a murderer Alternate translation: “For sure, this man is a murderer” or “This man is truly a murderer”
-ACT 28 4 ma1b figs-explicit ἡ δίκη 1 justice The word **justice** refers to the name of a god that they worshiped. Alternate translation: “the god called Justice” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 28 5 q5i3 ἀποτινάξας τὸ θηρίον εἰς τὸ πῦρ 1 shaking off the snake into the fire Alternate translation: “after shaking his hand so that the snake fell from his hand into the fire”
-ACT 28 5 asr8 ἔπαθεν οὐδὲν κακόν 1 suffered no harm Alternate translation: “was not hurt at all”
-ACT 28 6 m11i πίμπρασθαι 1 to become inflamed This could mean: (1) his body would swell because of the snake venom or (2) he would become very hot with fever.
-ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the double-negative **nothing unusual** in positive form. Alternate translation: “everything about him was as it should be” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
-ACT 28 6 u81u figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 having changed their minds To think differently about a situation is spoken of as if a person is changing his mind. Alternate translation: “thinking again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 6 cfe9 figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god You can state this as a direct quotation. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘This man must be a god.’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
-ACT 28 6 d1rj ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god Perhaps there was a belief that someone who lived after a poisonous snake bite was divine or a god.
-ACT 28 7 f4sa figs-exclusive ἡμᾶς…ἐξένισεν 1 Here both instance of the word **us** refer to Paul, Luke, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 28 7 r95r ἐν δὲ τοῖς περὶ τὸν τόπον ἐκεῖνον 1 Now in the area near that same place **Now** is used to introduce a new person or event in the account.
-ACT 28 7 wx6t τῷ πρώτῳ τῆς νήσου 1 of the most important man of the island This could mean: (1) the main leader of the people or (2) someone who was the most important person on the island, perhaps because of his wealth.
-ACT 28 7 wh2d translate-names ὀνόματι Ποπλίῳ 1 named Publius **Publius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 28 8 g12t writing-background ἐγένετο δὲ, τὸν πατέρα τοῦ Ποπλίου πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον κατακεῖσθαι 1 And it happened that the father of Publius was lying sick, having been afflicted with fever and dysentery This is background information about Publius’ father that is important to understanding the story. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
-ACT 28 8 m154 figs-activepassive πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον 1 having been afflicted with fever and dysentery If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “was suffering from fever and dysentery” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 8 fr46 δυσεντερίῳ 1 dysentery “Dysentery” is an infectious intestinal disease.
-ACT 28 8 pwk5 ἐπιθεὶς τὰς χεῖρας αὐτῷ 1 having placed his hands on him Alternate translation: “having touched him with his hands”
-ACT 28 9 yk6u figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύοντο 1 were being healed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he healed them too” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 10 ydg4 πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς 1 honored us with many honors Probably they **honored** Paul and those with him by giving them gifts.
-ACT 28 11 qi6e παρακεχειμακότι ἐν τῇ νήσῳ 1 that had wintered at the island Alternate translation: “that the crew left at the island for the cold season”
-ACT 28 11 cm2t ἐν πλοίῳ…Ἀλεξανδρίνῳ 1 in an Alexandrian ship This could mean: this refers to (1) a ship that came from Alexandria, or (2) a ship that was registered or licensed in Alexandria.
-ACT 28 11 jc5t figs-explicit Διοσκούροις 1 The **Heavenly Twins** refers to Castor and Pollux, the twin sons of Zeus, a Greek god. They were thought to be protectors of ships. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
-ACT 28 12 w5c6 translate-names Συρακούσας 1 Syracuse **Syracuse** is a city on the southeast coast of the modern-day island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 28 13 z2u4 translate-names Ῥήγιον 1 Rhegium **Rhegium** was a port city located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 28 13 p633 ἐπιγενομένου νότου 1 a south wind having sprung up Alternate translation: “when the wind began to blow from the south”
-ACT 28 13 tz4h translate-names Ποτιόλους 1 Puteoli **Puteoli** is located in modern-day Naples on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 28 14 m1is οὗ εὑρόντες ἀδελφοὺς 1 Having found brothers there Alternate translation: “When we met fellow believers there”
-ACT 28 14 n3tw figs-gendernotations ἀδελφοὺς 1 brothers These **brothers** were followers of Jesus, including both men and women. Alternate translation: “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-gendernotations]])
-ACT 28 14 a2c5 figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 we were begged If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 14 bc3j καὶ οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν 1 and in this way, we came to Rome Once Paul reached Puteoli, the rest of the journey **to Rome** was on land. Alternate translation: “and after we stayed seven days with them, we went to Rome” or “and so our trip ended as we arrived in Rome”
-ACT 28 15 k754 ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 having heard the things about us Alternate translation: “after they heard why we were there”
-ACT 28 15 m9tz figs-metaphor εὐχαριστήσας τῷ Θεῷ, ἔλαβε θάρσος 1 having thanked God, took courage Here, **courage** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could **take**. Alternate translation: “thanked God and was encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 15 se8v translate-names Ἀππίου Φόρου…Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν 1 **Forum of Appius** and **Three Taverns** were a popular market and inn on the main highway called the Appian Way, about 50 kilometers south of the city of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
-ACT 28 16 hf2t 0 Connecting Statement: Paul arrives in Rome as a prisoner but with the freedom to stay in his own place. He calls the local Jews together to explain what has happened to him.
-ACT 28 16 fib2 figs-exclusive εἰσήλθομεν 1 Here the word **we** refers to the writer, Paul, and those traveling with them, but not to the reader. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 28 16 te8v figs-activepassive ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ μένειν καθ’ ἑαυτὸν 1 Paul was allowed to stay by himself If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the Roman authorities gave Paul permission to stay by himself instead of in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 17 vf7r ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that This phrase is used here to mark the beginning of a new part of the story. If your language has a way for doing this, you could consider using it here.
-ACT 28 17 d77z τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους 1 the most important of the Jews These were the Jewish civil or religious leaders present in Rome.
-ACT 28 17 e1dd ἀδελφοί 1 brothers Here **brothers** means “fellow Jews.”
-ACT 28 17 g55i ἐναντίον…τῷ λαῷ 1 opposed to the people Alternate translation: “against our people” or “against the Jews”
-ACT 28 17 hgk4 figs-activepassive ἐγώ…δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων 1 I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem into the hands of the Romans If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “some of the Jews arrested me in Jerusalem and placed me in the custody of the Roman authorities” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 17 x3r2 figs-metonymy εἰς τὰς χεῖρας τῶν Ῥωμαίων 1 into the hands of the Romans Here, **hands** stands for power or control. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 18 fed7 τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί 1 there is no reason in me for a death penalty Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to cause them to execute me”
-ACT 28 19 lr96 figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Here, **the Jews** does not mean all of **the Jews**. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-ACT 28 19 zk8f ἀντιλεγόντων 1 objecting Alternate translation: “complaining about what the Roman authorities wanted to do”
-ACT 28 19 n6vf figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθην ἐπικαλέσασθαι Καίσαρα 1 I was forced to appeal to Caesar If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I had to ask for Caesar to judge me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 19 e7gr figs-metonymy οὐχ ὡς τοῦ ἔθνους μου ἔχων τι κατηγορεῖν 1 not as if I have anything to accuse my nation Here, **my nation** stands for the people. Alternate translation: “but it was not because I wanted to accuse the people of my nation before Caesar” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 20 b1fd τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the hope of Israel This could mean: (1) the people of Israel confidently expect the Messiah to come or (2) the people of Israel confidently expect God to bring those who have died back to life.
-ACT 28 20 pgr8 figs-metonymy τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain Here, **bound with this chain** stands for being a prisoner. Alternate translation: “I am a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 20 n3s7 figs-metonymy τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 of Israel Here, **Israel** stands for the people. Alternate translation: “the people of Israel” or “the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 21 x5d5 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 Here, **We** refers to the Jewish leaders in Rome. (See: [Acts 28:17](../28/17.md) and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
-ACT 28 21 y4bx οὔτε παραγενόμενός τις τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 nor have any of the brothers come Here, **brothers** stands for fellow Jews. Alternate translation: “and none of our fellow Jews have come”
-ACT 28 22 kw1d τῆς αἱρέσεως ταύτης 1 this sect A **sect** is a smaller group within a larger group. Here it refers to those who believe in Jesus. Alternate translation: “this group to which you belong”
-ACT 28 22 gy8t figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 it is known to us If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 22 j12v figs-activepassive πανταχοῦ ἀντιλέγεται 1 it is spoken against everywhere If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “many Jews all over the Roman Empire are saying bad things about it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 23 u7pc ταξάμενοι…οἷς…αὐτοὺς 1 Here all occurrences of the words **they** and **them** refer to the Jewish leaders in Rome.
-ACT 28 23 q4iv ταξάμενοι…αὐτῷ ἡμέραν 1 when they had appointed a day for him Alternate translation: “when they had chosen a time for him to speak to them”
-ACT 28 23 dg5f figs-metonymy διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 testifying about the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** stands for God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “telling them about God’s rule as king” or “telling them how God would show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 23 peu1 figs-metonymy τῶν προφητῶν 1 from the prophets Here, **the prophets** refers to what they wrote. Alternate translation: “from what the prophets wrote” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 24 pmd6 figs-activepassive καὶ οἱ μὲν ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 And some were convinced about the things which he was saying If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “And Paul was able to convince some of them by what he said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 25 n7pm figs-metonymy εἰπόντος τοῦ Παύλου ῥῆμα ἓν 1 after Paul had spoken one word Here, **word** stands for a message or statement. Alternate translation: “after Paul had said one more thing” or “after Paul had made this statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 25 b11n figs-quotesinquotes καλῶς τὸ Πνεῦμα τὸ Ἅγιον ἐλάλησεν διὰ Ἠσαΐου τοῦ προφήτου πρὸς τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your fathers. This sentence contains quotations within quotations. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT 28 26 t5dq πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 In this verse, Paul begins to quote the prophet Isaiah.
-ACT 28 26 qj7q figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear, but you will certainly not understand; and by seeing you will see, but you will certainly not perceive This is the end of the sentence that begins with the words “The Holy Spirit spoke” in verse 25 and that contains quotations within quotations. You can translate one of the inner quotations as an indirect quotation, or you can translate two of the inner quotations as indirect quotations. “The Holy Spirit spoke well through Isaiah the prophet to your forefathers when the Spirit told Isaiah to go tell them that they will hear but will not understand and they will see but they will not perceive” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
-ACT 28 26 pax8 ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε 1 By hearing you will hear … by seeing you will see The words **hear** and **see** are repeated for emphasis. Alternate translation: “When you listen you will hear … when you look you will see”
-ACT 28 26 s1ti figs-parallelism καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 but you will certainly not understand … but you will certainly not perceive Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
-ACT 28 27 fz42 0 General Information: Translate Paul’s quotation of Isaiah as a direct quotation or indirect quotation according to how you translated it in [Acts 28:25-26](./25.md).
-ACT 28 27 ts5a figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 For the heart of this people has become dull People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if their **heart** is **dull**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 27 ngve figs-metonymy ἡ καρδία 1 Here, **heart** is a metonym for the mind. Alternate translation: “the thinking” or “the thoughts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 27 f5m4 figs-metaphor τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 with their ears they hardly heard, and they shut their eyes People who stubbornly refuse to understand what God is saying or doing are spoken of as if they are unable to hear and are shutting **their eyes** so that they will not see. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 27 lr99 figs-metonymy τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν 1 might understand with their heart Here, **heart** stands for the mind. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 28 27 q8c2 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 might turn again To start obeying God is spoken of as though the person were physically **turning** toward God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 27 vb9f ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I will heal them This does not mean God will only **heal** them physically. He will also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins.
-ACT 28 28 b2za figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles God’s message about how he saves people is spoken of as if it were an object that is **sent**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-ACT 28 28 e8hb figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 If your language does not use the passive form in this way, you can state this in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God is sending his messengers to the Gentiles to tell them about how he will save them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-ACT 28 28 d18n αὐτοὶ καὶ ἀκούσονται 1 they also will listen This response of the Gentiles is in contrast to the way the Jews of that time refused to listen to God. Alternate translation: “some of them also will listen”
-ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory 0 Connecting Statement: In verses 30-31, Luke ends the story of Paul in the book of Acts. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
-ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-metonymy κηρύσσων τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 proclaiming the kingdom of God Here, **kingdom of God** refers to God’s rule as king. Alternate translation: “preaching about God’s rule as king” or “preaching about how God will show himself as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-ACT 10 1 nfy5 0 Connecting Statement: This is the beginning of the part of the story about Cornelius.
-ACT 10 6 lt9n βυρσεῖ 1 a tanner A **tanner** is a person who makes leather from animal skins.
+ACT 28 1 j1yf figs-activepassive διασωθέντες 1 having been brought safely through If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who did the action, it seems that Luke means to say that it was God. Alternate translation: “after God had brought us safely through” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 1 a635 figs-activepassive Μελίτη ἡ νῆσος καλεῖται 1 the island was called Malta If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people called the island Malta” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 1 f8y4 translate-names Μελίτη 1 Malta The word **Malta** is the name of an island located south of the island of Sicily. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 2 e7w6 figs-idiom οἵ…βάρβαροι 1 the barbarians Luke is using the word **barbarians** in the specific sense that it had in his culture. He means people who did not speak Greek or Latin. From his perspective and the perspective of the others with him, they were “foreigners,” but from their own perspectives, they were “natives” of the island. It may be appropriate to describe them that way in your translation. Alternate translation: “the natives” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 2 r7jy figs-litotes οὐ τὴν τυχοῦσαν φιλανθρωπίαν 1 no ordinary benevolence Luke is using a figure of speech that expresses a positive meaning by using a negative word together with a word that is the opposite of the intended meaning. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “extraordinary benevolence” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litotes]])
+ACT 28 3 g4ad translate-unknown ἔχιδνα 1 a viper A **viper** is a dangerous poisonous snake. If your readers would not recognize this name, you could use the name of another poisonous snake they might recognize or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “a snake whose venom was poisonous” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 28 4 ma1b translate-names ἡ δίκη 1 Justice The word **Justice** is the name of a false god who the people of this time believed would avenge crimes. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 6 m11i figs-activepassive αὐτὸν μέλλειν πίμπρασθαι, ἢ καταπίπτειν ἄφνω νεκρόν 1 him to begin to be inflamed or suddenly to fall down dead If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “that the effects of the venom would begin to inflame him or that he would suddenly fall down dead” or “that the effects of the venom would make his body start to swell or that he would suddenly fall down dead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 6 i6i6 figs-doublenegatives μηδὲν ἄτοπον εἰς αὐτὸν γινόμενον 1 nothing unusual happening to him If it would be clearer in your language, you could use a positive expression to translate this double negative that consists of the negative particle **nothing** and the negative adjective **unusual**. Alternate translation: “everything happening to him as usual” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublenegatives]])
+ACT 28 6 u81u figs-metaphor μεταβαλόμενοι 1 turning themselves around Luke is speaking as if the natives of Malta were literally **turning themselves around**. He means that they came to a different opinion about who Paul was. If it would be clearer in your language, you could use an expression from your own language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “changing their minds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 6 cfe9 figs-quotations ἔλεγον αὐτὸν εἶναι θεόν 1 they said that he was a god It may be more natural in your language to have a direct quotation here. Alternate translation: “they said, ‘He is a god!’” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotations]])
+ACT 28 7 r95r writing-background δὲ 1 Now Luke is using the word **Now** to introduce background information about **Publius** that will help readers understand what happens next in the story. In your translation, introduce this information in a way that would be natural in your own language and culture. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-background]])
+ACT 28 7 wx6t figs-nominaladj τῷ πρώτῳ 1 of the first Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular kind of person. In this context, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Since **Publius** is a Roman name, this man was probably the Roman governor of the island. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “of the most prominent man” or “of the Roman governor” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 28 7 wh2d translate-names Ποπλίῳ 1 Publius The word **Publius** is the name of a man. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 8 m154 figs-activepassive πυρετοῖς καὶ δυσεντερίῳ συνεχόμενον 1 being afflicted with fevers and dysentery If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “whom fevers and dysentery were afflicting” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 8 fr46 translate-unknown δυσεντερίῳ 1 dysentery The word **dysentery** describes an infectious intestinal disease. In your translation, you can use a term a similar disease, or you could use a general expression. Alternate translation: “intestinal disease” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 28 9 yk6u figs-activepassive ἐθεραπεύοντο 1 being healed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “Paul was healing them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 10 ydg4 figs-explicit πολλαῖς τιμαῖς ἐτίμησαν ἡμᾶς 1 honored us with many honors Luke assumes that his readers will understand that these **honors** probably included gifts. You can include this information if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “gave us many gifts” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 28 11 jc5t translate-names παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι 1 with a Dioscouri figurehead The word **Dioscouri** is the name of two false gods, Castor and Pollux, whom some sailors considered to be their patron gods. The name means “Sons of Zeus” in Greek. Alternate translation: “with Castor and Pollux as their figurehead” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 11 a636 translate-unknown παρασήμῳ Διοσκούροι 1 with a Dioscouri figurehead A **figurehead** was an image of a god, human being, animal, or object that was painted or sculpted on the prow (front) of a ship as a good luck token. If your readers would not be familiar with this, you could use a general expression in your translation. Alternate translation: “with images of Castor and Pollux sculpted on the prow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+ACT 28 12 a637 figs-idiom καταχθέντες εἰς Συρακούσας 1 having come down to Syracuse Luke says that he and the others traveling with him had **come down** to Syracuse because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “having landed at Syracuse” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 12 w5c6 translate-names Συρακούσας 1 Syracuse The word **Syracuse** is the name of a city on the southeast coast of the island of Sicily, just southwest of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 13 a638 figs-idiom κατηντήσαμεν εἰς Ῥήγιον 1 we came down to Rhegium Luke says that he and those traveling with him **came down to Rhegium** because that was the customary way in this culture of describing a person arriving somewhere after traveling by sea. Your language may have its own way of describing that. Alternate translation: “we landed at Rhegium” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 13 z2u4 translate-names Ῥήγιον 1 Rhegium The word **Rhegium** is the name of a port city that was located at the southwestern tip of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 13 tz4h translate-names Ποτιόλους 1 Puteoli The word **Puteoli** is the name of a city that was located on the west coast of Italy. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 14 m1is figs-metaphor ἀδελφοὺς 1 brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 14 a2c5 figs-activepassive παρεκλήθημεν 1 we were begged If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “they begged us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 14 bc3j figs-go οὕτως εἰς τὴν Ῥώμην ἤλθαμεν 1 thus we went towards Rome Since Luke describes in the next verse how believers from Rome came some distance to meet Paul and his companions on their way to Rome, by **thus** he means that after staying with the believers in Puetoli for seven days, they continued on their way to Rome. In a context such as this, your language might say “came” instead of **went**. Alternate translation: “we came near Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-go]])
+ACT 28 15 a639 figs-explicit κἀκεῖθεν 1 From there By **there**, Luke implicitly means Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “from Rome” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 28 15 a640 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 the brothers Luke is using the term **brothers** figuratively to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “some believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 15 k754 figs-explicit ἀκούσαντες, τὰ περὶ ἡμῶν 1 having heard the things about us The implication is that these believers had heard from the believers in Puteoli while Paul and his companions were staying with them that they were on their way to Rome. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “having learned from the believers in Puteoli that we were coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 28 15 m9tz figs-metaphor ἔλαβε θάρσος 1 took courage Here, **courage** is spoken of as if it were an object that a person could **take**. Alternate translation: “became encouraged” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 15 se8v translate-names Ἀππίου Φόρου…Τριῶν Ταβερνῶν 1 the Forum of Appius…Three Taverns The phrase **the Forum of Appius** is the name of a popular market on the main highway to Rome that was called the Appian Way. The Forum of Appius was about 40 miles or about 60 kilometers south of Rome. The phrase **Three Taverns** is the name of an inn on that same highway about 30 miles or about 45 kilometers south of Rome. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+ACT 28 16 te8v figs-activepassive ἐπετράπη τῷ Παύλῳ 1 Paul was allowed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Roman officials allowed Paul” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 16 a642 figs-explicit καθ’ ἑαυτὸν 1 by himself Since there was a **soldier** with Paul who was **guarding him**, Luke does not mean that Paul stayed all **by himself**. Rather, he means that the Roman authorities allowed Paul to live in a rented house (as verse 30 indicates) rather than putting him in prison. You can provide this information in your translation if that would be helpful to your readers. Alternate translation: “in a rented house” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 28 17 vf7r writing-newevent ἐγένετο δὲ 1 And it happened that Luke is using this phrase to introduce a new event in the story. Use a word, phrase, or other method in your language that is natural for introducing a new event. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-newevent]])
+ACT 28 17 d77z figs-nominaladj τῶν Ἰουδαίων πρώτους 1 first among the Jews Luke is using the adjective **first** as a noun to mean a particular group of people. Here, **first** has the sense of most prominent. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “most prominent among the Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 28 17 e1dd figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers This is an idiomatic form of address. Use a way that is natural in your language to refer to a particular group of people. Alternate translation: “My brothers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 17 a615 figs-idiom ἄνδρες, ἀδελφοί 1 Men, brothers Paul is using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “My fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 17 a664 figs-metaphor τοῖς ἔθεσι τοῖς πατρῴοις 1 to the fathers’ customs Paul is using the term **fathers’** to describe customs that have been passed down among the Jews through the generations. If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “to the ancestral customs” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 17 g55i figs-explicit τῷ λαῷ 1 the people By **the people**, Paul means specifically the Jewish people. Alternate translation: “to the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+ACT 28 17 hgk4 figs-activepassive ἐγώ…δέσμιος ἐξ Ἱεροσολύμων παρεδόθην 1 I was delivered as a prisoner from Jerusalem If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem delivered me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 17 x3r2 figs-metonymy τὰς χεῖρας 1 the hands Here, **hands** represents the power of someone, in this case the power of an authority to hold an accused person in custody. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the custody” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 28 18 fed7 figs-metonymy τὸ μηδεμίαν αἰτίαν θανάτου ὑπάρχειν ἐν ἐμοί 1 there was no reason in me for death Paul is referring to a penalty of death by association with **death** itself. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I had done nothing to deserve the death penalty” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 28 19 lr96 figs-synecdoche τῶν Ἰουδαίων 1 the Jews Paul is using the name of a whole group, **the Jews**, to refer to some members of that group. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish leaders in Jerusalem” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 28 19 n6vf figs-activepassive ἠναγκάσθην 1 I was forced If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “my concern for my safety forced me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 19 e7gr figs-metonymy τοῦ ἔθνους μου 1 my nation Paul is referring by association to the people of the Jewish **nation**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Jewish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 28 20 a616 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 the hope of Israel If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **hope**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “what Israel is hoping for” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 28 20 b1fd figs-metonymy εἵνεκεν…τῆς ἐλπίδος τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 on account of the hope of Israel Paul is referring by association to something that the people of Israel had **hope** for. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. This could mean: (1) the hope that God would send the Messiah. Alternate translation: “because I believe God has sent the Messiah” (2) the hope that God would make people who had died alive again. Alternate translation: “because I believe that God will make people who have died alive again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 28 20 n3s7 figs-personification τοῦ Ἰσραὴλ 1 of Israel Paul is referring to all of the people of Israel as if they were a single person, their ancestor, **Israel**. Alternate translation: “of the people of Israel” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
+ACT 28 20 a617 figs-activepassive τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this chain is binding me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 20 pgr8 figs-synecdoche τὴν ἅλυσιν ταύτην περίκειμαι 1 I am bound with this chain Paul is using one aspect of imprisonment, the **chain** with which he is bound, to mean the entire state of being imprisoned. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the Romans are keeping me as a prisoner” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
+ACT 28 21 x5d5 figs-exclusive ἡμεῖς 1 We By **We**, these Jewish leaders mean themselves but not Paul, to whom they are speaking, so use the exclusive form of that word in your translation if your language marks that distinction. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-exclusive]])
+ACT 28 21 y4bx figs-metaphor τῶν ἀδελφῶν 1 of the brothers These Jewish leaders are using the term **brothers** to mean people who share the same faith. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “of our fellow Jews” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 21 a618 figs-doublet ἀπήγγειλεν ἢ ἐλάλησέν τι 1 reported or said anything The terms **reported** and **said** mean similar things. The Jewish leaders are using the two terms together for emphasis. If it would be clearer for your readers, you could express the emphasis with a single phrase. Alternate translation: “told us anything at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
+ACT 28 22 gy8t figs-activepassive γνωστὸν ἡμῖν ἐστιν 1 it is known to us If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “we know” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 22 j12v figs-activepassive ἀντιλέγεται 1 it is spoken against If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “people speak against it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 22 a619 figs-hyperbole πανταχοῦ 1 everywhere The Jewish leaders say **everywhere** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. Alternate translation: “in places throughout the empire” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
+ACT 28 23 a645 figs-nominaladj πλείονες 1 more Luke is using the adjective **more** as a noun to mean the larger number of people who came to hear Paul speak. Your language may use adjectives in the same way. If not, you can translate this word with an equivalent phrase. Alternate translation: “more people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-nominaladj]])
+ACT 28 23 dg5f figs-abstractnouns διαμαρτυρόμενος τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 testifying about the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “testifying about how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 28 23 peu1 figs-merism ἀπό τε τοῦ νόμου Μωϋσέως, καὶ τῶν προφητῶν 1 both from the Law of Moses and the Prophets Luke is referring to all of the Hebrew Scriptures by naming two of their major parts. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “from passages throughout the Scriptures” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+ACT 28 24 pmd6 figs-activepassive οἱ…ἐπείθοντο τοῖς λεγομένοις 1 some were convinced by the things being said If your language does not use these passive forms, you could express the ideas in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the things that Paul was saying convinced some” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 25 n7pm figs-metonymy εἰπόντος…ῥῆμα ἓν 1 having spoken one word Luke is using the term **word** to mean a statement that Paul made by using words. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “having made this last statement” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+ACT 28 25 a646 figs-metaphor τοὺς πατέρας ὑμῶν 1 your fathers Paul is using the term **fathers** to mean “ancestors.” If your readers would misunderstand this, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “your ancestors” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 26 qj7q figs-quotesinquotes λέγων, πορεύθητι πρὸς τὸν λαὸν τοῦτον, καὶ εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 saying, ‘Go to this people and say, “By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all.” If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation and then another quotation inside the first one. It may be helpful to begin a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to go to the people of Israel and tell them that by hearing they would hear but they would not understand at all and that seeing they would see but they would not perceive at all” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 28 26 a647 figs-quotemarks λέγων, πορεύθητι 1 saying, ‘Go This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening second-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a second-level quotation. You may also be able to use special formatting to set off the quotation, as ULT does. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ACT 28 26 a648 figs-quotemarks εἰπόν, ἀκοῇ 1 say, “By hearing This is the beginning of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with an opening third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the start of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ACT 28 26 pax8 figs-idiom ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε…βλέποντες βλέψετε 1 By hearing you will hear…by seeing you will see Isaiah is using a Hebrew idiom, the repetition of a verb to express the intensity of an action. It may not be possible to translate this Hebrew practice of verb repetition directly into many languages. Use a natural form of strengthening a verb in your language. Alternate translation: “You will try very hard to hear … you will try very hard to see” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 26 a649 figs-parallelism ἀκοῇ ἀκούσετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε; καὶ βλέποντες βλέψετε, καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 By hearing you will hear but you will not understand at all, and seeing you will see but you will not perceive at all These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “You will become aware of what is happening around you but you will not understand the significance of what is happening” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ACT 28 26 s1ti figs-parallelism καὶ οὐ μὴ συνῆτε…καὶ οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 but you will not understand at all…but you will not perceive at all Both of these phrases mean basically the same thing. They emphasize that the Jewish people will not understand God’s plan. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ACT 28 26 a650 figs-quotemarks οὐ μὴ ἴδητε 1 you will not perceive at all.” This is the end of a quotation within a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with a closing third-level quotation mark or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a third-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ACT 28 27 fz42 figs-quotesinquotes ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν, μήποτε ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν, καὶ τῇ καρδίᾳ συνῶσιν, καὶ ἐπιστρέψωσιν, καὶ ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with {their} ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes, lest they might see with {their} eyes, and they might hear with {their} ears, and they might understand with {their} heart and turn back, and I would heal them If it would be clearer in your language, you could translate this so that there is not a quotation within a quotation. It may be helpful to make this two sentences. Alternate translation: “The Holy Spirit told Isaiah to say that because the heart of that people had been thickened, and with their ears they had hardly heard, and they had shut their eyes. Otherwise they might have seen with their eyes, and they might have heard with their ears, and they might have understood with their heart and turned back, and God would have healed them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotesinquotes]])
+ACT 28 27 a651 figs-parallelism ἐπαχύνθη γὰρ ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 For the heart of this people has been thickened, and with {their} ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes These three phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “For this people is stubbornly refusing to use its senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ACT 28 27 ts5a figs-metaphor ἐπαχύνθη…ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 the heart of this people has been thickened Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 27 a652 figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία 1 the heart Isaiah is speaking as if the **heart** of the people of Israel has literally been **thickened**. He means that they are resisting God stubbornly. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “this people has become stubborn” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 27 a653 ἡ καρδία τοῦ λαοῦ τούτου 1 the heart of this people If it would not be natural in your language to speak as if a group of people had only one **heart**, you could use the plural form of that word in your translation. Alternate translation: “the hearts of these people”
+ACT 28 27 ngve figs-metaphor ἡ καρδία…τῇ καρδίᾳ 1 the heart…with {their} heart Here, the **heart** figuratively represents the thoughts of people. Alternate translation: “the thinking … with their thinking” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 27 a654 figs-activepassive ἐπαχύνθη 1 has been thickened If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “has become thick” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 27 f5m4 figs-metaphor καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν, καὶ τοὺς ὀφθαλμοὺς αὐτῶν ἐκάμμυσαν 1 and with their ears they have hardly heard, and they have shut their eyes Isaiah is speaking as if the people of Israel have become unable to hear and have **shut their eyes** so that they will not see.. He means that they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “and they are refusing to consider what God wants to tell them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 27 a655 figs-explicitinfo τοῖς ὠσὶν βαρέως ἤκουσαν…ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς…τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 with their ears they have hardly heard…they might see with their eyes…they might hear with their ears It might seem that these expressions contains extra information that would be unnatural to express in your language. If so, you can shorten them. Alternate translation: “they have hardly heard anything … they might see clearly … they might hear clearly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicitinfo]])
+ACT 28 27 a656 figs-parallelism ἴδωσιν τοῖς ὀφθαλμοῖς, καὶ τοῖς ὠσὶν ἀκούσωσιν 1 they might see with {their} eyes, and they might hear with {their} ears These two phrases mean similar things. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could combine them. Alternate translation: “they might use their senses” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
+ACT 28 27 q8c2 figs-metaphor ἐπιστρέψωσιν 1 turn back Isaiah is speaking of the people of Israel as if they had been traveling somewhere and had taken the wrong way and needed to **turn back** onto the right way. Alternate translation: “start obeying the Lord again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 27 vb9f figs-metaphor ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I would heal them This does not mean God would only **heal** the people physically. He would also heal them spiritually by forgiving their sins. Alternate translation: “I would heal them and forgive them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+ACT 28 27 a657 figs-quotemarks ἰάσομαι αὐτούς 1 I would heal them.’” This is the end of a quotation within a quotation. You may be able to indicate that with closing second-level quotation marks or with some other punctuation or convention that your language could use to indicate the end of a second-level quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
+ACT 28 28 a658 figs-imperative3p γνωστὸν…ἔστω 1 let it be known to you If your language does not use the third-person imperative in this way, you can state this in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “may it be known to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-imperative3p]])
+ACT 28 28 e8hb figs-activepassive τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη τοῦτο τὸ σωτήριον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 this salvation of God has been sent to the Gentiles If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. If you need to say who has done the action, it is clear from the context that it was God. Alternate translation: “God has sent me to proclaim this salvation of his to the Gentiles” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+ACT 28 28 b2za figs-abstractnouns τοῖς ἔθνεσιν ἀπεστάλη 1 this salvation of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **salvation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “this message about how God saves people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 28 28 d18n figs-idiom αὐτοὶ…ἀκούσονται 1 they will hear In this context the word **hear** likely means “understand and obey,” since Paul is drawing a contrast with the stubborn response of many of the Jews. You may wish to make this clear in your translation. Alternate translation: “they will understand the message and obey it” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+ACT 28 29 a659 translate-textvariants 0 As the General Introduction to Acts explains, this verse is found in many traditional versions of the Bible, but it is not found in the most accurate ancient manuscripts of the Bible. ULT and UST indicate this by putting the verse in brackets. If a translation of the Bible already exists in your area, you could consider including this verse if that translation does. If there is not already a Bible translation in your area, we recommend that you indicate in some way that this verse may not be original, such as by putting it in brackets or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+ACT 28 30 c56e writing-endofstory ἐνέμεινεν δὲ διετίαν ὅλην ἐν ἰδίῳ μισθώματι 1 And he stayed for two whole years in his own rented house This is the beginning of information that Luke presents to bring the story of the book of Acts to a close. Your language may have its own way of presenting such information. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-endofstory]])
+ACT 28 30 a660 writing-pronouns ἐνέμεινεν 1 he stayed The pronoun **he** refers to Paul. It may be helpful to clarify this for your readers. Alternate translation: “Paul stayed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
+ACT 28 31 wv1l figs-abstractnouns τὴν Βασιλείαν τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 the kingdom of God If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of a **kingdom**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “how God had begun to rule as king” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 28 31 a661 figs-abstractnouns μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας ἀκωλύτως 1 with all boldness, without hindrance If your language does not use abstract nouns for the ideas of **boldness** and **hindrance**, you could express the same ideas in other ways. Alternate translation: “very boldly, with no one hindering him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+ACT 28 31 a662 figs-hyperbole μετὰ πάσης παρρησίας 1 with all boldness Luke says **all** here as a generalization for emphasis. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use a different way to express the emphasis. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hyperbole]])
\ No newline at end of file
diff --git a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
index 867dcab0ce..951de4fc92 100644
--- a/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
+++ b/en_tn_67-REV.tsv
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
Book Chapter Verse ID SupportReference OrigQuote Occurrence GLQuote OccurrenceNote
-REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Revelation
1. Opening (1:1-20)
2. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
3. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
4. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
5. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
6. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
7. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
8. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
9. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
10. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
11. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)
### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?
The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.
### What is the Book of Revelation about?
John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?
John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Are the events of Revelation past or future?
Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.
Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.
### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?
No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?
One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?
The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### Periods of time
John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.
### The verb “Behold” which occurs often in the book of Revelation
**Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say or do. The word literally means “look!” or “see!” However, in this case, the expression denotes the act of seeing figuratively by means of giving notice and attention. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it \\[the earth\\] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
+REV front intro xx8l 0 # Introduction to Revelation
## Part 1: General Introduction
### Outline of the Book of Revelation
1. Opening (1:1-20)
2. Letters to the seven churches (2:1-3:22)
3. Vision of God in heaven, and a vision of the Lamb (4:1-11)
4. The seven seals (6:1-8:1)
5. The seven trumpets (8:2-13:18)
6. Worshipers of the Lamb, the martyrs, and the harvest of wrath (14:1-20)
7. The seven bowls (15:1-18:24)
8. Worship in heaven (19:1-10)
9. The Lamb’s judgment, the destruction of the beast, the thousand years, the destruction of Satan, and the final judgment (20:11-15)
10. The new creation and the new Jerusalem (21:1-22:5)
11. Jesus’ promise to return, the witness from the angels, John’s closing words, Christ’s message to his church, the invitation and the warning (22:6-21)
### Who wrote the Book of Revelation?
The author identified himself as John. This was probably the Apostle John. He wrote the Book of Revelation while on the island of Patmos. The Romans exiled John there for teaching people about Jesus.
### What is the Book of Revelation about?
John wrote the Book of Revelation to encourage believers to remain faithful even when they are suffering. John described visions he had of Satan and his followers fighting against and killing believers. In the visions God causes many terrible things to happen on the earth to punish wicked people. In the end, Jesus defeats Satan and his followers. Then Jesus comforts those who were faithful. And the believers will live forever with God in the new heavens and earth.
### How should the title of this book be translated?
Translators may choose to call this book by one of its traditional titles, “Revelation,” “The Revelation of Jesus Christ,” “The Revelation to Saint John,” or “The Apocalypse of John.” Or they may choose a possibly clearer title, such as “The Things that Jesus Christ Showed to John.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
### What type of writing is the Book of Revelation?
John used a special style of writing to describe his visions. John described what he saw by using many symbols. This style of writing is called symbolic prophecy or apocalyptic literature. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
## Part 2: Important Religious and Cultural Concepts
### Are the events of Revelation past or future?
Since early Christian times, scholars have interpreted Revelation differently. Some scholars think John described events that happened during his time. Some scholars think John described events happening from his time until the return of Jesus. Other scholars think John described events that will happen in a short period of time just before Christ returns.
Translators will not need to decide how to interpret the book before they translate it. Translators should leave the prophecies in the tenses that are used in the ULT.
### Are there any other books in the Bible like Revelation?
No other book of the Bible is like the Book of Revelation. But, passages in Ezekiel, Zechariah, and especially Daniel are similar in content and style to Revelation. It may be beneficial to translate Revelation at the same time as Daniel since they have some imagery and style in common.
## Part 3: Important Translation Issues
### Does one need to understand the Book of Revelation to translate it?
One does not need to understand all of the symbols in the Book of Revelation to translate it properly. Translators should not give possible meanings for the symbols or numbers in their translation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### How are the ideas of “holy” and “sanctify” represented in Revelation in the ULT?
The scriptures use these words to indicate any one of various ideas. For this reason, it is often difficult for translators to represent them well in their versions. In translating Revelation into English, the ULT uses the following principles:
* The meaning in two passages indicates moral holiness. Here, the ULT uses “holy.” (See: 14:12; 22:11)
* Usually the meaning in Revelation indicates a simple reference to Christians without implying any particular role filled by them. In these cases, the ULT uses “believer” or “believers.” (See: 5:8; 8:3, 4; 11:18; 13:7; 16:6; 17:6; 18:20, 24; 19:8; 20:9)
* Sometimes the meaning implies the idea of someone or something set apart for God alone. In these cases, the ULT uses “sanctify,” “set apart,” “dedicated to,” or “reserved for.”
The UST will often be helpful as translators think about how to represent these ideas in their own versions.
### Periods of time
John referred to various periods of time in Revelation. For example, there are many references to forty-two months, seven years, and three and a half days. Some scholars think these time periods are symbolic. Other scholars think these are actual time periods. The translator should treat these time periods as referencing actual periods of time. It is then up to the interpreter to determine their significance or what they may represent.
### The verb “Behold” which occurs often in the book of Revelation
**Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say or do. The word literally means “look!” or “see!” However, in this case, the expression denotes the act of seeing figuratively by means of giving notice and attention. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
### What are the major issues in the text of the Book of Revelation?
For the following verses, some modern versions of the Bible differ from older versions. The ULT text has the modern reading and puts the older reading in a footnote. If a translation of the Bible exists in the general region, translators should consider using the reading found in those versions. If not, translators are advised to follow the modern reading.
* “‘I am the alpha and the omega,’ says the Lord God, ‘the one who is, and who was, and who is to come, the Almighty’” (1:8). Some versions add the phrase “the Beginning and the End.”
* “the elders prostrated themselves and worshiped” (5:14). Some older versions read, “the twenty-four elders prostrated themselves and worshiped the one who lives forever and ever.”
* “so that a third of it \\[the earth\\] was burned up” (8:7). Some older versions do not include this phrase.
* “the one who is and who was” (11:17). Some versions add the phrase “and who is to come.”
* “they are blameless” (14:5). Some versions add the phrase “before the throne of God” (14:5).
* “the one who is and who was, the Holy One” (16:5). Some older versions read, “O Lord, the One who is and who was and who is to be.”
* “The nations will walk by the light of that city” (21:24). Some older versions read, “The nations that are saved will walk by the light of that city.”
* “Blessed are those who wash their robes” (22:14). Some older versions read “Blessed are those who do his commandments.”
* “God will take away his share in the tree of life and in the holy city” (22:19). Some older versions read, “God will take away his share in the book of life and in the holy city.”
(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-textvariants]])
REV 1 intro u1e2 0 # Revelation 1 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
### Outline of Chapter One of Revelation
I. The Introduction to Revelation
A. The Prologue (1:1-8)
1. The Preface (1:1-3)
2. The Address and the Doxology (1:4-6)
3. The Book’s Theme (1:7-8)
II. John’s Vision of Christ
B. John’s Appointment to Write the Book of Revelation (1:9-20)
1. The Initial Appointment to Write (1:9-11)
2. The Source of the Appointment (1:12-16)
3. The Appointment Repeated and Elaborated (1:17-20)
This chapter explains how the Book of Revelation records the vision John received on the island of Patmos.
Some translations set quotations from the Old Testament farther to the right on the page to make them easier to read. The ULT does this with the quoted words in verse 7.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven churches
John wrote this book to seven actual churches in Asia Minor, which is now the country of Turkey.
### White
The Bible often speaks of something that belongs to a person as being “white.” This is metaphor and metonym for that person living rightly and pleasing God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/righteous]])
### “Him who is, and who was, and who is to come”
God exists now. He has always existed. He will always exist. Your language may have a different way of saying this.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Blood
Blood is a metonym for death. Jesus “has released us from our sins by his blood.” John means that Jesus saved us from our sins by dying for us. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “He is coming with the clouds”
Jesus went into the clouds when he went up to heaven after God raised him from the dead. When Jesus returns, he will also be “with the clouds.” It is not clear whether he will be sitting or riding on clouds or coming in the clouds or “with the clouds” in some other way. Your translation should express this in a way that is natural in your language.
### “One like a son of man”
This refers to Jesus. You should translate the words “son of man” using the same words as you did in the Gospels for when Jesus called himself the “Son of Man.”
### “The angels of the seven churches”
The word “angels” here can also mean “messengers.” This might refer to heavenly beings, or to the messengers or leaders of these seven churches. John uses the same word “angel” (singular) in verse 1 and in many other places throughout the book. Your translation should also use the same word.
### The word “to keep” or “to obey”
The word “to keep” means “to pay attention to” or “to heed” or “to obey”. There are various ways to render the idea or meaning of this word “to keep” as a frequent idiomatic expression in the book of Revelation. Basically, the meaning of this idiom which can vary depending on the context of the book of Revelation. For example, see how you translated “to keep” in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md). If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use an equivalent idiom or use plain language. Alternate translation: “to take to heart” or “to continually consider” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
REV 1 1 rkh9 figs-abstractnouns ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the idea of **revelation**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “What God disclosed to Jesus Christ” or “The matters that God revealed to Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 1 1 kv41 figs-possession ἀποκάλυψις Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 General Information: This phrase could mean: (1) this book is **revelation** that came to Jesus from God. Alternate translation: “revelation to Jesus Christ” (2) this book is **revelation** that came from Jesus to the author of the book, namely John. Alternate translation: “revelation from Jesus Christ” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
@@ -25,12 +25,12 @@ REV 1 4 y9yh translate-blessing χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀ
REV 1 4 lsun figs-abstractnouns χάρις ὑμῖν καὶ εἰρήνη, ἀπὸ ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for the ideas of **grace** and **peace**, you could express the same idea in another way. Alternate translation: “May the one who is, and who was, and who is coming treat you kindly and give you peaceful relationships” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 1 4 unul figs-explicit ὁ ὢν, καὶ ὁ ἦν, καὶ ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 These three phrases all refer to God. If this might confuse your readers, you could say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “the God who is, and who was, and who is coming” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 1 4 qsu6 figs-metaphor ὁ ἐρχόμενος 1 who is to come Here, the phrase **who is coming** could refer to: (1) the future tense, to complete the idea that God exists in the past, present, and future. In other words, John uses **is coming** figuratively to state that God will exist in the future. Alternate translation: “who will be” or “who will still exist in the future” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]]) (2) the physical act of coming, when God will be present on earth for a final judgment.
-REV 1 4 x38p writing-symlanguage ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων 1 seven spirits The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. Here, the **seven spirits** could refer to: (1) The Spirit of God that is described with seven attributes in [Isaiah 11:2](../../isa/11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the sevenfold Holy Spirit”. (2) Seven individual spirits which serve God and that also might be the “seven angels” in [8:2](../08/02.md). Alternate translation: “the seven spirit beings” or “the seven angelic spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV 1 4 x38p writing-symlanguage ἑπτὰ πνευμάτων 1 seven spirits The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection. Here, the **seven spirits** could refer to: (1) The Spirit of God that is described with seven attributes in [Isaiah 11:2](../isa/11/02.md). Alternate translation: “the sevenfold Holy Spirit”. (2) Seven individual spirits which serve God and that also might be the “seven angels” in [8:2](../08/02.md). Alternate translation: “the seven spirit beings” or “the seven angelic spirits” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 1 5 w24x καὶ ἀπὸ Ἰησοῦ Χριστοῦ 1 and from Jesus Christ The first half of this verse continues the sentence from the previous verse. If you make this a new sentence, then you will need to repeat some of the information from the previous verse. Alternate translation: “And may grace be to you and peace also from Jesus Christ”
-REV 1 5 gz2n ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός 1 This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The phrase probably comes from [Psalm 89:37](../../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse comes from Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. Psalm 89 itself refers to the promises that God gave to David in [2 Samuel 7](../../2sa/07/01.md). So all of these titles describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises to David. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote. You may also want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or indentation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
-REV 1 5 l3h8 figs-idiom ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν 1 the firstborn from the dead This phrase **the firstborn from the dead** is an idiom meaning “the first person to die and become alive again”. The phrase probably alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death” or “the first person to come back to life to never die again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV 1 5 gz2n writing-quotations ὁ μάρτυς ὁ πιστός 1 This phrase **the faithful witness** is a title describing Jesus Christ. The phrase probably comes from [Psalm 89:37](../psa/89/37.md). Likewise, every title that is describing Jesus Christ in this verse comes from Psalm 89, including: **the firstborn from the dead** and **the ruler of the kings of the earth**. Psalm 89 itself refers to the promises that God gave to David in [2 Samuel 7](../2sa/07/01.md). So all of these titles describe Jesus Christ as the one who completes God’s promises to David. You may want to include some of this information in a footnote. You may also want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or indentation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV 1 5 l3h8 figs-idiom ὁ πρωτότοκος τῶν νεκρῶν 1 the firstborn from the dead This phrase **the firstborn from the dead** is an idiom meaning “the first person to die and become alive again”. The phrase probably alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../psa/89/27.md). If your readers would not understand this idiom, you could use plain language. Alternate translation: “the first person to be raised from death” or “the first person to come back to life to never die again” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
REV 1 5 j1xp grammar-collectivenouns τῶν νεκρῶν 1 from the dead The word **dead** is a singular noun that refers to a group of people. If your language does not use singular nouns in that way, you can use a different expression. Alternate translation: “from those who are dead” or “from those who have died” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/grammar-collectivenouns]])
-REV 1 5 gqw8 grammar-collectivenouns καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. This phrase alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../../psa/89/27.md). As with the previous phrases from [Psalm 89](../../psa/89/01.md), you may want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or formatting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV 1 5 gqw8 writing-quotations καὶ ὁ ἄρχων τῶν βασιλέων τῆς γῆς 1 This phrase **the ruler of the kings of the earth** is a title of Jesus Christ that describes his future dominion over the earth. This phrase alludes to [Psalm 89:27](../psa/89/27.md). As with the previous phrases from [Psalm 89](../psa/89/01.md), you may want to indicate the presence of an Old Testament quotation or allusion here by using a different typeface or formatting. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
REV 1 5 ttqn figs-infostructure τῷ ἀγαπῶντι ἡμᾶς 1 A new sentence begins here that continues through the rest of the next verse. This sentence praises Jesus Christ. If it is helpful for your readers, you may want to state the main verb here at the beginning of the sentence and then repeat it again in the next verse. You may also want to break this long sentence into two or more shorter sentences. Alternate translation: “May Jesus Christ receive glory and power always because he loves us” or “May Jesus Christ receive glory and power always. He is the one who loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-infostructure]])
REV 1 5 tqfs writing-pronouns τῷ 1 Here, **the one** refers to Jesus Christ. If this is not clear to your readers, you can say this explicitly. Alternate translation: “To Jesus Christ, who loves us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
REV 1 5 u6v7 figs-metaphor λύσαντι ἡμᾶς ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 has released us Here John uses **released** figuratively of forgiving people for their **sins**. If this would confuse your readers, you could express the meaning in a non-figurative way. Alternative translation: “has forgiven us for our sins” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -39,14 +39,14 @@ REV 1 5 jpnq figs-metonymy ἐκ τῶν ἁμαρτιῶν ἡμῶν 1 John u
REV 1 5 q64f figs-metonymy τῷ αἵματι αὐτοῦ 1 Here, **blood** figuratively represents the death of Christ on the cross. If this might confuse your readers, you could use a comparable word that stands for death or express the idea in non-figurative language. Alternate translation: “his death on the cross” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 1 6 nhfb figs-metaphor βασιλείαν 1 Here, **a kingdom** functions as a metaphor for the unity that believers have as they belong to each other and to God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the meaning of **kingdom** here explicitly. Alternate translation: “a group that belongs to God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 1 6 iq7j figs-metaphor ἱερεῖς 1 Here, the word **priests** functions as a metaphor for people who live to serve God. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate this meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “people who work” or “people who live” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV 1 6 nesy figs-abstractnouns βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ— αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for **glory** or **power**, you could express these ideas in other ways. Here, **power** refers to the authority that Jesus has to rule over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “may people glorify Jesus always and may he rule over everyone” or “may people honor Jesus always and may he reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
+REV 1 6 nesy figs-abstractnouns βασιλείαν, ἱερεῖς τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ— αὐτῷ ἡ δόξα καὶ τὸ κράτος 1 If your language does not use an abstract noun for **glory** or **power**, you could express these ideas in other ways. Here, **power** refers to the authority that Jesus has to rule over his kingdom. Alternate translation: “may people glorify Jesus and may he rule over everyone” or “may people honor Jesus always and may he reign” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 1 6 ne7x guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τῷ Θεῷ καὶ Πατρί αὐτοῦ 1 his God and Father Here, the words **God** and **Father** refer to one person, not two. This is God the Father who exists with the Son and the Holy Spirit as God. The name **Father** is an important title for God that describes the relationship between God and Jesus. Alternate translation: “for God, his Father” or “for God, who is the Father of Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/guidelines-sonofgodprinciples]])
REV 1 7 ldv8 figs-quotemarks ἰδοὺ, ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν, καὶ ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 General Information: The clauses **Behold, he is coming with the clouds**, **every eye will see him, even those who pierced him**, and **will mourn because of him** are quotations from the Old Testament. It may be helpful to your readers to indicate this by setting off all of this material with quotation marks or with whatever other punctuation or convention your language uses to indicate a quotation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-quotemarks]])
REV 1 7 mx1c figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Here, **Behold** is a word that focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. Alternate translation: “Listen carefully!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 1 7 bbqj writing-pronouns ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν 1 The pronoun **he** here refers to Jesus Christ. If this is unclear to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Jesus is coming with the clouds” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
-REV 1 7 isa6 ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν 1 This phrase probably refers to [Daniel 7:13](../../dan/07/13.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
+REV 1 7 isa6 ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν 1 This phrase probably refers to [Daniel 7:13](../dan/07/13.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
REV 1 7 k0qo ἔρχεται μετὰ τῶν νεφελῶν 1 Alternate translation: “He approaches on the clouds”
-REV 1 7 nxqe ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 These phrases probably refer to [Zechariah 12:10](../../Zech/12/10.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
+REV 1 7 nxqe ὄψεται αὐτὸν πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς, καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν, καὶ κόψονται ἐπ’ αὐτὸν πᾶσαι αἱ φυλαὶ τῆς γῆς 1 These phrases probably refer to [Zechariah 12:10](../Zech/12/10.md). You may want to include this information in a footnote.
REV 1 7 hb4i figs-synecdoche πᾶς ὀφθαλμὸς 1 every eye Since people see with their eyes, the word **eye** is used to refer to people. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “every person” or “everyone” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
REV 1 7 ndf6 figs-metonymy καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν 1 pierced him Jesus’ hands and feet were **pierced** when he was nailed to the cross and a soldier **pierced** his side with a spear. Here **those who pierced him** refers to the people who killed him. If this would be misunderstood in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “even those who pierced and killed him” or “even those who stabbed him to death” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 1 7 ewtl figs-ellipsis καὶ οἵτινες αὐτὸν ἐξεκέντησαν 1 John is leaving out some of the words that a clause would need in many languages to be complete. If your readers might misunderstand this, you could supply these words from the previous clause. Alternate translation: “even those who pierced him will see him” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
@@ -65,15 +65,15 @@ REV 1 9 o6k9 figs-metaphor ἐν Ἰησοῦ 1 Here John pictures **Jesus** as
REV 1 9 c1a9 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ 1 because of the word of God John uses **word of God** figuratively to describe the gospel message that came from God and that John proclaimed by using words. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “because of the message from God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 1 9 sim8 figs-possession τὴν μαρτυρίαν Ἰησοῦ 1 the testimony about Jesus John is using the possessive form to describe the **testimony** about **Jesus** that John proclaimed. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the testimony that I proclaimed about Jesus” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
REV 1 10 s2sw figs-idiom ἐγενόμην ἐν Πνεύματι 1 I was in the Spirit Here, **in the Spirit** could mean: (1) God’s Spirit (the Holy Spirit) took control of John in order to influence John to receive divine revelation. Alternate translation: “I was influenced by the Spirit of God” or “God’s Spirit took control of me” (2) God caused John’s spirit to be in a state so that he could perceive revelation. Alternate translation: “God influenced my spirit” or “God took control of my spirit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV 1 10 lnj2 τῇ Κυριακῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 the Lord’s day Here, **the Lord’s day** refers specifically to Sunday, which was the day of the week when believers gathered to worship together in honor of the Lord’s resurrection. If this is unclear to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Sunday, the Lord’s day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV 1 10 lnj2 figs-explicit τῇ Κυριακῇ ἡμέρᾳ 1 the Lord’s day Here, **the Lord’s day** refers specifically to Sunday, which was the day of the week when believers gathered to worship together in honor of the Lord’s resurrection. If this is unclear to your readers, you could express the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “Sunday, the Lord’s day” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 1 10 fa68 figs-simile φωνὴν μεγάλην ὡς σάλπιγγος 1 loud voice like a trumpet The **voice** was very **loud** so that the noise sounded **like a trumpet**. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a voice as loud as a trumpet being blown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 1 10 ggph figs-metonymy φωνὴν μεγάλην 1 Here, **a loud voice** refers to a person speaking loudly, who is later revealed to be Jesus Christ. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a sound of someone speaking loudly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 1 10 fu9q translate-unknown ὡς σάλπιγγος 1 A **trumpet** was an instrument for making a loud sound that, in John’s time, was probably made of metal. If you do not have trumpets in your culture, use a word in your language for a loud instrument. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
-REV 1 11 y4ab writing-pronouns λεγούσης 1 Here, **saying** introduces a quotation. What follows is what the voice of the previous verse said. Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “That voice said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
+REV 1 11 y4ab writing-quotations λεγούσης 1 Here, **saying** introduces a quotation. What follows is what the voice of the previous verse said. Consider natural ways of introducing direct quotations in your language. You may want to start a new sentence here. Alternate translation: “That voice said” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
REV 1 11 kq6x translate-names Ἔφεσον…Σμύρναν…Πέργαμον…Θυάτειρα…Σάρδεις…Φιλαδέλφιαν…Λαοδίκιαν 1 Smyrna … Pergamum … Thyatira … Sardis … Philadelphia … Laodicea These are names of cities in the region of western Asia Minor that are in the modern area of southwestern Turkey today. The logic of the order seems to begin with Ephesus, the most important city at the time and then proceed to move clockwise until it reaches the city that is the furthest south at Laodicea. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
REV 1 12 r89l figs-metonymy τὴν φωνὴν ἥτις 1 whose voice Here, **voice** refers figuratively to the person speaking. The context indicates that Jesus Christ is the one speaking here. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “who” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 1 12 flem ἑπτὰ λυχνίας χρυσᾶς 1 Here, **seven golden lampstands** refers to seven poles that each hold one or more oil lamps at the top. These seven lamp holders are made of gold. Apparently these lamp holders represent the seven assemblies of believers in the seven cities mentioned in the previous verse. The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection, so it may be that these seven churches represent Christ’s church as a whole, that is, all believers. Alternate translation: “seven golden stands holding oil lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV 1 13 xmx7 figs-simile ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου 1 son of man The expression **like a son of man** describes a human figure that recalls the same phrase from [Daniel 7:13](../../dan/07/13.md). The point of this comparison is that the figure John saw looked like a human. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a being that looked like a man” or “a figure that resembled a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 1 12 flem writing-symlanguage ἑπτὰ λυχνίας χρυσᾶς 1 Here, **seven golden lampstands** refers to seven poles that each hold one or more oil lamps at the top. These seven lamp holders are made of gold. Apparently these lamp holders represent the seven assemblies of believers in the seven cities mentioned in the previous verse. The number **seven** is often used in the Bible as a symbol for completeness and perfection, so it may be that these seven churches represent Christ’s church as a whole, that is, all believers. Alternate translation: “seven golden stands holding oil lamps” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV 1 13 xmx7 figs-simile ὅμοιον Υἱὸν Ἀνθρώπου 1 son of man The expression **like a son of man** describes a human figure that recalls the same phrase from [Daniel 7:13](../dan/07/13.md). The point of this comparison is that the figure John saw looked like a human. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “a being that looked like a man” or “a figure that resembled a human being” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 1 13 y6qk translate-unknown ζώνην χρυσᾶν 1 a golden sash A **sash** was a strip of cloth worn around the chest. This one had the appearance of gold and may have been woven from golden threads. A **sash** is not a belt that is worn around the waist. Alternate translation: “strap” or “band” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
REV 1 14 hqz1 figs-hendiadys ἡ δὲ κεφαλὴ αὐτοῦ καὶ αἱ τρίχες 1 Here, the phrase **head and hair** refers to the hair that is on the head. It does not mean that the skin of the head was white. Alternate translation: “the hair on his head” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-hendiadys]])
REV 1 14 mg7r figs-doublet λευκαὶ, ὡς ἔριον λευκόν ὡς χιών 1 John uses repetition here in order to emphasize how white the hair was. If your language does not use repetition in this way, you could use one phrase and provide emphasis in another way. Alternate translation: “extremely white like wool or snow” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
@@ -89,12 +89,12 @@ REV 1 16 cb26 figs-simile ὡς ὁ ἥλιος φαίνει ἐν τῇ δυν
REV 1 17 vz4u writing-pronouns καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ 1 Here, the subject of **and he placed his right hand on me** should be assumed from earlier in the context at verse [1:13](../01/13.md). Verse [1:13](../01/13.md) mentions one **like a son of man** as a description of Jesus Christ. If this might confuse your readers, you could explicitly state the subject as Jesus. Alternate translation: “Jesus placed his right hand on me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-pronouns]])
REV 1 17 jw5r translate-symaction καὶ ἔθηκεν τὴν δεξιὰν αὐτοῦ ἐπ’ ἐμὲ 1 He placed his right hand on me Here, the phrase **and he placed his right hand on me** signifies a cultural gesture or symbolic action that expresses comfort and assurance for the person who is need of encouragement at the moment of fear. The symbolic action has the accompanying verbal expression of **Do not be afraid** so as to illustrate the significance and symbolism of the cultural gesture. Alternate translation: “and he touched me with his right hand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
REV 1 17 uc3d figs-merism ἐγώ εἰμι ὁ πρῶτος καὶ ὁ ἔσχατος 1 I am the first and the last Here, **the first and the last** refers to the eternal nature of Jesus because he is God. He existed before anything else and he will continue to exist after everything else is gone. In this expression, **first** refers to what is before everything and **last** refers to what is after everything. This is similar to the use of alpha and omega in [verse 8](../01/08.md). If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression or express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “the one who existed before everything and will exist after everything” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
-REV 1 18 zm05 καὶ ὁ ζῶν καὶ ἐγενόμην νεκρὸς 1 Here, **the one who lives** also refers to the eternal nature of Jesus as God. It could refer to: (1) God possessing eternal life in himself. Alternate translation: “the living one” (2) God being the source of life. Alternate translation: “the one who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV 1 18 zm05 figs-explicit καὶ ὁ ζῶν καὶ ἐγενόμην νεκρὸς 1 Here, **the one who lives** also refers to the eternal nature of Jesus as God. It could refer to: (1) God possessing eternal life in himself. Alternate translation: “the living one” (2) God being the source of life. Alternate translation: “the one who gives life” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 1 18 cc7c figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 Here, **behold** focuses the attention of the listener on what the speaker is about to say. Your language may have a comparable expression that you can use in your translation. See how you translated **behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). Alternate translation: “know this” or “you must understand” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 1 18 a4e2 figs-metaphor ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου 1 I have the keys of death and of Hades John uses **keys** here figuratively to refer to authority or power. Just as **keys** have the ability to control the opening or locking of a door, so Jesus has the power to control death and Hades. If this might confuse your readers, you could express the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I have the power over death and over Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 1 18 pgql figs-explicit ἔχω τὰς κλεῖς τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου 1 This clause implies that Jesus can give life to those who have died and let them out of **Hades**. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could express that explicitly. Alternate translation: “I have the power to give life to people who have died and to let them out of Hades” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 1 18 acrx translate-transliterate τοῦ θανάτου καὶ τοῦ ᾍδου 1 The word **Hades** is the Greek name for the place where the spirits of dead people go. Many Bible translations just use this word as it is, and others translate it, using a word for the place of the dead in their language. The words **death** and **Hades** mean almost the same thing. Through **death** a person enters **Hades**. Alternate translation: “to release people from death, that is, from Hades” or “to free people from death and from the grave” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
-REV 1 19 eupc figs-litany ἃ εἶδες, καὶ ἃ εἰσὶν, καὶ ἃ μέλλει γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, **what you have seen, both the things that are and what must happen after these things** refers to the things that Jesus is showing to John throughout this book. These clauses could indicate (1) events in two time periods, present and future. In this case, the tense of **have seen** is from the perspective of John when he is writing. He cannot write something until he has seen it. Alternate translation: “what you see, that is, the things that exist now, and what must happen afterwards” or (2) events in three time periods, past, present, and future. Alternate translation: “what you have seen, what is, and what must happen afterwards”
+REV 1 19 eupc figs-litany ἃ εἶδες, καὶ ἃ εἰσὶν, καὶ ἃ μέλλει γενέσθαι μετὰ ταῦτα 1 Here, **what you have seen, both the things that are and what must happen after these things** refers to the things that Jesus is showing to John throughout this book. These clauses could indicate (1) events in two time periods, present and future. In this case, the tense of **have seen** is from the perspective of John when he is writing. He cannot write something until he has seen it. Alternate translation: “what you see, that is, the things that exist now, and what must happen afterwards” or (2) events in three time periods, past, present, and future. Alternate translation: “what you have seen, what is, and what must happen afterwards” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
REV 1 20 ytmk figs-explicit τὸ μυστήριον τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων 1 Here, **the mystery** refers to a secret or symbolic meaning of the vision of the **seven stars**. If it would be helpful in your language, you could express this meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the secret meaning of the seven stars” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 1 20 ttic figs-ellipsis τὸ μυστήριον τῶν ἑπτὰ ἀστέρων, οὓς εἶδες ἐπὶ τῆς δεξιᾶς μου, καὶ τὰς ἑπτὰ λυχνίας τὰς χρυσᾶς 1 This sentence leaves out some of the words that in many languages a sentence would need in order to be complete. You can supply these words if it would be helpful in your language. Alternate translation: “I will explain the mystery of the seven stars that you saw in my right hand, and the seven golden lampstands” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
REV 1 20 fl5d writing-symlanguage λυχνίας 1 lampstands See how you translated this word in [verse 12](../01/12.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -149,7 +149,7 @@ REV 2 10 a9ue figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 See how you translated **Behold** in [
REV 2 10 agx4 figs-idiom μέλλει βάλλειν ὁ διάβολος ἐξ ὑμῶν εἰς φυλακὴν, ἵνα πειρασθῆτε 1 The devil is about to throw some of you into prison Here, **to throw** is a idiomatic expression for putting someone into prison or jail. The enemies of the Christians will test them, not God himself. Translators should avoid making the impression to their readers that God is in league with Satan as an author of evil or temptation. Alternate translation: “the devil will soon cause others to put some of you in prison” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
REV 2 10 tlvz figs-youcrowd ἐξ ὑμῶν 1 See how you translated the second person pronouns and references in [Revelation 2:2](../02/02.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-youcrowd]])
REV 2 10 snk8 figs-metaphor ἡμερῶν δέκα 1 Here, **ten days** is probably metaphorical for a short time or limited amount of time for testing. Daniel 1:14 is most likely the source of the expression for a short time of testing. The translator should not avoid, however, rendering the time as a literal length of time of ten days, in contrast to some unspecified amount of time in a metaphorical expression. Alternate translation: “for a short time of testing” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV 2 10 f5t1 figs-metaphor γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου 1 Be faithful until death The use of the word **until** does not mean that you should stop being faithful at death. Rather, the idea is to be faithful even to the point of death. Alternate translation: “Be faithful to me even if they kill you”
+REV 2 10 f5t1 figs-metaphor γίνου πιστὸς ἄχρι θανάτου 1 Be faithful until death The use of the word **until** does not mean that you should stop being faithful at death. Rather, the idea is to be faithful even to the point of death. Alternate translation: “Be faithful to me even if they kill you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 2 10 zhj8 figs-possession τὸν στέφανον τῆς ζωῆς 1 the crown of life Here, **the crown of life** refers as a metaphor to the reward of eternal life itself. Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the crown or the wreath as the prize of life itself. Eternal life is the reward in the metaphor of a crown. Alternate translation: “life as your crown” or “life as your wreath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
REV 2 11 g7zq figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 2 11 dc3n figs-123person ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one … hear See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
@@ -284,11 +284,11 @@ REV 3 8 h90i figs-idiom μικρὰν ἔχεις δύναμιν 1 Here, the ph
REV 3 8 xyw6 figs-idiom ἐτήρησάς 1 you have obeyed my word See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
REV 3 8 wsws figs-possession μου τὸν λόγον 1 Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the **word** or words that he spoke when he taught the believers in the city of Philadelphia. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the word that I spoke” or “my teaching” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
REV 3 8 b3kz figs-metonymy τὸ ὄνομά μου 1 my name Here, **my name** is a metonym for the person who has that name, which in this case, is Jesus. If your readers would not understand this metonym, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “me” or “the name that I have” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 3 9 vfkb figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ … ἰδοὺ 1 See how you translated **Behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 3 9 vfkb figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ…ἰδοὺ 1 See how you translated **Behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 3 9 x78m figs-metaphor συναγωγῆς τοῦ Σατανᾶ 1 synagogue of Satan Here, people who gather to obey or to honor **Satan** are spoken of as if they were in a **synagogue**. A **synagogue** is a place of worship and teaching for the Jewish people. See how you translated this same phrase in [Revelation 2:9](../02/09.md). In that verse and its context Jesus also declares there that certain Jewish people were not acting like true Jews as the representative people of God. The translator should retain here in this verse the metaphor and simply define the figure of speech of a **synagogue of Satan** in an explanatory note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 3 9 q496 translate-symaction προσκυνήσουσιν 1 bow down Here, to **bow down** in front of a person’s feet represents a sign of submission. Thus, the action of bowing down is not a symbolic gesture that figuratively expresses worship. On the contrary, the gesture of bowing down symbolizes respect or obeisance. If there is a gesture with similar meaning in your culture, you could consider using it here in your translation. Alternate translation: “bow down in submission” or “prostrate themselves” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-symaction]])
REV 3 9 ah4w figs-synecdoche ἐνώπιον τῶν ποδῶν σου 1 before your feet Here, **feet** represents the person or the people before whom these individuals from the **synagogue of Satan** bow down. If this figure of speech of synecdoche would be misunderstood in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your culture or plain language. Alternate translation: “before you” or “to you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-synecdoche]])
-REV 3 10 f9vi figs-idiom ἐτήρησας … τηρήσω 1 See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md) for the meaning of the first instance of the word in this verse. However, the second instance of this word in this verse has a special sense of keeping someone safe or protected from something that will cause harm or injury to them. Thus, there is a wordplay between two senses of keeping within this verse in this case here. The translator should attempt to maintain the wordplay in his translation of both instances of the word in this verse, as the UST maintains in this verse and its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV 3 10 f9vi figs-idiom ἐτήρησας…τηρήσω 1 See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md) for the meaning of the first instance of the word in this verse. However, the second instance of this word in this verse has a special sense of keeping someone safe or protected from something that will cause harm or injury to them. Thus, there is a wordplay between two senses of keeping within this verse in this case here. The translator should attempt to maintain the wordplay in his translation of both instances of the word in this verse, as the UST maintains in this verse and its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
REV 3 10 k8mb figs-possession τὸν λόγον τῆς ὑπομονῆς μου 1 Jesus is using the possessive form to describe the **word** or command that he spoke when he taught the believers in the city of Philadelphia. If this is not clear in your language, you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the word that I spoke about steadfastness” or “my teaching on steadfastness” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-possession]])
REV 3 10 y577 figs-abstractnouns τῆς ὑπομονῆς 1 If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun **steadfastness**, you can express it with the verb “to endure.” See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:9](../01/09.md) and in [Revelation 2:2](../02/02.md). Alternate translation: “to suffer patiently” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 3 10 ql9y figs-idiom τῆς ὥρας 1 The translator may wish to explain that **hour** is not sixty minutes. Rather, the **hour** is a moment of time, or a time period, of testing. If this idiom is not clear in your language, then you could say the meaning explicitly. Alternate translation: “the time” or “the moment” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
@@ -296,13 +296,13 @@ REV 3 10 gv5g figs-possession τῆς ὥρας τοῦ πειρασμοῦ 1 I
REV 3 10 e6bw figs-metaphor τῆς μελλούσης ἔρχεσθαι 1 is coming Here, **to come** describes future being or existence. If your readers would not understand what it means for future existence **to come**, then you could use an equivalent metaphor from your culture. Alternatively, you could express the meaning in a nonfigurative way. Alternative translation: “that will occur” or “that is about to be” or “that is about to exist” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 3 11 ih12 figs-explicit ἔρχομαι ταχύ 1 I am coming soon Here, **coming quickly** implies an arrival of Jesus to judge. It is understood that Jesus is **coming** in order to judge. If it would be helpful to your readers, you could indicate the implicit meaning in an explicit way. Alternate translation: “I am coming to judge quickly” or “I am coming to judge soon” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 3 11 n9a9 figs-idiom κράτει ὃ ἔχεις 1 Hold to what you have See how you translated the verb to **Hold fast to** in [Revelation 2:13](../02/13.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV 3 11 a4m5 figs-metaphor τὸν στέφανόν 1 crown Here, **crown** stands for a reward. See how you translated “victory prize” in [Revelation 2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 3 11 a4m5 figs-metaphor τὸν στέφανόν 1 crown Here, **crown** stands for a reward or a victory prize. See how you translated **crown** in [Revelation 2:10](../02/10.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 3 12 px36 figs-genericnoun ὁ νικῶν 1 The one who conquers, I will make a pillar in the temple of my God See how you translated this generic noun phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md). For the metaphorical expression **one who conquers** that occurs often in chapters two and three of the book of Revelation (see Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, 26; 3:5, 12, 21), please see the explanatory note for this generic noun phrase **one who conquers** in the chapter two introduction. Alternate translation: “anyone who conquers” or “all who conquer” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-genericnoun]])
-REV 3 12 xiwx figs-metaphor ποιήσω αὐτὸν στῦλον ἐν τῷ ναῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ μου 1 The **pillar** represents an important and permanent part of God’s kingdom. Alternate translation: “I will make him strong, like a pillar in the temple of my God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 3 12 xiwx figs-metaphor ποιήσω αὐτὸν στῦλον ἐν τῷ ναῷ τοῦ Θεοῦ μου 1 Jesus is speaking of victorious believers as if they were a **pillar** in the temple of God. Here, a **pillar** represents an important and permanent part of God’s kingdom. If it would be clearer in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “I will make him strong, like a pillar in the temple of my God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 3 13 u5jk figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 3 13 ug5m figs-123person ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one … hear See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
REV 3 13 cm7r figs-idiom τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 Here, **the Spirit** most likely refers to God’s Spirit, or simply the Holy Spirit of God’s triune nature, in contrast to the spirit of the writer or author which one finds in [Revelation 1:10](../01/10.md). In other words, the Holy Spirit addresses the messages and contents of each letter written to each of the seven churches which are addressed in chapters two and three (see Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, 29: 3:6, 13, 22). See the chapter introductions for chapter two and for chapter three to read this same same explanatory note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV 3 14 r6bz translate-names καὶ τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν Φιλαδελφίᾳ ἐκκλησίας γράψον 1 General Information: This is the beginning of the message to the angel of the church in **Laodicea**. **Laodicea** is the name of one of the seven churches, or seven assemblies of believers, which existed in southwestern Asia Minor when John wrote the book of Revelation. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
+REV 3 14 r6bz translate-names καὶ τῷ ἀγγέλῳ τῆς ἐν Λαοδικίᾳ ἐκκλησίας γράψον 1 General Information: This is the beginning of the message to the angel of the church in **Laodicea**. **Laodicea** is the name of one of the seven churches, or seven assemblies of believers, which existed in southwestern Asia Minor when John wrote the book of Revelation. See how you translated this in [Revelation 1:11](../01/11.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-names]])
REV 3 14 jg3b figs-explicit τῷ ἀγγέλῳ 1 the angel See how you translated **angel** in [Revelation 1:20](../01/20.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 3 14 wzg9 writing-quotations τάδε λέγει 1 Laodicea See how you translated the phrase **says these things** in [Revelation 2:1](../02/01.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-quotations]])
REV 3 14 f65v ὁ Ἀμήν 1 the Amen Here, **The Amen** is a name for Jesus Christ. He guarantees God’s promises by saying amen to them.
@@ -326,7 +326,7 @@ REV 3 21 un17 guidelines-sonofgodprinciples τοῦ Πατρός μου 1 my Fat
REV 3 22 m13x figs-metonymy ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one who has an ear, hear See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 3 22 mjv6 figs-123person ὁ ἔχων οὖς, ἀκουσάτω 1 Let the one … hear See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:7](../02/07.md) (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-123person]])
REV 3 22 vnr6 figs-idiom τὸ Πνεῦμα 1 Here, **the Spirit** most likely refers to God’s Spirit, or simply the Holy Spirit of God’s triune nature, in contrast to the spirit of the writer or author which one finds in [Revelation 1:10](../01/10.md). In other words, the Holy Spirit addresses the messages and contents of each letter written to each of the seven churches which are addressed in chapters two and three (see Revelation 2:7, 11, 17, 29: 3:6, 13, 22). See the chapter introductions for chapter two and for chapter three to read this same same explanatory note. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
-REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 4 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.
John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald
These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).
### Giving glory to God
God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Difficult images
Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV 4 intro cl9f 0 # Revelation 4 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 8 and 11.
John has finished describing the letters to the churches. He now begins to describe a vision that God showed him.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Jasper, carnelian, and emerald
These words refer to kinds of special stones that the people in John’s day considered valuable. It may be difficult for you to translate these words if people in your culture do not value special kinds of stones.
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).
### Giving glory to God
God’s glory is the great beauty and radiant majesty that God has because he is God. Other Bible writers describe it as if it were a light so bright that no one can look at it. No one can give God this kind of glory, because it is already his. When people give glory to God or when God receives glory, people say that God has the glory that is his, that it is right for God to have that glory, and that people should worship God because he has that glory. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/glory]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worthy]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### Difficult images
Such things as bolts of lightning coming from the throne, lamps that are spirits, and a sea in front of the throne may be difficult to imagine, and so the words for them may be difficult to translate. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
REV 4 1 ws2q 0 General Information: John begins to describe his vision of the throne of God.
REV 4 1 vh4i μετὰ ταῦτα 1 After these things See how you translated this phrase in [Revelation 2:1-3:22](../02/01.md) Alternate translation: “After I had just seen these things”
REV 4 1 suqj figs-metaphor ἰδοὺ 1 See how you translated **behold** in [Revelation 1:7](../01/07.md). Here, it is more natural to avoid the usual “pay attention” in the UST. The translator should probably be less literal in the translation here of **behold** due to the unique context (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -358,7 +358,7 @@ REV 4 10 sly8 translate-symaction βαλοῦσιν τοὺς στεφάνους
REV 4 10 wvf9 βαλοῦσιν 1 lay This could refers to: (1) placing something. (2) throwing down forcibly, as of something worthless ([Revelation 2:22](../02/22.md)). The reader should understand that the elders are acting respectfully.
REV 4 11 idj1 ὁ Κύριος καὶ ὁ Θεὸς ἡμῶν 1 our Lord and our God Here, **our Lord and God** is one person, the one who was sitting on the throne.
REV 4 11 q91l figs-metonymy λαβεῖν τὴν δόξαν καὶ τὴν τιμὴν καὶ τὴν δύναμιν 1 to receive the glory and the honor and the power Here, **the glory and the honor and the power** are things that God always has. Being praised for having them is spoken of as receiving them. Alternate translation: “to be praised for your glory, honor, and power” or “for everyone to praise you because you are glorious, honorable, and powerful” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 5 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sealed scroll
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Christian prayers
The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 5 intro g7ey 0 # Revelation 5 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this in verses 9-13.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Sealed scroll
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, “the one who was seated on the throne” had written the scroll. Only the person called “the Lion of the tribe of Judah, the Root of David” and “the Lamb” had the authority to open it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/other/scroll]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/authority]])
### Twenty-four elders
Elders are church leaders. Twenty-four elders may be symbolic of the whole church through the ages. There were twelve tribes in Old Testament Israel and twelve apostles in the New Testament church. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### Christian prayers
The prayers of Christians are described as incense. Christian prayers have a good smell to God. He is pleased when Christians pray.
### Seven spirits of God
These spirits are the seven spirits of [Revelation 1:4](../rev/01/04.md).
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
The “Lion of the tribe of Judah” and the “Root of David” are metaphors that refer to Jesus. Jesus descended from the tribe of Judah and the family of David. Lions are fierce, and all animals and people are afraid of them, so they are a metaphor for a king whom everyone obeys. The words **Root of David** speak of Israel’s King David as if he were a seed that God had planted and of Jesus as if he were a root growing from that seed. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 5 1 txr5 0 Connecting Statement: John continues to describe what he saw in his vision of the throne of God.
REV 5 1 w3yi καὶ εἶδον 1 Then I saw Alternate translation: “After I saw those things, I saw”
REV 5 1 u3br τοῦ καθημένου ἐπὶ τοῦ θρόνου 1 the one who was seated on the throne This is the same **one** as in [Revelation 4:2-3](../04/02.md).
@@ -392,7 +392,7 @@ REV 5 9 voro ἄξιος 1 See how you translated **worthy** in [Revelation 4:
REV 5 9 yu7h figs-activepassive ἐσφάγης 1 For you were slaughtered Here, **you were slaughtered** is a passive verbal phrase that can be turned into an active verbal expression. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “they slaughtered you” or “people killed you” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 5 9 qtv5 figs-metonymy ἐν τῷ αἵματί σου 1 with your blood Here, **blood** is a metonym that substitutes for blood. The phrase **with your blood** can mean “by your death” or “by dying.” Since **blood** represents a person’s life, losing the blood represents a death or the act of dying. If your readers would not understand this, you could use an equivalent expression or plain language. Alternate translation: “with your death” or “with your act of dying.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 5 9 zzc7 figs-litany ἐκ πάσης φυλῆς, καὶ γλώσσης, καὶ λαοῦ, καὶ ἔθνους 1 from every tribe, language, people, and nation The clause **from every tribe and tongue and people and nation** represents a litany. The list in this litany represents all **people** of the earth and includes every ethnic group that the world contains. Use words in your language that someone would use to include all types of people, races, and ethnic groups which inhabit the world. Alternate translation: “from every ethnic group and tongue and people and nation” or “from every tribe and tongue and race and nation.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-litany]])
-REV 5 10 wn87 βασιλείαν καὶ ἱερεῖς 1 See how you translated **kingdom** and **priests** in [Revelation 1:06](../01/06.md).
+REV 5 10 wn87 βασιλείαν καὶ ἱερεῖς 1 See how you translated **kingdom** and **priests** in [Revelation 1:6](../01/06.md).
REV 5 11 xuy1 translate-numbers μυριάδες μυριάδων καὶ χιλιάδες χιλιάδων 1 ten thousands of ten thousands and thousands of thousands Here, **myriads** and **thousands** refer to numbers that represent so many in their number that people cannot count them. The numbers **myriads** and **thousands** simply mean numbers that are so great that they are countless. If people will not understand these numbers in your target language, then you can simply use natural expressions in your language for numbers that are so great that one cannot count them. Use expressions in your language that show huge numbers that are difficult to count. Alternate translation: “millions” or “too many thousands to count” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
REV 5 12 m6hy ἄξιόν 1 See how you translated **Worthy** in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md).
REV 5 12 xzbc writing-symlanguage τὸ Ἀρνίον 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -400,48 +400,52 @@ REV 5 12 gnv1 figs-activepassive λαβεῖν 1 Worthy is the Lamb who has been
REV 5 12 w0dv figs-abstractnouns λαβεῖν τὴν δύναμιν, καὶ πλοῦτον, καὶ σοφίαν, καὶ ἰσχὺν, καὶ τιμὴν, καὶ δόξαν, καὶ εὐλογίαν 1 If your readers would misunderstand these abstract nouns, you can express them as verbs. See how you translated a similar sentence in [Revelation 4:11](../04/11.md). Alternate translation: “for everyone to honor, glorify, and praise him because he is powerful, wealthy, wise, and strong” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 5 13 sad6 figs-merism ἐν τῷ οὐρανῷ, καὶ ἐπὶ τῆς γῆς, καὶ ὑποκάτω τῆς γῆς 1 in heaven and on the earth and under the earth Here, the entire clause and all of its descriptions of parts of the cosmos or universe represent a merism. Essentially, the entire clause means everywhere. See how you translated this in [Revelation 5:3](../05/03.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
REV 5 13 l2sn writing-symlanguage τῷ Ἀρνίῳ 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV 5 14 j2f3 ἀμήν! 1 See how you translated **Amen** in [Revelation 1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 6 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 5 14 j2f3 writing-symlanguage ἀμήν! 1 See how you translated **Amen** in [Revelation 1:6](../01/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
+REV 6 intro zkn7 0 # Revelation 6 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
The author describes what happened after the Lamb opens each of the first six seals. The Lamb does not open the seventh seal until Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven Seals
Kings and important people in John’s time wrote important documents on large pieces of paper or animal skin. They then rolled them up and sealed them with wax so they would stay closed. Only the person to whom the document was written had the authority to open it by breaking the seal. In this chapter, the Lamb opens the seals. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### The Four Horsemen
As the Lamb opens each of the first four seals, the author describes horsemen riding different colored horses. The colors of the horses seem to symbolize how the rider will affect the earth.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/lamb]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Similes
In verses 12-14, the author uses several similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 6 1 q571 writing-symlanguage τὸ Ἀρνίον 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
-REV 6 1 g13d translate-ordinal μίαν ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the initial of the seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 1 g13d translate-ordinal μίαν ἐκ τῶν ἑπτὰ 1 If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “the initial of the seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
REV 6 1 i392 translate-unknown τῶν ἑπτὰ σφραγίδων 1 Connecting Statement: See how you translated **seven seals** in [Revelation 5:1](../05/01.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
REV 6 1 v9td figs-simile ὡς φωνῇ βροντῆς 1 Here, **one of the living creatures** speaks with a very loud voice. John is using **thunder** figuratively in a simile to mean a very loud noise for the voice. Alternate translation: “as with a noise of thunder” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV 6 2 t2qg figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος 1 he was given a crown If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 6 3 bs66 translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν δευτέραν 1 the second seal The word **second** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 3 i1p4 translate-ordinal τοῦ δευτέρου ζῴου 1 the second living creature The word **second** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next living creature” or “living creature number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 4 qg8s ἐξῆλθεν…πυρρός 1 came out—fiery red This can the stated as a second sentence. Alternate translation: “came out. It was red like fire” or “came out. It was bright red”
-REV 6 4 w57m figs-activepassive τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπ’ αὐτὸν, ἐδόθη αὐτῷ 1 To its rider was given permission If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “God gave permission to its rider” or “its rider received permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 6 4 je64 figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ μάχαιρα μεγάλη 1 This rider was given a huge sword If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “this rider received a huge sword” or “God gave this rider a huge sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 6 5 v4us translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τρίτην 1 the third seal The word **third** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 5 zec1 translate-ordinal τοῦ τρίτου ζῴου 1 the third living creature The word **third** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next living creature” or “living creature number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 5 rm4y ζυγὸν 1 a pair of scales A **scales** is a tool used for weighing things.
-REV 6 6 b5rr translate-bvolume χοῖνιξ σίτου…τρεῖς χοίνικες κριθῶν 1 A choenix of wheat … three choenices of barley A **choenix** was a specific measure that was about one liter. The plural of **choenix** is “choenices.” Alternate translation: “one liter of wheat … three liters of barley” or “one bowl of wheat … three bowls of barley” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
+REV 6 2 t2qg figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ στέφανος 1 he was given a crown Here, **to him was given a crown** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “he received a crown” or “God gave him a crown” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 3 bs66 translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν δευτέραν 1 the second seal The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 3 i1p4 translate-ordinal τοῦ δευτέρου ζῴου 1 the second living creature The word **second** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another living creature” or “the next living creature” or “living creature number two” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 4 w57m figs-activepassive τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπ’ αὐτὸν, ἐδόθη αὐτῷ 1 To its rider was given permission Here, **to the one sitting on it was granted to him** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave permission to its rider” or “its rider received permission” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 4 je64 figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτῷ μάχαιρα μεγάλη 1 This rider was given a huge sword Here, **to him was given a huge sword** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “this rider received a huge sword” or “God gave this rider a huge sword” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 5 v4us translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τρίτην 1 the third seal The word **third** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 5 zec1 translate-ordinal τοῦ τρίτου ζῴου 1 the third living creature The word **third** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another living creature” or “the next living creature” or “living creature number three” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 5 rm4y translate-unknown ζυγὸν 1 a pair of scales Here, **a pair of scales** is a tool that people utilize to weigh scarce food. Most likely **a pair of scales** was a weighing device which included two round plates or bowls hanging by ropes to a pole which the rider holds in his hand. Translators should maintain the imagery of the ancient tool and not describe modern systems for weighing things. Alternate translation: “a pair of balances” or “a pair of weights” or “balancing scales” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV 6 6 b5rr translate-bvolume χοῖνιξ σίτου…τρεῖς χοίνικες κριθῶν 1 A choenix of wheat … three choenices of barley A **choenix** was a specific measure that was about one liter. The plural of **choenix** is “choenices.” Alternate translation: “one quart of wheat … three quarts of barley” or “one bowl of wheat … three bowls of barley” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bvolume]])
REV 6 6 v3sn translate-bmoney δηναρίου…δηναρίου 1 one denarius The **denarius** was a coin that was worth a day’s wages. A denarius was a silver coin equivalent to a day’s wage. You could try to express this amount in terms of current monetary values, but that might cause your Bible translation to become outdated and inaccurate, since those values can change over time. So instead you might state something more general or give the equivalent in wages. Alternate translation: “one silver coin” or “the pay for one day of work” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bmoney]])
-REV 6 6 ej1v καὶ τὸ ἔλαιον καὶ τὸν οἶνον μὴ ἀδικήσῃς 1 But do not harm the oil and the wine If the **oil and wine** were harmed, there would be less of them for people to buy, and their prices would go up.
-REV 6 6 c5ik figs-metonymy τὸ ἔλαιον καὶ τὸν οἶνον 1 the oil and the wine The **oil** and the **wine** probably stand for the olive oil harvest and the grape harvest. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 6 7 mu5f translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τετάρτην 1 the fourth seal The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 7 zj87 translate-ordinal τοῦ τετάρτου ζῴου 1 the fourth living creature The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next living creature” or “living creature number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 8 e11y ἵππος χλωρός 1 pale horse Here, **pale** is the color of a dead body, so its color is a symbol of death. Alternate translation: “a grey horse”
-REV 6 8 df32 figs-metonymy τὸ τέταρτον τῆς γῆς 1 one-fourth of the earth Here, **the earth** represents the people of the earth. Alternate translation: “one-fourth of the people on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 6 8 aj1h translate-fraction τὸ τέταρτον τῆς γῆς 1 Alternate translation: “one out of every four of the people on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
-REV 6 8 tjw8 figs-metonymy ῥομφαίᾳ 1 the sword Here, **the sword** represents war. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 6 8 n9x3 ὑπὸ τῶν θηρίων τῆς γῆς 1 with the wild animals of the earth This means that Death and Hades would cause **the wild animals** to attack and kill people.
-REV 6 9 bv8r translate-ordinal τὴν πέμπτην σφραγῖδα 1 the fifth seal The word **fifth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number five” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 9 n3mi ὑποκάτω τοῦ θυσιαστηρίου 1 under the altar This may have been “at the base of the altar.”
-REV 6 9 b2kp figs-activepassive τῶν ἐσφαγμένων 1 those who had been killed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom others had killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 6 9 y8c6 figs-metonymy διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον 1 because of the word of God and the testimony which they held Here, **the word of God** is a metonym for the message from God. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 6 9 x1yr figs-metaphor διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον 1 Here, **held** is a metaphor. Here, holding **the testimony** could refer to: (1) believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the teachings of scripture and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV 6 10 qz1i figs-metonymy ἐκδικεῖς τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν 1 avenge our blood Here, **blood** represents their deaths. Alternate translation: “punish those who killed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 6 11 bq1p figs-activepassive ἕως πληρωθῶσιν καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν, οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποκτέννεσθαι ὡς καὶ αὐτοί 1 until the full number of their fellow servants and their brothers was reached who were to be killed, just as they had been killed This implies that God had decided that a certain number of people should **be killed** by their enemies. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until people had killed the full number of their fellow servants and brothers that they were going to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 6 11 q9xh καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν 1 their fellow servants and their brothers This is one group of people described in two ways: as **fellow servants** and as **brothers**. Alternate translation: “their brothers who serve God with them” or “their fellow believers who serve God with them”
-REV 6 11 p615 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Christians are often spoken of as being one another’s **brothers**. Females were among those spoken of here. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
-REV 6 12 z9qm translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἕκτην 1 the sixth seal The word **sixth** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “seal number six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
-REV 6 12 xu8l figs-simile μέλας ὡς σάκκος 1 as black as sackcloth Sometimes **sackcloth** was made of black hair. People would wear sackcloth when they were mourning. The image of sackcloth is meant to lead people to think of death and mourning. Alternate translation: “as black as mourning clothes” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV 6 12 g7rt figs-simile ὡς αἷμα 1 like blood The image of **blood** is meant to lead people to think of death. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you can state how it was like blood. Alternate translation: “red like blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV 6 13 s137 figs-activepassive ὡς συκῆ βάλλει τοὺς ὀλύνθους αὐτῆς, ὑπὸ ἀνέμου μεγάλου σειομένη 1 just as a fig tree drops its unripe fruit when shaken by a stormy wind If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “just as a stormy wind shakes a fig tree and causes it to drop its unripe fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 6 c5ik figs-metonymy τὸ ἔλαιον καὶ τὸν οἶνον 1 the oil and the wine The **oil** and the **wine** probably stand for the olive oil harvest and the grape harvest. In other words, **the oil and the wine** figuratively represent olive oil and grape harvest. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly.Alternate translation: “the olive and the grape” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV 6 7 mu5f translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν τετάρτην 1 the fourth seal The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 7 zj87 translate-ordinal τοῦ τετάρτου ζῴου 1 the fourth living creature The word **fourth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another living creature” or “the next living creature” or “living creature number four” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 8 t7y4 translate-transliterate ὁ Θάνατος, καὶ ὁ ᾍδης 1 See how you translated **Death** and **Hades** in [Revelation 1:18](../01/18.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
+REV 6 8 qlly figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἐξουσία 1 Here, **authority was given to them** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave the authority to them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 8 aj1h translate-fraction τὸ τέταρτον τῆς γῆς 1 Here, **one-fourth** means one part out of four equal parts. Alternate translation: “one out of every four of the people of the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
+REV 6 8 df32 figs-metonymy τῆς γῆς 1 one-fourth of the earth Here, **the earth** represents the people of the earth. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “one-fourth of the people on the earth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV 6 8 tjw8 figs-metonymy ῥομφαίᾳ 1 the sword Here, **sword** represents war. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “war” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV 6 9 bv8r translate-ordinal τὴν πέμπτην σφραγῖδα 1 the fifth seal The word **fifth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number five” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 9 b2kp figs-activepassive τῶν ἐσφαγμένων 1 those who had been killed If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “those whom others had killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 9 x1yr figs-metaphor διὰ τὸν λόγον τοῦ Θεοῦ, καὶ διὰ τὴν μαρτυρίαν ἣν εἶχον 1 Here, **held** is a metaphor. Here, holding **the testimony** could refer to: (1) believing God’s word and testimony. Alternate translation: “because of the scriptures and what they taught about Jesus Christ” or “because they believed the word of God, which is his testimony” (2) testifying about the word of God. Alternate translation: “because they testified about the word of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 6 9 tqdd τὴν μαρτυρίαν 1 See how you translated **the testimony** in [Revelation 1:2](../01/02.md).
+REV 6 10 qz1i figs-metonymy τὸ αἷμα ἡμῶν 1 avenge our blood Here, **blood** represents the deaths of these believers. If it would be helpful in your language, you could use an equivalent expression from your language or state the meaning plainly. Alternative translation: “those who killed us” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
+REV 6 11 x3a9 figs-activepassive ἐδόθη αὐτοῖς ἑκάστῳ στολὴ λευκή 1 Here, **to each of them was given a white robe** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God gave to each of them a white robe” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 11 jppt figs-activepassive καὶ ἐρρέθη αὐτοῖς 1 Here, **and they were told** might be expressed with an active verbal phrase. If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “God told them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 11 bq1p figs-activepassive ἕως πληρωθῶσιν καὶ οἱ σύνδουλοι αὐτῶν, καὶ οἱ ἀδελφοὶ αὐτῶν, οἱ μέλλοντες ἀποκτέννεσθαι ὡς καὶ αὐτοί 1 until the full number of their fellow servants and their brothers was reached who were to be killed, just as they had been killed This entire clause implies that God had decided that a certain number of people should **be killed** by their enemies. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “until people had killed the full number of their fellow servants and brothers that they were going to kill” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 11 p615 figs-metaphor οἱ ἀδελφοὶ 1 brothers Here, **brothers** mean “fellow believers in Jesus.” Christians are often spoken of as being one another’s **brothers**. Females were among those spoken of here. Alternate translation: “fellow Christians” or “fellow believers” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 6 12 z9qm translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἕκτην 1 the sixth seal The word **sixth** is an ordinal number. If your language does not use ordinal numbers, you can use a cardinal number here or an equivalent expression. Alternate translation: “another seal” or “the next seal” or “seal number six” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
+REV 6 12 g9dm translate-unknown σεισμὸς μέγας 1 Here, **a great earthquake** is a natural disaster in which the ground shakes from geological movement. Your language and culture may have a term for an **earthquake** that you can use in your translation. You could also explain the meaning of the term **earthquake**, as UST does. Alternate translation: “a great shaking of the ground” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV 6 12 xu8l figs-simile μέλας ὡς σάκκος 1 as black as sackcloth Here, **sackcloth** is clothing for mourning that is made from black hair. People would wear **sackcloth** when they were mourning. The image of **sackcloth** is meant to lead people to think of death and mourning just like the color of black also evokes imagery of death and mourning. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you can explain that **sackcloth** is clothing made for mourning explicitly. Alternate translation: “black as mourning clothing” or “dark like sackcloth” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 6 12 g7rt figs-simile ὡς αἷμα 1 like blood Here, the moon is like **blood** because the color of the moon changes to a dark red color. If your readers would misunderstand this simile, you can state how the moon is like blood explicitly. Alternate translation: “red like blood” or “as red as blood” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 6 13 s137 figs-activepassive ὡς συκῆ βάλλει τοὺς ὀλύνθους αὐτῆς, ὑπὸ ἀνέμου μεγάλου σειομένη 1 just as a fig tree drops its unripe fruit when shaken by a stormy wind If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “just as a stormy wind shakes a fig tree and causes it to drop its unripe fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 13 lkff figs-simile ὡς συκῆ βάλλει τοὺς ὀλύνθους αὐτῆς 1 Here, the stars in the sky fall like immature figs fall from a fig tree during a storm. If your readers would misunderstand this simile with figs, you do not need to state explicitly that the falling fruits are figs. Alternate translation: “like a fruit tree drops its unripe fruit” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 6 14 jyb7 figs-simile ὁ οὐρανὸς ἀπεχωρίσθη ὡς βιβλίον ἑλισσόμενον 1 The sky vanished like a scroll that was being rolled up The **sky** was normally thought of as being strong like a sheet of metal, but now it was weak like a sheet of paper and easily torn and **rolled up**. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
-REV 6 15 m6j6 οἱ χιλίαρχοι 1 the generals Here, **the generals** refers to the warriors who command in the battle.
-REV 6 15 vl6h τὰ σπήλαια 1 the caves These **caves** are large holes in the sides of hills.
+REV 6 14 xzn5 figs-activepassive ὁ οὐρανὸς ἀπεχωρίσθη 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “the sky split open” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 14 gl0m figs-activepassive ὡς βιβλίον ἑλισσόμενον 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “as a scroll folds up” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 14 ic4p figs-activepassive πᾶν ὄρος καὶ νῆσος ἐκ τῶν τόπων αὐτῶν ἐκινήθησαν 1 If your language does not use this passive form, you could express the idea in active form or in another way that is natural in your language. Alternate translation: “every mountain and island shifted from its place” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
+REV 6 15 m6j6 translate-unknown οἱ χιλίαρχοι 1 the generals Here, **the generals** refers to military officers or warriors who command in the battle. Alternate translation: “the war leaders” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
+REV 6 15 n984 figs-merism οἱ βασιλεῖς τῆς γῆς, καὶ οἱ μεγιστᾶνες, καὶ οἱ χιλίαρχοι, καὶ οἱ πλούσιοι, καὶ οἱ ἰσχυροὶ, καὶ πᾶς δοῦλος καὶ ἐλεύθερος 1 Here, all the nouns in the series or list refers to every type of person and people. The various examples refer to all kinds of people who exist in the world. The merism names various kinds or parts of society by stating the extreme ends of the society. If it would be helpful in your language, you could state the meaning plainly. Alternate translation: “all types of people, whether rich, poor, powerful, or weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+REV 6 15 vl6h translate-unknown τὰ σπήλαια 1 the caves These **caves** are large holes in the sides of hills. If your readers would not be familiar with **caves**, you could use the name of something similar in your area or you could use a more general term. Alternate translation: “the holes in the rocks” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-unknown]])
REV 6 16 f4bj figs-metonymy προσώπου τοῦ 1 the face of the one Here, **face** represents “presence.” Alternate translation: “the presence of the one” or “the one” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 6 16 g0ed writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 6 17 bd8v figs-metonymy ἦλθεν ἡ ἡμέρα ἡ μεγάλη τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτῶν 1 the great day of their wrath has come The **great day of their wrath** refers to the time when they would punish wicked people. Alternate translation: “this is the terrible time when they will punish people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
@@ -449,19 +453,18 @@ REV 6 17 i7t4 figs-metaphor ἦλθεν 1 has come Existing now is spoken of as
REV 6 17 cq9e ὀργῆς αὐτῶν 1 their wrath Here, **their** refers to the one on the throne and the Lamb.
REV 6 17 r1ta figs-metonymy τίς δύναται σταθῆναι? 1 Who is able to stand? Surviving, or staying alive, is spoken of as standing. Alternate translation: “Who can survive?” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 6 17 pmn6 figs-rquestion τίς δύναται σταθῆναι? 1 This question is used to express their great sadness and fear that no one will be able to survive when God punishes them. Alternate translation: “no one can survive!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-rquestion]])
-REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 7 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.
Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
+REV 7 intro f27i 0 # Revelation 7 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Scholars have interpreted parts of this chapter in many different ways. Translators do not need to fully understand what this chapter means to accurately translate its contents. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
It is important to accurately translate the large numbers in this chapter. The number 144,000 is twelve times twelve thousand.
Translators should be aware that the tribes of the people of Israel are not listed in this chapter the same as they are generally listed in the Old Testament.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 5-8 and 15-17.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Worship
God saves his people and keeps them through times of trouble. His people respond by worshipping him. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/worship]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### The Lamb
This refers to Jesus. In this chapter, it is also a title for Jesus. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
REV 7 1 b1yl 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of 144,000 servants of God who become marked with seals. Their marking takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal.
REV 7 1 id3y τὰς τέσσαρας γωνίας τῆς γῆς 1 the four corners of the earth The **earth** is spoken of as if it were flat and square like a sheet of paper. The phrase **the four corners** refers to the north, south, east, and west.
REV 7 2 sgq7 figs-metonymy σφραγῖδα 1 the seal of the living God Here, **the seal** refers to a tool that is used to press a mark onto a wax seal. In this case the tool would be used to put a mark on God’s people. Alternate translation: “the marker” or “stamp” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 7 3 upb7 figs-metonymy σφραγίσωμεν τοὺς δούλους τοῦ Θεοῦ ἡμῶν ἐπὶ τῶν μετώπων αὐτῶν 1 have sealed … on their foreheads Here, to **seal** refers to placing a mark on something. This mark shows that the people belong to God and that he will protect them. Alternate translation: “we put a mark on the foreheads of the servants of God” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 7 3 je8m μετώπων 1 foreheads The **forehead** is the top of the face, above the eyes.
REV 7 4 m58v figs-activepassive τῶν ἐσφραγισμένων 1 those who were sealed If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom God’s angel marked” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 7 4 lh7h figs-ellipsis ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα τέσσαρες χιλιάδες 1 144000 Alternate translation: “one hundred forty-four thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
-REV 7 5 lyz8 figs-ellipsis δώδεκα χιλιάδες 1 twelve thousand from the tribe Alternate translation: “12,000 people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-ellipsis]])
+REV 7 4 lh7h translate-numbers ἑκατὸν τεσσεράκοντα τέσσαρες χιλιάδες 1 144000 Alternate translation: “one hundred forty-four thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+REV 7 5 lyz8 translate-numbers δώδεκα χιλιάδες 1 twelve thousand from the tribe Alternate translation: “twelve thousand people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
REV 7 9 cj5k 0 General Information: John begins to describe a second vision about a multitude praising God. This vision also takes place after the Lamb opens the sixth seal and before he opens the seventh seal.
-REV 7 9 ioxw writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 7 9 au1m ὄχλος πολύς 1 a huge multitude Alternate translation: “a huge crowd” or “a great number of people”
-REV 7 9 v63z στολὰς λευκάς 1 white robes Here the color **white** represents purity.
+REV 7 9 ioxw writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 7 10 m5az ἡ σωτηρία τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν 1 Salvation belongs to Alternate translation: “Salvation comes from our God”
REV 7 10 vlv1 figs-abstractnouns ἡ σωτηρία τῷ Θεῷ ἡμῶν, τῷ καθημένῳ ἐπὶ τῷ θρόνῳ καὶ τῷ Ἀρνίῳ 1 Salvation belongs … to the Lamb They were praising **God** and **the Lamb**. If your readers would misunderstand the abstract **Salvation**, you can express it with the verb “save.” Alternate translation: “Our God, who sits on the throne, and the Lamb have saved us!” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 7 10 e31m writing-symlanguage τῷ Ἀρνίῳ 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -477,7 +480,7 @@ REV 7 14 b7mi figs-metaphor ἔπλυναν τὰς στολὰς αὐτῶν,
REV 7 14 ym21 figs-metonymy τῷ αἵματι τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 the blood of the Lamb Here, **blood** is used to refer to the death of Lamb. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 7 14 xl4x writing-symlanguage τοῦ Ἀρνίου 1 Here, **Lamb** is used symbolically to refer to Jesus. See how you translated **Lamb** in [Revelation 5:6](../05/06.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 7 15 qs23 εἰσιν…αὐτούς 1 they … them Here, **they** and **them** refer to those people who have come out of the great tribulation.
-REV 7 15 us3i figs-merism ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτὸς 1 day and night Here, **day** and **night** are used together to mean “all the time” or “without stopping” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
+REV 7 15 us3i figs-merism ἡμέρας καὶ νυκτὸς 1 day and night Here, **day** and **night** are used together to mean “all the time” or “without stopping”. Alernate translation: “continually” or “always” or “unendingly” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-merism]])
REV 7 15 k9f2 figs-metaphor σκηνώσει ἐπ’ αὐτούς 1 will spread his tent over them Protecting them is spoken of as if he were giving them shelter to live under. Alternate translation: “will shelter them” or “will protect them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 7 16 p6u7 οὐ πεινάσουσιν…αὐτοὺς 1 They … them Here, **They** and **them** refer to those people who have come out of the great tribulation.
REV 7 16 t45h figs-metaphor οὐδὲ μὴ πέσῃ ἐπ’ αὐτοὺς ὁ ἥλιος 1 The sun will not beat down The heat of the **sun** is compared to punishment that causes people to suffer. Alternate translation: “and the sun will not burn them” or “and the sun will not make them weak” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
@@ -487,7 +490,7 @@ REV 7 17 wc49 αὐτούς…αὐτοὺς 1 their … them Both occurrences
REV 7 17 bi5i figs-metaphor ὅτι τὸ Ἀρνίον…ποιμανεῖ αὐτούς 1 For the Lamb … will be their shepherd The elder speaks of the Lamb’s care for his people as if it were a shepherd’s care for his sheep. Alternate translation: “for the Lamb … will be like a shepherd to them” or “for the Lamb … will care for them as a shepherd cares for his sheep” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 7 17 m6m8 figs-metaphor ὁδηγήσει αὐτοὺς ἐπὶ ζωῆς πηγὰς ὑδάτων 1 he will guide them to springs of living water The elder speaks of what gives life as if it were **springs** of fresh **water**. Alternate translation: “he will guide them like a shepherd guiding his sheep to fresh water” or “he will guide them to life like a shepherd guiding his sheep to living water” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 7 17 g3d2 figs-metonymy ἐξαλείψει ὁ Θεὸς πᾶν δάκρυον ἐκ τῶν ὀφθαλμῶν αὐτῶν 1 God will wipe away every tear from their eyes Here, a **tear** represents sadness. Alternate translation: “God will wipe away their sadness, like wiping away tears” or “God will cause them to not be sad anymore” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 8 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven seals and seven trumpets
This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Passive voice
John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
### Similes
In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 8 intro ma7f 0 # Revelation 8 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven seals and seven trumpets
This chapter begins to show what happens when the Lamb opens the seventh seal. God uses the prayers of all believers to cause dramatic things to happen on earth. John then describes what happens when angels sound the first four of seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Passive voice
John uses the passive voice several times in this chapter. This hides who performs the action. This will be difficult to convey if the translator’s language does not have a passive voice. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
### Similes
In verses 8 and 10, John uses similes to try to describe the images he sees in the vision. He compares the images to everyday things. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 8 1 d652 0 Connecting Statement: The Lamb opens the seventh seal.
REV 8 1 mh2b translate-ordinal τὴν σφραγῖδα τὴν ἑβδόμην 1 the seventh seal This is the last of the seven seals on the scroll. The word **seventh** is an ordinal number. Alternate translation: “the next seal” or “the final seal” or “seal number seven” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-ordinal]])
REV 8 2 fri9 figs-activepassive ἐδόθησαν αὐτοῖς ἑπτὰ σάλπιγγες 1 seven trumpets were given to them Each of the seven angels were given one trumpet. If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. This could mean: (1) God gave them seven trumpets. (2) the Lamb gave them seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
@@ -511,7 +514,7 @@ REV 8 12 dfm7 figs-activepassive ἐπλήγη τὸ τρίτον τοῦ ἡλ
REV 8 12 ukh6 σκοτισθῇ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῶν 1 a third of them turned dark The phrase **a third of then turned dark** could mean: (1) one third of the time, they were dark. (2) one third of the sun, one third of the moon, and one third of the stars became dark.
REV 8 12 t1ag ἡ ἡμέρα μὴ φάνῃ τὸ τρίτον αὐτῆς, καὶ ἡ νὺξ ὁμοίως 1 a third of the day and a third of the night had no light Alternate translation: “there was no light during one third of the day and one third of the night” or “they did not shine during one third of the day and one third of the night”
REV 8 13 x375 figs-activepassive ἐκ τῶν λοιπῶν φωνῶν τῆς σάλπιγγος τῶν τριῶν ἀγγέλων τῶν μελλόντων σαλπίζειν 1 because of the remaining trumpet … angels If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “because the three angels who have not yet sounded their trumpets are about to sound them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
-REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 9 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.
### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
### Abaddon and Apollyon
“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 9 intro sq5c 0 # Revelation 9 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John continues to describe what happens when angels sound seven trumpets. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### Woe
John describes several “woes” in the Book of Revelation. This chapter begins to describe three “woes” announced at the end of Chapter 8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Animal imagery
This chapter includes several animals: locusts, scorpions, horses, lions, and snakes. Animals convey different qualities or traits. For example, a lion is powerful and dangerous. Translators should use the same animals in their translation if possible. If the animal is unknown, one with similar qualities or traits should be used.
### Bottomless pit
This image is seen several times in the Book of Revelation. It is a picture of hell as being inescapable and the opposite direction as heaven. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/hell]])
### Abaddon and Apollyon
“Abaddon” is a Hebrew word. “Apollyon” is a Greek word. Both words mean “Destroyer.” John used the sounds of the Hebrew word and wrote them with Greek letters. The ULT and UST write the sounds of both words with English letters. Translators are encouraged to transliterate these words using the letters of the target language. The original Greek readers would have understood “Apollyon” to mean “Destroyer.” So translators may also supply what it means in the text or in a footnote. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-transliterate]])
### Repentance
Despite great signs, people are described as not repenting and so remain in their sin. People refusing to repent are also mentioned in Chapter 16. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/repent]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/sin]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Simile
John uses many similes in this chapter. They help to describe the images that he sees in his vision. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 9 1 d26c 0 Connecting Statement: The fifth of the seven angels begins to sound his trumpet.
REV 9 1 jim6 εἶδον ἀστέρα ἐκ τοῦ οὐρανοῦ πεπτωκότα 1 I saw a star from heaven that had fallen John saw the **star** after it **had fallen**. He did not watch if fall.
REV 9 1 v12j ἡ κλεὶς τοῦ φρέατος τῆς Ἀβύσσου 1 the key to the shaft of the bottomless pit Alternate translation: “the key that unlocks the shaft of the bottomless pit”
@@ -549,13 +552,13 @@ REV 9 15 ijx2 figs-activepassive ἐλύθησαν οἱ τέσσαρες ἄγ
REV 9 15 p3w1 figs-activepassive οἱ τέσσαρες ἄγγελοι, οἱ ἡτοιμασμένοι 1 The four angels who had been prepared If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “the four angels whom God had prepared” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 9 15 b3d6 figs-parallelism εἰς τὴν ὥραν, καὶ ἡμέραν, καὶ μῆνα, καὶ ἐνιαυτόν 1 for that hour, that day, that month, and that year These words are used to show that there is a specific, chosen time and not just any time. Alternate translation: “for that exact time” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-parallelism]])
REV 9 16 h8uf 0 General Information: Suddenly, a huge number of soldiers on horseback appear in John’s vision. John is no longer speaking about the four angels mentioned in the previous verse.
-REV 9 16 ays5 translate-numbers δύο μυριάδες μυριάδων 1 200000000 Some ways to express **two myriads** are: “two hundred million” or “two hundred thousand thousand” or “twenty thousand times ten thousand.” If your language does not have a specific number for this, you could also see how you translated a similar large number in [Revelation 5:11](../05/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
+REV 9 16 ays5 translate-numbers δύο μυριάδες μυριάδων 1 200,000,000 Some ways to express **two myriads** are: “two hundred million” or “two hundred thousand thousand” or “twenty thousand times ten thousand.” If your language does not have a specific number for this, you could also see how you translated a similar large number in [Revelation 5:11](../05/11.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
REV 9 17 j5n9 πυρίνους 1 fiery red See how you translated this in [Revelation 6:3](../06/03.md). Alternate translation: “red like fire” or “bright red”
REV 9 17 pqe8 θειώδεις 1 sulfurous yellow Alternate translation: “yellow like sulfur” or “bright yellow like sulfur”
REV 9 18 x4fr translate-fraction τὸ τρίτον τῶν ἀνθρώπων 1 A third of the people See how you translated “A third” in [Revelation 8:7](../08/07.md). Alternate translation: “One third of the people” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-fraction]])
REV 9 20 xf3t figs-activepassive οἳ οὐκ ἀπεκτάνθησαν ἐν ταῖς πληγαῖς ταύταις 1 those who were not killed by these plagues If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “those whom the plagues had not killed” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 9 20 d3vn figs-distinguish ἃ οὔτε βλέπειν δύνανται, οὔτε ἀκούειν, οὔτε περιπατεῖν 1 things that cannot see, hear, or walk This phrase reminds us that idols are not alive and do not deserve to be worshiped. But the people did not stop worshiping them. Alternate translation: “even though these idols cannot see, hear, or walk” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-distinguish]])
-REV 10 intro ys3l 0 # Revelation 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven thunders
John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for “thunder” when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### “The mystery of God”
This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Simile
John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
+REV 10 intro ys3l 0 # Revelation 10 General Notes
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Seven thunders
John here describes the seven thunders as making sounds that he could understand as words. However, translators should use their normal word for “thunder” when translating these verses. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### “The mystery of God”
This refers to some aspect of the hidden plan of God. It is not necessary to know what this mystery is to translate it. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/reveal]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Simile
John uses similes to help him describe the face, legs, and voice of the mighty angel. Translators should understand other objects in this chapter, such as the rainbow and the cloud, with their normal meanings. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
REV 10 1 xr6f 0 General Information: John begins to describe a vision of a mighty angel holding a scroll. In John’s vision he is viewing what is happening from earth. This takes place between the blowing of the sixth and seventh trumpets.
REV 10 1 jj2e figs-metaphor περιβεβλημένον νεφέλην 1 He was robed in a cloud John speaks of the angel as if he were wearing **a cloud** as his clothing. This expression may be understood as metaphor. However, because very unusual things were often seen in visions, it might be understood as a literally true statement in its context. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 10 1 qax6 figs-simile τὸ πρόσωπον αὐτοῦ ὡς ὁ ἥλιος 1 His face was like the sun John compares the brightness of **his face** with the brightness of **the sun**. Alternate translation: “his face was bright like the sun” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-simile]])
@@ -628,7 +631,7 @@ REV 11 19 c7pd figs-activepassive καὶ ἠνοίγη ὁ ναὸς τοῦ Θ
REV 11 19 d9z7 figs-activepassive ὤφθη ἡ κιβωτὸς τῆς διαθήκης τοῦ Κυρίου ἐν τῷ ναῷ αὐτοῦ 1 the ark of his covenant was seen within his temple If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “I saw the ark of his covenant in his temple” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 11 19 b6ly ἀστραπαὶ 1 flashes of lightning Use your language’s way of describing what **lightning** looks like each time it appears. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md).
REV 11 19 ap5g φωναὶ, καὶ βρονταὶ 1 rumblings, crashes of thunder Here, **loud sounds and crashes of thunder** refers to the loud noises that thunder makes. Use your language’s way of describing the sound of thunder. See how you translated this in [Revelation 4:5](../04/05.md).
-REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “A great sign was seen in heaven”
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
+REV 12 intro cq7x 0 # Revelation 12 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 10-12.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Serpent
The Book of Revelation uses imagery from the Old Testament. For example, John refers to Satan as the serpent. This image comes from the account of the Garden of Eden when Satan tempted Eve. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “A great sign was seen in heaven”
By using the passive voice here, John does not say who saw this great sign in heaven. The translation may be difficult when the subject is unclear, if your language does not have a passive voice. Many English translations use the past tense here and say “A great sign appeared in heaven.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
REV 12 1 n4ii 0 General Information: John begins to describe a woman who appears in his vision.
REV 12 1 j9yl figs-activepassive γυνὴ περιβεβλημένη τὸν ἥλιον, καὶ ἡ σελήνη ὑποκάτω τῶν ποδῶν αὐτῆς 1 a woman clothed with the sun, and with the moon under her feet If your language does not use this passive form, you can state this in active form. Alternate translation: “a woman who was wearing the sun and had the moon under her feet” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-activepassive]])
REV 12 3 y4c1 0 Connecting Statement: John describes a dragon that appears in his vision.
@@ -749,7 +752,7 @@ REV 14 10 zl4g writing-symlanguage τῷ ποτηρίῳ τῆς ὀργῆς α
REV 14 11 dds6 figs-metonymy ὁ καπνὸς τοῦ βασανισμοῦ αὐτῶν 1 The smoke from their torment The phrase **their torment** refers to the fire that torments them. Alternate translation: “the smoke from the fire that torments them” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 14 11 z5ea οὐκ ἔχουσιν ἀνάπαυσιν 1 they have no rest Alternate translation: “they have no relief” or “the torment does not stop”
REV 14 12 me1j ὧδε ἡ ὑπομονὴ τῶν ἁγίων ἐστίν 1 Here is the patient endurance of the saints See how you translated a similar phrase in [Revelation 13:10](../13/10.md).
-REV 14 12 wo34 figs-idiom τηρούντων 1 See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
+REV 14 12 wo34 figs-idiom τηροῦντες 1 See how you translated this word in [Revelation 1:3](../01/03.md) and in [Revelation 2:26](../02/26.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-idiom]])
REV 14 13 x62q οἱ νεκροὶ οἱ…ἀποθνῄσκοντες 1 the dead who die Alternate translation: “those who die”
REV 14 13 hy1a οἱ ἐν Κυρίῳ ἀποθνῄσκοντες 1 who die in the Lord This may refer to believers who are killed by their enemies. Alternate translation: “who are united to the Lord and die” or “who die because they are united to the Lord”
REV 14 13 v4xz figs-personification τὰ…ἔργα αὐτῶν ἀκολουθεῖ μετ’ αὐτῶν 1 their deeds will follow them These **deeds** are spoken of as if they were alive and able to **follow** those who did them. This could mean: (1) others will know the good deeds these people have done. (2) God will reward them for their deeds. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])
@@ -766,7 +769,7 @@ REV 14 20 xt4z ἄχρι τῶν χαλινῶν τῶν ἵππων 1 up to th
REV 14 20 m2i9 τῶν χαλινῶν 1 bridle A **bridle** is device made of leather straps that goes around a horse’s head and is used for directing the horse.
REV 14 20 gdl8 translate-numbers σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων 1 1,600 stadia Alternate translation: “one thousand six hundred stadia” or “sixteen hundred stadia” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-numbers]])
REV 14 20 dbz1 translate-bdistance σταδίων χιλίων ἑξακοσίων 1 A “stadium” is 185 meters. The plural form of “stradium” is **stadia**. In modern measures this would be about “300 kilometers” or “200 miles.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bdistance]])
-REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Victorious over the beast”
These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Songs
The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
+REV 15 intro zxt7 0 # Revelation 15 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
In this chapter, John describes events and pictures that occur in heaven.
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 3-4.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### “Victorious over the beast”
These people are spiritually victorious. While most spiritual battles cannot be seen, the Book of Revelation pictures spiritual battles as openly occurring. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/spirit]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### “The temple having the tent of witness, was open in heaven”
Scripture elsewhere indicates the earthly temple copied God’s perfect dwelling place in heaven. Here John seems to refer to God’s heavenly dwelling place or temple. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/heaven]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### Songs
The Book of Revelation often describes heaven as a place where people sing. They worship God with songs. This illustrates that heaven is a place where God is always worshiped.
REV 15 1 p98c 0 General Information: This verse is a summary of what will happen in 15:6-16:21.
REV 15 1 l345 figs-doublet μέγα καὶ θαυμαστόν 1 great and marvelous The words **great** and **marvelous** have similar meanings and are used for emphasis. Alternate translation: “something that greatly amazed me” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-doublet]])
REV 15 1 w6lf ἀγγέλους ἑπτὰ ἔχοντας πληγὰς ἑπτὰ 1 seven angels with seven plagues Alternate translation: “seven angels who had authority to send seven plagues on the earth”
@@ -843,7 +846,7 @@ REV 16 19 r2vh figs-activepassive Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη ἐμνήσθ
REV 16 19 g6s8 writing-symlanguage δοῦναι αὐτῇ τὸ ποτήριον τοῦ οἴνου τοῦ θυμοῦ τῆς ὀργῆς αὐτοῦ 1 he gave that city the cup filled with the wine made from his furious wrath Here, **the wine** is a symbol of his **wrath**. Making people drink it is a symbol of punishing them. Alternate translation: “he made the people of that city drink the wine that represents his wrath” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
REV 16 20 byn4 figs-metonymy ὄρη οὐχ εὑρέθησαν 1 the mountains were no longer found The inability to see any **mountains** is metonymy expressing the idea that no mountains existed any longer. Alternate translation: “there were no longer any mountains” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
REV 16 21 i43r translate-bweight ταλαντιαία 1 a talent You may convert the **talent** to a modern measure. Alternate translation: “33 kilograms” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/translate-bweight]])
-REV 17 intro ysn1 0 # Revelation 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prostitute
Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
### Seven hills
This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up”
This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come” elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: “the beast … is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings.” The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../rev/17/11.md))
+REV 17 intro ysn1 0 # Revelation 17 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
This chapter begins to describe how God will destroy Babylon.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prostitute
Scripture often pictures idolatrous Jews as adulterous people and sometimes as prostitutes. This is not the reference here. The translator should allow this illustration to be vague. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
### Seven hills
This possibly refers to the city of Rome, which was known as the city on seven hills. However, the translator should not attempt to identify Rome in the translation.
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
John uses many different metaphors in this chapter. He explains some of their meanings, but allows them to remain relatively unclear. The translator should attempt to do the same. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
## Other possible translation difficulties in this chapter
### “The beast you saw existed, does not exist now, but is about to come up”
This and similar phrases in this chapter contrast the beast with Jesus. Jesus is called “the one who is, and who was, and who is to come” elsewhere in the Book of Revelation. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-explicit]])
### Paradox
A paradox is a true statement that appears to describe something impossible. This sentence in 17:11 is a paradox: “the beast … is itself also an eighth king; but it is one of those seven kings.” The translator should not attempt to resolve this paradox. It should remain a mystery. ([Revelation 17:11](../rev/17/11.md))
REV 17 1 ppd7 0 General Information: John begins to describe the part of his vision about the great prostitute.
REV 17 1 c6f4 figs-abstractnouns τὸ κρίμα τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης 1 the condemnation of the great prostitute If your readers would misunderstand the abstract noun “judgment”, you can express it with a verb. Alternate translation: “how God will judge the great prostitute” or “how God will condemn the great prostitute”(See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-abstractnouns]])
REV 17 1 f7ry writing-symlanguage τῆς πόρνης τῆς μεγάλης 1 the great prostitute Here, **the great prostitute** represents a certain sinful city. Alternate translation: “the prostitute that everyone knows about” or “a certain sinful city” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-symlanguage]])
@@ -892,7 +895,7 @@ REV 17 17 el9y figs-activepassive ἄχρι τελεσθήσονται οἱ λ
REV 17 18 w2lu 0 Connecting Statement: The angel finishes speaking to John about the prostitute and the beast.
REV 17 18 md61 figs-metaphor ἔστιν 1 is Here, **is** stands for “represents.” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 17 18 uy1m figs-metonymy ἡ πόλις ἡ μεγάλη, ἡ ἔχουσα βασιλείαν 1 the great city that rules When it says that the **city** rules, it means that the leader of the city rules. Alternate translation: “the great city whose leader rules” (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metonymy]])
-REV 18 intro j5qc 0 # Revelation 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prophecy
The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalypticwriting]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
+REV 18 intro j5qc 0 # Revelation 18 General Notes
## Structure and formatting
Some translations set each line of poetry farther to the right than the rest of the text to make it easier to read. The ULT does this with verses 1-8.
## Special concepts in this chapter
### Prophecy
The angel prophesies about Babylon falling, which here means being destroyed. It is spoken of as having already happened. This is common in prophecy. It emphasizes that the coming judgment will certainly happen. The angel also prophesies that the people will lament over Babylon falling. (See: [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/prophet]] and [[rc://en/tw/dict/bible/kt/judge]] and [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/writing-apocalytic]])
## Important figures of speech in this chapter
### Metaphors
Prophecy frequently uses metaphors. This chapter has a slightly different apocalyptic style than the Book of Revelation overall. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 18 1 xxe5 0 Connecting Statement: Another angel comes down from heaven and speaks. This is a different angel than the one in the previous chapter, who spoke about the prostitute and the beast.
REV 18 2 a2f5 figs-metaphor ἔπεσεν, Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη 1 Fallen is Babylon the great The angel speaks of **Babylon** having been destroyed as if it had fallen. See how you translated this in [Revelation 14:8](../14/08.md). (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-metaphor]])
REV 18 2 fl3m figs-personification Βαβυλὼν ἡ μεγάλη 1 The angel speaks of the city of Babylon as if it were a prostitute. (See: [[rc://en/ta/man/translate/figs-personification]])